903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D): Difference between revisions

Latest revision as of 10:37, 13 January 2026

903.4.1 Scope of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards and Application (MUTCD Section 2D.01)

Standard. The provisions of EPG 903.4 shall apply to any road or street other than expressways and freeways, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.

Support. Guide signs direct road users along streets and highways; inform them of intersecting routes; direct them to cities, towns, villages, or other important destinations; identify nearby rivers and streams, parks, forests, and historical sites; and provide information that will help them along their way in the most simple and direct manner possible.

Guidance. The selection of primary or control destinations (those displayed consistently over longer distances along a route) displayed on guide signs should be meaningful to road users in navigation and orientation. The destinations selected should be identifiable on official maps.

Support. EPG 903.1 addresses placement, location, and other general criteria for signs.

903.4.2 Color, and Retroreflection, and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2D.02)

Support. Requirements for illumination, retroreflection, and color are stated under the specific headings for individual guide signs or groups of signs. General provisions are given in EPG 903.1.6, 903.1.21, and 903.1.22.

Standard. Except as otherwise provided in the EPG for individual signs or groups of signs, guide signs on streets and highways shall have a white message and border on a green background. All messages, borders, and legends shall be retroreflective and all backgrounds shall be retroreflective.

Support. Color coding is sometimes used to help road users distinguish between multiple potentially confusing destinations. Examples of valuable uses of color coding include guide signs for roadways approaching or inside an airport property with multiple terminals serving multiple airlines, and community wayfinding guide signs for various traffic generator destinations within a community or area.

Standard. Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, different color sign backgrounds shall not be used to provide color coding of destinations. The color coding shall be accomplished by the use of different colored square or rectangular sign panels on the face of the guide signs (see Figure 903.4.2).

Option. The different colored sign panels on the face of a sign may include a black or white (whichever provides the better contrast with the panel color) letter, numeral, or other appropriate designation to identify an airport terminal or other destination.

Support. EPG 903.4.48 contains specific provisions regarding Community Wayfinding guide signs.

903.4.3 Size of Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.03)

Standard. Except as provided in EPG 903.1.7, the minimum sizes of conventional road guide signs that have standardized designs shall be as shown in Table 903.4.3.

Support. EPG 903.1.7 contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in Table 903.4.3.

Option. Signs larger than those shown in Table 903.4.3 may be used (see EPG 903.1.7) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Support. For other guide signs, the legends are so variable that a standardized design or size is not appropriate. The sign size is determined primarily by the length of the message, and the size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.

Option. Reduced letter height, reduced interline spacing, and reduced edge spacing may be used on guide signs if sign size must be limited by factors such as lane width or vertical or lateral clearance.

Guidance. Reduced spacing between the letters or words on a line of legend should not be used as a means of reducing the overall size of a guide sign, except where determined necessary by engineering judgment to meet unusual lateral-space constraints. In such cases, the legibility distance of the sign legend should be the primary consideration in determining whether to reduce the spacing between the letters or the words or between the words and the sign border, or to reduce the letter height.

When a reduction in the prescribed size is necessary, the design used should be as similar as possible to the design for the standard size.

Table 903.4.3. Conventional Road Guide Sign and Plaque Sizes
Sign or Plaque	Sign Designation	EPG Article	Conventional Road (in. x in.)			Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
Sign or Plaque	Sign Designation	EPG Article	Standard	Oversized	Special	Mainline & Ramps
Interstate Route (1 or 2 digits)	M1-1, M1-1a	903.4.11	Varies X 24	Varies X 24	-	Varies X 24
Interstate Route (3 digits)	M1-1, M1-1a	903.4.11	Varies X 30	Varies X 30	-	Varies X 30
Off-Interstate Route (1 or 2 digits)	M1-2	903.4.11	Varies X 24	Varies X 24	-	Varies X 24
Off-Interstate Route (3 digits)	M1-2	903.4.11	Varies X 30	Varies X 30	-	Varies X 30
U.S. Route (1 or 2 digits)	M1-4	903.4.11	Varies X 24	Varies X 24	-	Varies X 24
U.S. Route (3 digits)	M1-4	903.4.11	Varies X 30	Varies X 30	-	Varies X 30
State Route (1 or 2 digits)	M1-5	903.4.11	Varies X 24	Varies X 24	-	Varies X 24
State Route (3 digits)	M1-5	903.4.11	Varies X 30	Varies X 30	-	Varies X 30
State Route (Letter)	M1-5a	903.4.11	Varies X 24	Varies X 24	-	Varies X 24
Junction (plaque)	M2-1P	903.4.13	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
North (plaque)	M3-1P	903.4.14	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
East (plaque)	M3-2P	903.4.14	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
South (plaque)	M3-3P	903.4.14	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
West (plaque)	M3-4P	903.4.14	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
Alternate (plaque)	M4-1P	903.4.16	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
Spur (plaque)	M4-1bP	903.4.17	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
Business (plaque)	M4-3P	903.4.18	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
To (plaque)	M4-5P	903.4.19	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
End (plaque)	M4-6P	903.4.20	24 X 12	24 X 12	-	24 X 12
Advance Turn Arrow (90° Left/Right)	M5-1P	903.4.22	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Advance Turn Arrow (45° Left/Right)	M5-2P	903.4.22	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Advance Turn Arrow (Curved Stem)	M5-3P	903.4.22	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Lane Designation (Left)	M5-4P	903.4.23	24 X 18	24 X 18	-	24 X 18
Lane Designation (Center)	M5-5P	903.4.23	24 X 18	24 X 18	-	24 X 18
Lane Designation (Right)	M5-6P	903.4.23	24 X 18	24 X 18	-	24 X 18
Directional Arrow (Left/Right)	M6-1P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (45° Left/Right)	M6-2P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (Straight)	M6-3P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (Two-Way)	M6-4P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (Two-Way 45° Left/Right)	M6-5P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (Up & Left/Right)	M6-6P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Directional Arrow (Up & 45° Left/Right)	M6-7P	903.4.24	21 X 15	21 X 15	-	21 X 15
Auto Tour	M-17 Series	903.4.50	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
MoDOT Maintenance Ends	M19-2	903.4.52	18 X 12	-	-	-
Destination (1 line)	D1-1	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Destination (2 lines)	D1-2	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Destination (3 lines)	D1-3	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Destination and Distance (1 line)	D1-1a	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Destination and Distance (2 lines)	D1-2a	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Destination and Distance (3 lines)	D1-3a	903.4.32	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Circular Intersection Destination (1 line)	D1-1d	903.4.35	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Circular Intersection Departure Guide	D1-1e	903.4.35	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Circular Intersection Destination (2 lines)	D1-2d	903.4.35	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Circular Intersection Destination (3 lines)	D1-3d	903.4.35	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Distance (1 line)	D2-1	903.4.38	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Distance (2 lines)	D2-2	903.4.38	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Distance (3 lines)	D2-3	903.4.38	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Street Name (1 line)	D3-1	903.4.40	Varies	Varies	-	-
Street Name (2 lines)	D3-1b	903.4.40	Varies X 18	Varies X 18	-	-
Advance Street Name	D3-2	903.4.41	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Parking Area	D4-1	903.4.42	30 X 24	30 X 24	-	-
Commuter	D4-1P	903.4.42	30 X 6	30 X 6	-	-
Commuter Parking	D4-1a	903.4.42	60 X 36	60 X 36	-	-
Park - Ride	D4-2	903.4.43	30 X 36	30 X 36	-	-
Missouri Scenic Byway	D6-4b	903.4.50	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Missouri Scenic Byway Confirmation	D6-4c	903.4.50	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Point of Interest	D6-4d	903.4.50	Varies	Varies	-	Varies
Advance Weigh Station Distance	D8-1	903.4.45	48 X 48	48 X 48	-	108 X 84
Weigh Station Advance Direction	D8-2	903.4.45	-	-	-	120 X 72
Weigh Station Entrance Direction	D8-3	903.4.45	48 X 48	48 X 48	-	84 X 72
Combination Lane Use/Destination	D15-1	903.4.34	Varies X 96	Varies X 96	-	Varies X 96
Next Truck Lane	D17-1	903.4.46	42 X 48	42 X 48	-	60 X 66
Advance Truck Lane	D17-2	903.4.46	42 X 42	42 X 42	-	60 X 54
Next Passing Lane	D17-3	903.4.47	42 X 48	42 X 48	-	60 X 66
Advance Passing Lane	D17-4	903.4.47	42 X 42	42 X 42	-	60 X 54
Alternating Passing Lanes	D17-4a	903.4.47	84 X 36	84 X 36	-	-

903.4.4 Lettering Style (MUTCD Section 2D.04)

Standard. The design of upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numerals, route shields, and spacing shall be as provided in the EPG articles and FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

The lettering for names of places, streets, and highways on conventional road guide signs shall be a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see EPG 903.1.8). The nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ the height of the initial upper-case letter. When a mixed-case legend letter height is specified referring only to the initial upper-case letter, the height of the lower-case letters that follow shall be determined by this proportion. When the height of a lower-case letter is referenced, the reference is made to the nominal loop height. The height of the initial upper-case letter shall also be determined by this proportion.

All other word legends on conventional road guide signs shall be in upper-case letters.

The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated. Modifications to the length of a word for a given letter height and series shall be accomplished only by the methods described in EPG 903.4.3 and shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

903.4.5 Size of Lettering (MUTCD Section 2D.05)

Support. Sign legibility is a direct function of letter size and spacing. Legibility distance has to be sufficient to give road users enough time to read and comprehend the sign. Under optimum conditions, a guide sign message can be read and understood in a brief glance. The legibility distance takes into account factors such as inattention, blocking of view by other vehicles, unfavorable weather, inferior eyesight, or other causes for delayed or slow reading. Where conditions permit, repetition of guide information on successive signs gives the road user more than one opportunity to obtain the information needed.

Standard. Design layouts for conventional road guide signs shall be provided by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, the principal legend on post-mounted guide signs shall be in letters and numerals at least 6 inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a combination of 6 inches in height for upper-case letters and 4.5 inches in nominal loop height (see EPG 903.4.4) for lower-case letters.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, the principal legend on overhead guide signs shall be in letters and numerals at least 6 inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a combination of 6 inches in height for upper-case letters and 4.5 inches in nominal loop height (see EPG 903.4.4) for lower-case letters.

Guidance. Lettering sizes should be consistent on any particular class of highway.

The minimum lettering and numeral sizes provided in the EPG (see Table 903.4.5.1) should be exceeded where conditions indicate a need for greater legibility.

**Table 903.4.5.1** Typical Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Conventional Road Guide Signs
Type of Sign	D1 & D2 Series 55 mph and less	D1 & D2 Series/D3-2 60 mph and greater	E8 Series	E1-1 Series
A. Intersection or Interchange Advance Guide Signs and entrance Direction Guide Signs
Interstate or Off-Interstate Business Route signs
Numerals**	6	9	9	14
1- or 2-Digit Shields	18 X 18	24 X 24	24 X 24	36 X 36
3-Digit shields	22.5 X 18	30 X 24	30 X 24	45 X 36
U.S. or State Route Signs
Numerals	9	12	12	18
1- or 2-Digit Shields	18 X 18	24 X 24	24 X 24	36 X 36
3-Digit shields	22.5 X 18	30 X 24	30 X 24	45. X 36
County Route Signs
Numerals	6	8	8	10
1- 2-, or 3-Digit Shields	18 X 18	24 X 24	24 X 24	36 X 36
U.S. or State Text identification (Examples: U S 56, Md 2)
Numerals & Letters	8	12	12	15
Cardinal Directions (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST)
First Letter - Upper-Case	6	8	10	10
Rest of Word - Upper-Case	5	6	8	8
Auxiliary and Alternative Route Legends (Examples: JCT, TO, ALT, BUSINESS)
Words- Upper-Case	5	6	8	8
Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main St, 2nd Ave)
Leading Upper-Case Letter or Numerals	6	8	10.67	13.33
Following Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**	4.5	6	8	10
Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP RIGHT)
Distance Numerals	6	6	8	10
Distance Fraction Numerals	4.5	4.5	6	8
Distance Words - Upper-Case	4.5	4.5	6	8
Action Message Words - Upper-Case	6	6	8	10
B. Destination and Other Guide Signs
Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main St, 2nd Ave)
Leading Upper-Case Letter or Numerals	4	6	8	10.67
Following Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**	3	4.5	6	8
Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP RIGHT)
Distance Numerals	5	6	8	8
Distance Fraction Numerals	4	4.5	6	6
Distance Words - Upper-Case	4	4.5	6	6
Action Message Words - Upper-Case	5	6	8	8

**Table 903.4.5.2** Typical Overhead Letter and Number Sizes for Conventional Overhead Road Guide Signs for complex intersections (Multi-Lane Roundabouts, DDIs, Ramp Terminals, etc.)
Type of Sign
A. Intersection or Interchange Advance Guide Signs and Entrance Direction Guide Signs
Interstate, or Off-Interstate Business Route Signs
Numerals**	9
1- or 2-Digit Shields	24 X 24
3-Digit shields	30 X 24
U.S. or State Route Signs
Numerals	12
1- or 2-Digit Shields	24 X 24
3-Digit Shields	30 X 24
County Route Signs
Numerals	8
1- 2-, or 3-Digit Shields	24 X 24
U.S. or State Text identification (Examples: U S 56, Md 2)
Numerals & Letters	12
Cardinal Directions (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST)
First Letter - Upper-Case	10
Rest of Word - Upper-Case	8
Auxiliary and Alternative Route Legends (Examples: JCT, TO, ALT, BUSINESS)
Words- Upper-Case	8
Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main St, 2nd Ave)
Leading Upper-Case Letter or Numerals	10.67 (des.)
Following Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**	8 (des.)
Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP RIGHT)
Distance Numerals	8 (des.)
Distance Fraction Numerals	6 (des.)
Distance Words - Upper-Case	6 (des.)
Action Message Words - Upper-Case	8 (des.)
B. Destination and Other Guide Signs
Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main St, 2nd Ave)
Leading Upper-Case Letter or Numerals	10.67 (des.)
Following Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**	8 (des.)
Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP RIGHT)
Distance Numerals	8 (des.)
Distance Fraction Numerals	6 (des.)
Distance Words - Upper-Case	6 (des.)
Action Message Words - Upper-Case	8 (des.)
* Except as provided otherwise in the EPG Minimum size listed for 3-digit shields. Larger numeral sizes used for 1-digit, some 2 digit, and some 3-digit shields. See the FHWA Standard Highways Signs publication for more information on Route Sign numeral heights and Standard Alphabet series. * Lower-case letter height (loop height) is determined by the initial upper-case letter height (see EPG 903.1.8) Notes: Sizes are shown in inches and where applicable as width x height. For Street Name (D3-1 Series) signs, see Table 903.4.40. The 18-inch route shield size is not for independent use, such as in Directional or Confirmation Assemblies.

903.4.6 Amount of Legend (MUTCD Section 2D.06)

Support. The longer the legend on a guide sign, the longer it will take road users to recognize and comprehend it, regardless of letter size.

Guidance. Except where otherwise provided in the EPG, guide signs should be limited to no more than three lines of destinations, which include place names, route numbers, street names, and cardinal directions. Where two or more signs are included in the same overhead display, the amount of legend should be further minimized. Where appropriate, a distance message or action information, such as an exit number, NEXT RIGHT, or directional arrows, should be provided on guide signs in addition to the destinations.

903.4.7 Abbreviations (MUTCD Section 2D.07)

Support. The use of commonly recognized abbreviations for certain words can be useful in reducing the reading time and improve quicker comprehension of a sign message. Descriptors and directional or quadrant orientations for street names and destinations, such as Boulevard (Blvd), North (N), and Southwest (SW), are some examples of commonly recognized abbreviations. Examples of the use of some guide sign abbreviations are shown in Figure 903.4.7.

Standard. The words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, and WEST shall not be abbreviated when used to indicate cardinal directions of numbered or named highways on guide signs.

Guidance. Abbreviations should be kept to a minimum; however, they are useful when complete destination messages produce excessively long signs. If used, abbreviations should be unmistakably recognized by road users (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)). Longer commonly used words that are not part of a proper name and are readily recognizable, such as street name descriptors (such as Street, Boulevard, or Avenue), should be abbreviated as provided in Table 903.4.7.1 to expedite recognition of the sign legend by reducing the amount and complexity of the legend. Shorter street name descriptors, such as those shown in Table 903.4.7.2, should not be abbreviated.

Periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens should not be used in abbreviations, unless necessary to avoid confusion.

The solidus is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS – BUSES.”

**Table 903.4.7.1** Acceptable Abbreviations for Street Name Descriptors
Descriptor	Standard Abbreviation
Avenue	Ave
Boulevard	Blvd
Bypass	Byp
Causeway	Cswy
Circle	Cir
Corner	Cor
Court	Ct
Crescent	Cres
Drive	Dr
East	E*
Expressway	Expwy
Extension	Ext
Freeway	Fwy
Highway	Hwy
Lane	La, Ln
Landing	Lndg
North	N*
Northeast	NE*
Northwest	NW*
Parkway	Pkwy
Place	Pl
Plaza	Plz
Road	Rd
Route	Rte
South	S*
Southeast	SE*
Southwest	SW*
Square	Sq
Street	St
Terrace	Ter
Thruway	Thwy
Trafficway	Trfway
Trail	Tr
Turnpike	Tpk
West	W*
* For pre-directional or post-directional designations or cardinal orientations, such as E Main St or 3rd St SW

**Table 903.4.7.2** Street Name Descriptors Not Acceptable for Abbreviation
Descriptor
Alley
Belt
Beltway
Close
Cove
Edge
Gate
Green
Grove
Hill
Loop
Mews
Oval
Pass
Passage
Path
Ridge
Row
Run
Trace
Turn
View
Vista
Walk

903.4.8 Arrows (MUTCD Section 2D.08)

Support. Arrows are used for lane assignment and to indicate the direction toward designated routes or destinations. Figure 903.4.8 shows the various standard arrow designs that have been approved for use on guide signs. Detailed drawings for these arrows will be provided by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Standard. Except for Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs (see EPG 903.4.33), on overhead signs where it is desirable to indicate a lane to be followed, a down arrow shall be positioned over the approximate center of the lane and shall point vertically downward toward the approximate center of that lane. Down arrows shall be used only on overhead guide signs that restrict the use of specific lanes to traffic bound for the destination(s) and/or route(s) indicated by these arrows. Down arrows shall not be used unless an arrow can be located over and pointed to the approximate center of each lane that can be used to reach the destination displayed on the sign.

If down arrows are used, having more than one down arrow pointing to the same lane on a single overhead sign (or on multiple signs on the same overhead sign structure) shall not be permitted.

Where a roadway is leaving the through lanes, a directional arrow shall point upward at an angle that approximates the alignment of the exit roadway in the vicinity of the point of departure.

The Type E directional arrow for circular intersections shall not be used on any sign that is not associated with a circular intersection.

Guidance. The Type A directional arrow should be used on guide signs on freeways, expressways, and conventional roads to indicate the direction to a specific destination or group of destinations, except as otherwise provided in this Article and in EPG 903.5.17.

When a directional arrow in a vertical, upward-pointing orientation is placed to the side of a group of destinations to indicate a through movement, the Type A directional arrow should be used. When a directional arrow in a vertical, upward-pointing orientation is placed to the side of a single destination or under a destination or group of destinations, the Type B directional arrow should be used.

The Type B directional arrow should be used on guide signs on conventional roads when placed at any angle to the side of a single destination or when placed in a horizontal orientation to the side of a group of destinations.

The Type C advance turn directional arrow should be used on conventional road guide signs placed in advance of an intersection where a turn must be made to reach a posted destination or group of destinations.

The Type D directional arrow should be used primarily for sign applications other than guide signs, except as provided in the fourth Option paragraph below.

If the Type E directional arrow is used, the principles set forth in EPG 903.4.22 through 903.4.25 should be followed.

Option. The Type A-Extended directional arrow may be used on guide signs where additional emphasis regarding the direction is needed relative to the amount of legend on the sign.

The Type C directional arrow may be used to the side of the legend of an overhead guide sign to accentuate a sharp turn exit maneuver from a mainline roadway (see EPG 903.5.25 for additional information regarding Exit Direction signs for low advisory ramp speeds).

On conventional roads on the approach to an intersection where the Combination Lane-Use/Destination overhead guide sign (see EPG 903.4.24) is not used, the Type C advance turn directional arrow may be used beneath the legend of an overhead guide sign to indicate the fact that a turn must be made from a mandatory movement lane over which the sign is placed to reach the destination or destinations displayed on the sign.

The Type D directional arrow may be used on post-mounted guide signs on conventional roads with lower operating speeds if the height of the text on the sign is 8 inches or less. Type D arrows may be used on a Street Name (D3-1 only) sign displaying two street names to indicate the different direction of travel for each street.

The Type E directional arrow may be used on guide signs on approaches to circular intersections to represent the intended driver paths to destinations involving left-turn movements around the circulatory island.

The directional and down arrows shown in Figure 903.4.8 may be used on signs other than guide signs for the purposes of providing directional guidance and lane assignment.

Guidance. Arrows used on guide signs to indicate the directions toward designated routes or destinations should be pointed at the appropriate angle to clearly convey the direction to be taken. A horizontally-oriented directional arrow design should be used at right-angle intersections.

On a post-mounted guide sign, a directional arrow for a straight-through movement should point upward. For a turn, the arrow on a guide sign should point horizontally or at an upward angle that approximates the sharpness of the turn.

At an exit, an arrow should be placed at the side of the sign that will reinforce the movement of exiting traffic. The directional arrow design should be used.

Standard. If used, the Type C advance turn directional arrow shall display a right or left arrow, the shaft of which is bent at a 90-degree or oblique angle.

Option. Arrows may be placed below the principal sign legend or on the appropriate side of the legend that is consistent with the direction of the movement.

On a post-mounted sign at an exit where placement of the arrow to the side of the legend farthest from the roadway would create an unusually wide sign that limits the road user's view of the arrow, the directional arrow may be placed at the bottom portion of the sign, centered under the legend.

Guidance. The width across the arrowhead for the Types A, B, and C directional arrows should be between 1.5 and 1.75 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign. The width across the arrowhead for the Type D directional arrow should be at least equal to the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign. For down arrows used on overhead signs, the width across the arrowhead should be approximately 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.

Support. EPG 903.4.33 contains the provisions for arrows used in Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs on approaches to conventional road intersections.

The FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)) and Standard Plan 903.01 contains design details and standardized sizes of the various arrows based on ranges of letter heights of principal legends.

903.4.9 Numbered Highway Systems (MUTCD Section 2D.09)

Support. The purpose of numbering and signing highway systems is to identify routes and facilitate travel.

The Interstate and United States (U.S.) highway systems are numbered by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) upon recommendations of the State highway organizations because the respective States own these systems. State and county road systems are numbered by the appropriate authorities.

The basic policy for numbering the Interstate and U.S. highway systems is contained in the following Purpose and Policy statements published by AASHTO:

A. “Establishment and Development of United States Numbered Highways,” and

B. “Establishment of a Marking System of the Routes Comprising the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways.”

Guidance. The principles of these policies should be followed in establishing the highway systems described in the preceding paragraph and any other systems, with effective coordination between adjacent jurisdictions. Care should be taken to avoid the use of numbers or other designations that have been assigned to Interstate, U.S., or State routes in the same geographic area. Overlapping numbered routes should be kept to a minimum.

Standard. Route systems shall be given preference in this order: Interstate, United States, State, and county. The preference shall be given by installing the highest-priority route number on the top or the left of the sign, except as provided in the Option paragraph below.

Interstate route numbering shall be approved by the FHWA.

Option. The prioritization of route systems may be modified when a different prioritization would better accommodate the expectancy of the road user and provide more effective direction, such as for separate decision points for routes that are encountered in a particular order.

903.4.10 Route Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.10)

Standard. Except as provided in the third Option paragraph of 903.4.25, all numbered highway routes shall be identified by route signs and auxiliary plaques.

The signs for each system of numbered highways, which are distinctive in shape and color, shall be used only on that system and the approaches thereto.

Option. Route signs and auxiliary plaques may be proportionally enlarged where greater conspicuity or legibility is needed.

Support. Route signs are typically mounted in assemblies with auxiliary plaques.

EPG 903.4.49 contains information regarding the signing for National Scenic Byways.

EPG 903.4.50 contains information regarding the signing for Missouri Scenic Byways, historic trails, and auto tour routes.

903.4.11 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)

Standard. The design of standard route signs shall conform to the designs provided in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)). The design of other route signs shall be established by the authority having jurisdiction and shall be in general conformance with the designs provided in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication.

The Interstate Route (M1-1) sign shall be used on all Interstate routes and in connection with Route Sign assemblies on intersecting highways.

Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, a 24 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for Interstate route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for Interstate route numbers having three digits.

The Off-Interstate Business Route (M1-2) sign shall consist of a cutout shield displaying the number of the connecting Interstate route and the words BUSINESS and LOOP in upper-case letters. The legend and border shall be white on a green background, and the shield shall be the same shape and dimensions as the Interstate Route sign. In no instance shall the word INTERSTATE appear on the Off-Interstate Business Route sign.

Option. The Off-Interstate Business Route sign may be used on a major highway that is not a part of the Interstate system, but one that serves the business area of a city from an interchange on the system.

Standard. U.S. Route signs shall consist of black numerals on a white shield surrounded by a rectangular black background without a border. This sign shall be used on all U.S. routes and in connection with Route Sign assemblies on intersecting highways.

A 24 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers having three digits.

State Numbered Route (M1-5) signs shall consist of black numerals on a white representation of the State of Missouri surrounded by a rectangular black background without a border. This sign shall be used on all state numbered routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways.

A 24 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state numbered route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 in. x 24 in. minimum sign size shall be used for state numbers having three digits.

The legend on State Route signs shall conform to the Standard Alphabets contained in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Guidance. Where U.S. or State Route signs are used as components of guide signs, only the distinctive shape of the shield itself and the route numerals within should be used. The rectangular background upon which the distinctive shape of the shield is mounted, such as the black area around the outside of the shields on the M1-4 and standard M1-5 signs, should not be included on the guide sign. Where U.S. or State Route signs are used as components of other signs of non-contrasting background colors, the rectangular background should be used so that recognition of the distinctive shape of the shield can be maintained.

Standard. All references to numbered routes in this EPG 903.4 shall be interpreted to also include lettered routes.

State Lettered Route (M1-5a) signs shall be rectangular with the route letter in the center. The legend and border shall be black on a white background.

A 24 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state lettered routes with one letter and a 30 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state lettered routes having two letters.

Guidance. The letters G, I, L, Q and S should not be used on State Lettered Route signs. The letter R should be used on supplemental routes connecting state parks or other recreational facilities.

Support. Usually, but not always, double letter routes are farm to market roads that end at county roads or are former alignments of other highways.

Missouri is the only state to extensively use lettering on its highway system. The 1952 Missouri 10-Year Highway Modernization and Expansion Program (the “Takeover Program”) upgraded 12,000 miles of county roads. The roads became known as supplemental routes. The program provided a state-maintained road within 2 miles of 95% of all rural units, such as farm homes, churches, schools, stores, etc. Missouri opted to use letters to label these routes to avoid confusion with the existing numbered routes.

903.4.12 Design of Route Sign Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.12)

Standard. Route sign auxiliary plaques displaying word legends, except the Junction (M2-1P) auxiliary plaque, shall have a minimum standard size of 24 x 12 inches. The Junction auxiliary plaque and those auxiliary plaques displaying arrows shall have a minimum standard size of 21 x 15 inches. All route sign auxiliary plaques shall match the color combination of the route sign that they supplement.

Guidance. The background, legend, and border of a route sign auxiliary plaque should have the same colors as those of the route sign with which the auxiliary plaque is mounted in a route sign assembly (see EPG 903.4.25). For a route sign design that uses multiple background colors, such as the Interstate Route sign, the background color of the corresponding auxiliary plaque should be that of the background area on which the route number is placed on the route sign.

Option. A route sign and any auxiliary plaques used with it may be combined on a single sign as a guide sign.

Standard. If a route sign and its auxiliary plaques are combined to form a single guide sign, the background color of the sign shall be green and the design shall comply with the basic principles for the design of guide signs. The auxiliary messages shall be white legends placed directly on the green background. Auxiliary plaques shall not be mounted directly to a guide sign or other type of sign.

903.4.13 Junction Auxiliary Plaque (M2-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.13)

Standard. The Junction (M2-1P) auxiliary plaque shall display the abbreviated legend JCT and shall be mounted at the top of an assembly (see EPG 903.4.26) directly above the route sign, the sign for an alternative route (see EPG 903.4.17) that is part of the route designation, or the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque where access is available only to one direction of the intersected route. The minimum size of the Junction auxiliary plaque shall be 21 x 15 inches for compatibility with auxiliary plaques displaying arrow symbols.

903.4.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Plaques (M3-1P through M3-4P) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)

M3-1P

M3-2P

M3-3P

M3-4P

Guidance. Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaques displaying the legend NORTH, EAST, SOUTH, or WEST should be used to indicate the general direction of the entire route.

Standard. Cardinal Directions shall not be used with an Off-Interstate Business Route (M1-2) sign or State Letter Route (M1-5a) sign.

To improve the readability and recognition of the cardinal directions, the first letter of the cardinal direction words shall be ten percent larger, rounded up to the nearest whole number size.

If used, the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign or, if used, an auxiliary plaque for an alternative route.

Support. Odd-numbered routes typically run north-south, and even-numbered routes typically run east-west.

903.4.15 Alternative Route Auxiliary Plaques - General (MUTCD Section 2D.16)

Option. Alternative Route auxiliary plaques displaying legends such as ALTERNATE, SPUR, or BUSINESS, may be used to indicate an alternate route of the same number between two points on that route.

Standard. If used, the Alternative Route auxiliary plaques shall be mounted directly above a route sign.

903.4.16 ALTERNATE Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.17)

M4-1P

Support. An alternate route branches from the numbered route, follows a separate alignment, and rejoins the numbered route downstream.

Option. The ALTERNATE (M4-1P) auxiliary plaque may be used to indicate an officially designated alternate routing of a numbered route between two points on that route.

Standard. If used, the ALTERNATE auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.

The M4-1P plaque shall not be used to sign an alternative routing that is not officially designated and incorporated into the numbered highway system, such as alternative routings for incident management or emergency detours.

Guidance. The shorter (time or distance) or better-constructed route should retain the regular route number, and the longer or worse-constructed route should be designated as the alternate route.

903.4.17 SPUR Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1bP)

M4-1bP

Support. A spur route is a highway that branches from a state numbered route or state letter route to serve a specific area or connect to another highway.

Option. The SPUR (M4-1bP) auxiliary plaque may be used to indicate an officially designated alternate route that branches from a numbered route and does not rejoin the same route.

Standard. If used, the SPUR auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.

The SPUR auxiliary plaque shall only be used in conjunction with state numbered routes or state letter routes. The SPUR auxiliary plaque shall not be used in conjunction with Interstate or U.S. routes.

903.4.18 BUSINESS Auxiliary Plaque (M4-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.19)

M4-3P

Option. The BUSINESS (M4-3P) auxiliary plaque may be used to designate an alternate route that branches from a numbered route, passes through the business portion of a city, and rejoins the numbered route beyond that area.

Standard. If used, the BUSINESS auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.

Cardinal direction auxiliary plaques shall not be used on a sign assembly with a BUSINESS auxiliary plaque.

903.4.19 TO Auxiliary Plaque (M4-5P) (MUTCD Section 2D.21)

M4-5P

Option. The TO (M4-5P) auxiliary plaque may be used to provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity (see EPG 903.4.30).

Standard. If used, the TO auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign or an auxiliary plaque for an alternative route. If a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque is also included in the assembly, the TO auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque.

903.4.20 END Auxiliary Plaque (M4-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.22)

M4-6P

Guidance. The END (M4-6P) auxiliary plaque should be used where the route being traveled ends, usually at a junction with another route.

The END auxiliary plaque should not be used to indicate the end of a lettered route.

Standard. If used, the END auxiliary plaque shall be mounted either directly above a route sign or above a sign for an alternative route that is part of the designation of the route being terminated.

903.4.21 Temporary Detour Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.25)

Support. EPG 616.9 contains information regarding Temporary Detour signs and auxiliary plaques.

903.4.22 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M5-1P, M5-2P, and M5-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)

Standard. If used, the Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly below the route sign in Advance Route Turn assemblies, and shall display a right or left arrow, the shaft of which is bent at a 90-degree angle (M5-1P) or at an oblique angle (M5-2P).

If used, the Circular Intersection Advance Turn Arrow (M5-3P) auxiliary plaque shall be used only on the approach to a circular intersection to depict a movement along the circulatory roadway around the central island and to the left, relative to the approach roadway and entry into the intersection.

Guidance. If the M5-3P plaque is used, then this arrow type should also be used consistently on any regulatory lane-use signs (see EPG 903.2), Destination signs (see EPG 903.4.32), and pavement markings (see EPG 620) for a particular destination or movement.

903.4.23 Lane Designation Auxiliary Plaques (M5-4P, M5-5P, and M5-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.27)

Option. A Lane Designation (M5-4P, M5-5P, or M5-6P) auxiliary plaque may be mounted directly below the route sign in an Advance Route Turn assembly on multi-lane roadways to allow road users to move into the appropriate lane prior to reaching the intersection or interchange.

Standard. If used, the Lane Designation auxiliary plaques shall be used only where the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane and shall be located adjacent to the full-width portion of the mandatory movement lane. The Lane Designation auxiliary plaques shall not be installed adjacent to a through lane in advance of a lane that is being added or along the taper for a lane that is being added.

903.4.24 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.28)

Standard. If used, the Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque shall be mounted below the route sign and any other auxiliary plaques in Directional assemblies (see EPG 903.4.25), and shall display a single-headed or double-headed arrow pointing in the general direction that the route follows.

A Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque that displays a double-headed arrow shall not be mounted in any Directional assembly in advance of or at a circular intersection.

Option. The Straight Arrows (M6 Series) may be substituted for the Advance Turn arrows (M5-1 and M5-2) when used near the “on” ramps of tight diamond interchanges to reduce the possibility of motorist confusion about which ramp to enter.

903.4.25 Route Sign Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.29)

Standard. A Route Sign assembly shall consist of a route sign and auxiliary plaques that further identify the route and indicate the direction. Route Sign assemblies shall be installed on all approaches to numbered routes that intersect with other numbered routes.

Where two or more routes follow the same section of highway, the route signs for Interstate, U.S., and State routes shall be mounted in that order from the left in horizontal arrangements and from the top in vertical arrangements. Subject to this order of precedence, route signs for lower-numbered routes shall be placed at the left or top.

Within groups of assemblies, information for routes intersecting from the left shall be mounted at the left in horizontal arrangements and at the top or center of vertical arrangements. Similarly, information for routes intersecting from the right shall be at the right or bottom, and for straight-through routes at the center in horizontal arrangements or top in vertical arrangements.

Route Sign assemblies shall be mounted in accordance with the general specifications for signs (EPG 903.1), with the lowest sign in the assembly at the height prescribed for single signs.

Guidance. Assemblies for two or more routes, or for different directions on the same route, should be mounted in groups on a common support.

Option. Route Sign assemblies may be installed on the approaches to numbered routes on unnumbered roads and streets that carry an appreciable amount of traffic destined for the numbered route.

If engineering judgment indicates that groups of assemblies that include overlapping routes or multiple turns might be confusing, route signs or auxiliary signs may be omitted or combined, provided that clear directions are given to road users.

Support. Figures 903.4.25.1 through 903.4.25.3 show typical placements of route signs.

Route sign assemblies are flat sheet signs. For interstate route signs, payment is the same, but these contain blue sheeting. For cardinal directions placed above interstate route signs, a note is placed on Form D-30 to indicate the number of cardinal directions which are interstate design (white on blue), and which are the black on white type. This is also indicated for arrow signs placed below the interstate route signs. For overlapping routes with an interstate and any other type of roadway containing the same cardinal direction, only one cardinal direction is required, and one arrow sign, with the interstate design being used.

903.4.26 Junction Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.30)

Standard. A Junction assembly shall consist of a Junction auxiliary plaque (see EPG 903.4.13) and a route sign. The route sign shall display the number or letter of the intersected or joined route.

The Junction assembly shall be installed in advance of every intersection where a numbered or lettered route is intersected or joined by another numbered or lettered route.

Guidance. In urban areas, the Junction assembly should be installed in the block preceding the intersection. In urban areas where speeds are low, the Junction assembly should not be installed more than 300 feet in advance of the intersection.

In rural areas, the Junction assembly should be installed at least 400 feet in advance of the intersection. In rural areas, the minimum distance between a Junction assembly and either a Destination sign or an Advance Route Turn assembly should be 200 feet.

Where speeds are high, greater spacings should be used.

Option. Where two or more routes are to be indicated, a single Junction auxiliary plaque may be used for the assembly and all route signs grouped in a single mounting.

903.4.27 Advance Route Turn Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.31)

Standard. An Advance Route Turn assembly shall consist of a route sign, an Advance Turn Arrow or word message auxiliary plaque, and a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, if needed. It shall be installed in advance of an intersection where a turn must be made to remain on the indicated route.

Option. The Advance Route Turn assembly may be used to supplement the required Junction assembly in advance of intersecting routes.

Guidance. Where a multi-lane highway approaches an interchange or intersection with a numbered route, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be used to provide advance notice so that road users know the correct lane(s) from which to make their turn.

Option. Lane Designation auxiliary plaques (see EPG 903.4.23) may be used in Advance Route Turn Assemblies in place of the Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaques where engineering judgment indicates that specific lane information associated with each route is needed and overhead signing is impracticable and the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane. An assembly with the Lane Designation auxiliary plaques may supplement or substitute for an assembly with Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaques.

Guidance. In low-speed areas, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be installed not less than 200 feet in advance of the turn. In high-speed areas, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be installed not less than 300 feet in advance of the turn. In rural areas, the minimum distance between an Advance Route Turn assembly and either a Destination sign or a Junction assembly should be 200 feet.

Standard. An assembly that includes an Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaque shall not be placed where there is an intersection between it and the designated turn.

Guidance. Sufficient distance should be allowed between the assembly and any preceding intersection that could be mistaken for the indicated turn.

903.4.28 Directional Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.32)

Standard. A Directional assembly shall consist of a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, if needed; a route sign; and a Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque. The uses of Directional assemblies shall comply with the following:

A. Turn movements (indicated in advance by an Advance Route Turn assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the turning route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the turn.

B. The beginning of a route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of that route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the route.

C. An intersected route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) on a crossroad where the route is designated on both legs shall be designated by:

1. Two Directional assemblies, each with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route, a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of movement on that route; or

2. A Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route and a double-headed arrow, pointing at appropriate angles to the left, right, or ahead.

D. An intersected route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) on a side road or on a crossroad where the route is designated only on one of the legs shall be designated by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route, a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of movement on that route.

Guidance. Straight-through movements should be indicated by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the continuing route and a vertical arrow. A Directional assembly should not be used for a straight-through movement in the absence of other assemblies indicating right or left turns, as the Confirming assembly sign beyond the intersection normally provides adequate guidance.

Directional assemblies should be located on the near right corner of the intersection. At major intersections and at Y or offset intersections, additional Directional assemblies should be installed on the far right or left corner to confirm the near-side assemblies. When the near-corner position is impractical for Directional assemblies, the far right corner should be the preferred alternative, with oversized signs, if necessary, for legibility. Where unusual conditions exist, the location of a Directional assembly should be determined by engineering judgment with the goal being to provide the best possible combination of view and safety.

Support. It is more important that guide signs be readable, and that the information and direction displayed thereon be readily understood, at the appropriate time and place than to be located with absolute uniformity.

Figures 903.4.25.1 through 903.4.25.3 show typical placements of Directional assemblies.

903.4.29 Confirming or Reassurance Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.33)

Standard. If used, Confirming or Reassurance assemblies shall consist of a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque and a route sign, except as provided in the following paragraph. Where the Confirming or Reassurance assembly is for an alternative route, the appropriate auxiliary plaque for an alternative route (see EPG 903.4.15) shall also be included in the assembly.

Cardinal Direction auxiliary signs shall not be used on Confirming or Reassurance assemblies for lettered routes, off-interstate business routes (business loops), business routes, and spur routes.

A Confirming assembly shall be installed just beyond intersections of state numbered and lettered routes.

Guidance. Confirmation assemblies should be placed 25 to 200 feet beyond the far shoulder or curb line of the intersected highway.

A Confirming assembly should be placed 500 feet beyond the downstream end of interchange acceleration lanes confirming the route(s) the driver is entering onto.

Option. Confirmation assemblies may be installed downstream of non-state routes based on engineering judgement. Examples of such application may include non-state routes which carry a significant volume of non-local traffic, or where the intersection with the non-state route may be confusing to the motorist as to which direction the state route departs from the intersection.

On freeways with emergency reference markers the confirming route assembly may be omitted only if there is no overlapping route on that portion of the freeway, as the emergency reference marker serves as the confirmation.

Reassurance assemblies may be installed on a route if the distance between state-to-state intersections is 20 miles or greater, with the route markers being installed at the approximate midpoint between the state intersections.

903.4.30 Trailblazer Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.34)

Support. Trailblazer assemblies provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity. This guidance is accomplished by installing Trailblazer assemblies at strategic locations to indicate the direction to the nearest or most convenient point of access. The use of the word TO indicates that the road or street where the sign is posted is not a part of the indicated route, and that a road user is merely being directed progressively to the route.

Standard. A Trailblazer assembly shall consist of a TO auxiliary plaque (see EPG 903.4.19) or an identification sign for a byway, historic trail, or auto tour route sign (see EPG 903.4.49 and 903.4.50), and a single-headed Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque pointing in the direction leading to the route. Where the Trailblazer assembly is for an alternative route, the appropriate auxiliary plaque for an alternative route (see EPG 903.4.15) shall also be included in the assembly.

Option. A Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque (see EPG 903.4.14) may be used in a Trailblazer assembly where the direction leading to the route provides access only to one direction of travel for that route.

Guidance. The TO auxiliary plaque, Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque should be of the standard size provided for auxiliary plaques of their respective type. The route sign should be the size provided in EPG 903.4.11.

Option. Trailblazer assemblies may be installed with other Route Sign assemblies, or alone, in the immediate vicinity of the designated facilities.

903.4.31 Destination and Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.35)

Support. In addition to guidance by route numbers, it is desirable to supply the road user information concerning the destinations that can be reached by way of numbered or unnumbered routes. This is done by means of Destination signs and Distance signs.

State abbreviations are not routinely listed in conjunction with the control city of destination, unless the need is determined by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.

Option. Route shields and cardinal directions may be included on the Destination sign with the destinations and arrows.

Guidance. If Route shields and cardinal directions are included on a Destination sign, the height of the Route shields should be at least two times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend and not less than 18 inches (15 inches for lettered routes), and the letter height of cardinal directions should be at least the minimum letter height specified for these signs.

Standard. When a route designation is displayed on a destination sign with legends 8 inches or greater, route shields shall be used to display route names. When the destination has 6-inch legend or less, the route name shall be spelled out with text. State routes, both state numbered and state lettered routes, shall be listed simply as ROUTE XX. The letters “MO” shall not be used for state route designations, however, the letter “I” for interstate routes and “US” for United States routes will be shown.

Support. Control cities are defined for the interstate system in the AASHTO List of Control Cities for Use in Guide Signs on Interstate Highways and Table 903.8.11, Interstate Sign Control Cities. Control cities on other systems are determined as the next community located where the route intersects with a U.S. numbered route. A list of routes eligible for distance signing and the appropriate control points is available. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division determines the control cities for non-interstate state-maintained routes.

Standard. The distances displayed on destination signs shall be based on the control point of the destination. Control points are typically the intersection of two major routes within the destination, these control points are determined by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division. Distances displayed on destination signs are not measured to the jurisdictional boundary of the destination as boundaries change over time.

903.4.32 Destination Signs (D1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.36)

D1-1

D1-1a

D1-2a

Standard. Except on approaches to interchanges (see EPG 903.4.44), the Destination (D1-1 through D1-3) signs, if used, shall be a horizontal rectangle displaying the name of a city or unincorporated community and a directional arrow.

Destinations shall not include traffic generators such as universities, stadiums, amusement parks, or other publicly or privately owned attractions.

Option. The distance (see EPG 903.4.38) to the place named may also be displayed on the Destination (D1-1a through D1-3a) signs. If several destinations are to be displayed at a single point, the several names may be placed on a single sign with an arrow (and the distance, if desired) for each name.

Guidance. Adequate separation should be made between any destinations or group of destinations in one direction and those in other directions by suitable design of the arrow, spacing of lines of legend or separate signs.

Standard. Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, an arrow pointing to the right shall be at the extreme right of the sign, and an arrow pointing left or up shall be at the extreme left. The distance numerals, if used, shall be placed to the right of the destination names.

Guidance. Unless a sloping arrow will convey a clearer indication of the direction to be followed, the directional arrows should be horizontal or vertical.

If several individual name signs are assembled into a group, all signs in the assembly should be of the same horizontal width.

Destination signs should be used:

A. At the intersections of U.S. or State numbered routes with Interstate, U.S., or State numbered routes; and

B. At points where they serve to direct traffic from U.S. or State numbered routes to the business section of towns, or to other destinations reached by unnumbered routes.

Standard. Where a total of three or fewer destinations are displayed on the Advance guide (see EPG 903.5.23) and Supplemental guide (see EPG 903.5.49) signs, no more than three destination names shall be displayed on a Destination sign. Where four destinations are displayed on the Advance guide and Supplemental guide signs, no more than four destination names shall be displayed on a Destination sign.

Option. Unincorporated communities may be displayed on Destination signs at junction of state routes where it is more appropriate than using incorporated communities if that destination meets the qualifications for Unincorporated Community (I5-1) Signs (see EPG 903.9.9 City/County Limit Signs).

Guidance. If space permits, four destinations should be displayed on two separate signs at two separate locations.

Option. Where space does not permit, or where all four destinations are in one direction, a single sign may be used. Where a single sign is used and all destinations are in the same direction, the arrow may be placed below the destinations for the purpose of enhancing the conspicuity of the arrow.

Standard. Where a single four-name sign assembly is used, a heavy line approximating the width of the sign border entirely across the sign or separate signs shall be used to separate destinations by direction.

Guidance. The closest destination lying straight ahead should be at the top of the sign or assembly, and below it the closest destinations to the left and to the right, in that order. The destination displayed for each direction should ordinarily be the next county seat or the next principal city, rather than a more distant destination. In the case of overlapping routes, only one destination should be displayed in each direction for each route.

Standard. If more than one destination is displayed in the same direction, the name of a nearer destination shall be displayed above the name of a destination that is farther away.

Support. Overhead destination guide signs are sometimes helpful on multi-lane conventional roadways with complex or unusual roadway alignments or geometrics at intersecting highways to provide positive direction to destinations and to assign lanes to be used for destinations.

Option. Overhead Destination signs may be used to provide lane assignment and destination information for some or all of the lanes on the approach to a multi-lane intersection. Destination information may include cardinal directions, route numbers, street names, and/or place names.

Overhead signs using the Arrow-per-Lane sign design configuration may be used to provide lane assignments for some or all lane destinations at the approach to a multi-lane intersection (see EPG 903.4.33).

903.4.33 Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Destination Guide Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.37)

Support. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide signs are sometimes used on multi-lane conventional roadways to provide positive direction to destinations and to indicate lanes to be used for those destinations. These locations typically include complex or unusual roadway alignments or geometrics. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs on conventional roads do not always have arrows for every lane. Unlike the Combined Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) sign (see EPG 903.4.34), Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs can be used to provide lane assignments where the designated lane is not a mandatory movement lane.

Guidance. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide signs are not typically used by MoDOT. When used, Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs should comply with the provisions in this Article.

Option. At complex intersection approaches involving multiple lanes and destinations, an Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide sign may be used to provide destination information for some or all lanes. Destination information may include cardinal direction, route numbers, street names, and/or place names.

Standard. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs for conventional roads shall only be used for multi-lane approaches to intersections that have an option lane.

Overhead Arrow-per-Lane guide signs used on conventional roads shall include as a minimum one arrow above each mandatory turn lane and a bifurcated arrow for the option lane from which both the through and turning movements are allowed.

Guidance. Displaying an arrow over each through movement lane that does not allow turning should be considered for providing additional positive guidance.

Standard. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs for conventional roads shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria:

A. The shaft of each arrow shall be located over the approximate center of the lane to which it applies.

B. Arrows for continuing through lanes shall be vertically upward-pointing.

C. The arrow for a lane that must turn shall be curved in the direction of the turn and shall be accompanied by a black-on-yellow ONLY (E11-1b) sign panel (see Figure 903.5.28.1) adjacent to the lower end of the arrow shaft.

D. The arrow for an optional exit lane that also carries the through route shall have a single shaft that bifurcates into a vertically upward-pointing arrow and a curving arrow corresponding to the configuration of the through and turn lanes.

E. A vertical white line shall be used to separate the route shields and destinations for the two diverging movements from each other.

F. The number of lanes displayed on a sign shall correspond to the number of lanes being signed for at the location of that sign. An advance sign shall not depict lanes that are added downstream of a sign location.

Guidance. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane guide signs used on conventional roads should be designed in accordance with the following additional criteria:

A. No more than one destination should be displayed for each movement, and no more than three destinations should be displayed per sign.

B. The arrowhead(s) for the diverging movement should be positioned lower on the sign than the arrowhead(s) for the movement that continues straight ahead.

C. Route shields, cardinal directions, and destinations should be positioned on the sign such that they are clearly related to the arrowhead(s) for the movement to which they apply.

E. The vertical white line that is used to separate the route shields and destinations for the two diverging movements from each other should not descend below the top of the arrowheads for the through lanes, and should be positioned approximately halfway between the diverging arrowheads for the optional movement lane.

Destination information should be kept to a minimum necessary to provide positive guidance without overloading the road user.

Standard. The minimum height of arrows on an Overhead Arrow-per-Lane sign used on a conventional road shall be as shown in Table 903.4.33.

Guidance. When letter heights and other sign legend elements are enlarged there should be an corresponding increase in the arrow size used.

Option. Curved-stem arrows may be substituted on Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Signs on multi-lane approaches to a circular intersection with an option lane (see EPG 903.4.35).

**Table 903.4.33** Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Arrow Height Based on Principal Legend Letter Height
Principal Legend Letter Height	Straight Arrow	Turn Arrow
10.67	25.5	20.188
Note: Letter and arrow heights are shown in inches.

903.4.34 Combination Lane-Use/Destination Overhead Guide Sign (D15-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.38)

Option. At intersection approaches involving multiple turn lanes and destinations, a Combination Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) overhead guide sign that combines a lane-use regulatory sign with destination information such as a cardinal direction, a route number, a street name, and/or a place name may be used.

Support. At such locations, the combined information on the D15-1 signs can be even more effective than separate lane-use and guide signs for conveying to unfamiliar drivers which lane or lanes to use for a particular destination.

Standard. The Combination Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) overhead guide sign shall be used only where the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane. The D15-1 sign shall not be used for lanes with optional movements.

The D15-1 sign shall have a green background with a white border. The lane-use sign (see EPG 903.2) shall be placed near the bottom of the sign and the destination information shall be placed near the top of the sign. The D15-1 sign shall be located over the approximate center of the lane to which it applies.

903.4.35 Destination Signs at Circular Intersections (MUTCD Section 2D.39)

D1-1d

Standard. Destination signs that are used at circular intersections shall comply with the provisions of EPG 903.4.32, except as provided in this Article.

Option. Exit Destination (D1-1d and D1-1e) signs with diagonal upward-pointing arrows or Directional assemblies (see EPG 903.4.28) may be used to designate a particular exit from a circular intersection.

Destination (D1-2d and D1-3d) signs with curved-stem arrows may be used on approaches to circular intersections to represent the left-turn movements.

Curved-stem arrows on circular intersection destination signs may point in diagonal directions to depict the location of an exit relative to the approach roadway and entry into the intersection.

An Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Destination sign (see EPG 903.4.33) with curved-stem arrows may be used on multi-lane approaches to circular intersections that have an option lane.

Guidance. If curved-stem arrows are used on destination signs, then this arrow type should also be used consistently on any regulatory lane-use signs (see EPG 903.2), Directional assemblies (see EPG 903.4.28), and pavement markings (see EPG 620) for a particular destination or movement.

Support. Figure 903.4.35.1 shows examples of guide signing for circular intersections.

Standard. Diagrammatic guide signs for circular intersections shall not be used.

Support. EPG 903.2 contains information regarding regulatory signs at circular intersections, EPG 903.3 contains information regarding warning signs at circular intersections, and EPG 620.4 contains information regarding pavement markings at circular intersections.

903.4.36 Destination Signs at Intersections with Indirect Turning Movements (MUTCD Section 2D.41)

Guidance. A system of guide signs along with associated lane markings should be used to direct traffic through intersections with indirect turning movements.

903.4.37 Location of Destination Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)

Guidance. When used in urban areas or on exit ramps, Destination signs should be located 200 feet or more in advance of the intersection, and following any Junction or Advance Route Turn assemblies that might be required. In rural areas, Destination signs should be located 400 feet or more in advance of the intersection. The minimum distance between a Destination sign and either an Advance Route Turn assembly or a Junction assembly should be 200 feet.

Option. Because the Destination sign is of lesser importance than the Junction, Advance Route Turn, or Directional assemblies, the Destination sign may be eliminated where the distance in which to provide adequate sign spacing is limited.

Support. Figures 903.4.25.1 through 903.4.25.3 show typical placements of Destination signs.

903.4.38 Distance Signs (D2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43)

Standard. If used, the Distance (D2-1 through D2-3) signs shall be a horizontal rectangle of a size appropriate for the required legend, displaying the names of no more than three cities, towns, or junctions, and the distance (to the nearest mile) to those places.

The distance numerals shall be placed to the right of the destination names.

Guidance. The distance displayed should be determined on a case-by-case basis by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division when signs are being detailed for fabrication.

The top destination displayed on the Distance sign should be that of the next city or interchange which will be reached while traveling on the route. The second destination displayed on the Distance sign should be the next control city, or significant destination, encountered while traveling on the route. This control city should be displayed on all subsequent destination signs along the route until that city is reached and then replaced with the next control city along the route. The bottom destination displayed on the Distance sign should be that of the significant anchor city or control city for that route. The anchor city should be displayed on all destination signs along the route as a consistent reference of distance traveled.

Option. On a route continuing into another State, destinations in the adjacent State may be displayed.

903.4.39 Location of Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.44)

Guidance. Distance signs should be installed on all state routes leaving municipalities and just beyond intersections of other state routes in rural areas. If used, they should be placed just outside the municipal limits or at the edge of the built-up area if it extends beyond the limits. If a distance sign cannot be installed leaving the intersection, a destination sign with distances should be installed in advance of the intersection providing a destination for each departing leg of the intersection and the distance to the destination.

Where overlapping routes separate a short distance from the municipal limits, the Distance sign at the municipal limits should be omitted. The Distance sign should be installed approximately 300 feet beyond the separation of the two routes.

Where, just outside of an incorporated municipality, two routes are concurrent and continue concurrently to the next incorporated municipality, the top name on the Distance sign should be that of the place where the routes separate; the bottom name should be that of the city to which the greater part of the through traffic is destined.

Support. Figures 903.4.25.1 through 903.4.25.3 show typical placements of Distance signs.

903.4.40 Street Name Signs (D3-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.45)

D3-1

D3-1b

Support. Street Name signs at intersections and along roadways provide road users with important navigation information. EPG 903.8.10 contains information about signs used to identify the names of grade-separated streets, railways, bikeways, or other transportation facilities.

MoDOT does not install street name signs at non-signalized intersections, if installed, this signing is installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction who owns the roadway intersecting the state route, or who has established a street name on an intersecting state route.

Guidance. Street Name (D3-1) signs should be installed at all signalized intersections in both urban and rural areas except as noted in the first Standard paragraph below.

To minimize wrong-way movements onto freeway or expressway exit ramps, Street Name signs should not be used at the intersection of a freeway or expressway exit ramp with the crossroad to display the name of the freeway or expressway to traffic on the crossroad.

Standard. Street Name signs shall not be installed for approaches to fire stations, commercial entrances, schools, or driveways without an official street name.

When used, Street Name signs shall be mounted on a mast arm or between the carrier and tether wires for span wire signals, and shall be mounted a maximum of 12 inches from the center of the upright support (see Standard Plan 902.40R).

Street name signs shall not be installed between signal heads as the signal structures are not designed for the additional wind load at these locations.

Option. For signals with insufficient space to install a street name sign between the upright support and the first signal indication, a D3-1 sign, 12 inches tall and not to exceed 4 feet in width, may be mounted on vertical signal support.

For span wire signals, the maximum distance from the center of the upright support to the street name sign as indicated in the preceding Standard paragraph may be increased if the upright support isn’t adjacent to the roadway (see Standard Plan 902.70Q).

Standard. The lettering for names of streets and highways on Street Name signs shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see EPG 903.1.8).

Guidance. Letter heights on street name signs should be as shown in Table 903.4.40. Table 903.4.40 should be used by local jurisdictions when fabricating and installing street name sign at state route intersections. MoDOT uses the largest font possible on street name signs at signalized intersections, with the legend size/sign size being controlled by the capacity of the signal structure.

Support. The recommended minimum letter heights for Street Name signs are summarized in Table 903.4.40. The speed limits specified and the recommended minimum letter heights provided in this Article apply to the roadway that each Street Name sign faces rather than to the street that has its name displayed on the Street Name sign. The letter heights specified in Table 903.4.40 are the combination of lower-case letters with the initial upper-case letter of a mixed-case legend.

A minimum upper-case letter height of 10 inches with a lower-case nominal loop height of 8 inches is recommended for all overhead Street Name signs regardless of posted speed limit as Street Name signs generally require greater legibility distances for road users to properly react.

The letter height of the street name descriptor (such as St, Ave, or Rd), the directional legend (such as NW), or any other supplemental legend (such as block or house numbers) on the D3-1 signs may be smaller than that of the street name itself.

Guidance. The letter height of the street name descriptor, the directional legend, or any other supplemental legend on the D3-1 signs should be at least two-thirds of the letter height of the street name itself, but not less than 3 inches for the initial upper-case letters and not less than 2.25 inches for the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters.

Conventional abbreviations (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)) should be used except for the street name itself. Acceptable abbreviations for street name descriptors such as “Ave” for Avenue and “Blvd” for Boulevard should be as provided in Table 903.4.7.1 (see EPG 903.4.7). The street name descriptors that are provided in Table 903.4.7.2 should not be abbreviated (see EPG 903.4.7).

Option. MoDOT does not display block numbers on street name signs. However, local jurisdictions who elect to install and maintain internally illuminated street name signs on MoDOT signals, under an agreement with MoDOT, may display block numbers as a supplemental legend on a Street Name sign to aid emergency responders and road users in locating addresses.

Guidance. If block numbers are displayed on a Street Name sign where only a single Street Name sign is provided for the crossroad, the block or house numbers for the left and right blocks should be positioned at the left and right sides of the sign, respectively.

If block numbers are displayed on a Street Name sign where two Street Name signs are provided for the crossroad, such as on diagonally opposite corners of an intersection, each Street Name sign should display only the block or house numbers associated with that block of the crossroad.

Option. MoDOT does not display pictographs (see definition in EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)) on street name signs. However, local jurisdictions who elect to install and maintain internally illuminated street name signs on MoDOT signals, under an agreement with MoDOT, may display a pictograph representing the municipality, in accordance with the provisions of EPG 903.1.4.

Standard. Pictographs shall not be displayed on Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs (see EPG 903.4.41).

If a pictograph is used on a D3-1 sign, the height and width of the pictograph shall not exceed the upper-case letter height of the principal legend of the sign.

The bicycle symbol shall not be used on a Street Name sign.

Guidance. The pictograph should be positioned to the left of the street name.

Pictographs should not be used on a D3-1 sign that contains directional arrows.

Standard. The Street Name sign shall be retroreflective or illuminated in accordance with the provisions of EPG 903.1.21.

Option. MoDOT only utilizes green as the background color for street name signs. However, MoDOT will consider a city request to use an alternative background color (see the second standard paragraph below) other than the standard guide sign color of green for MoDOT Street Name (D3-1) signs if the city agrees to fund the total cost of the sign replacement project.

Standard. Alternative background colors shall not be used for Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs (see EPG 903.4.41).

The only acceptable alternative background colors for Street Name (D3-1) signs shall be blue, brown, or white. Regardless of whether green, blue, or brown is used as the background color for Street Name (D3-1) signs, the legend (and border, if used) shall be white. For Street Name signs that use a white background, the legend (and border, if used) shall be black.

If a city requests to fund changing the color of a MoDOT street name sign, the following conditions shall be met:

A. MoDOT must first agree to the request and reserves the right to refuse based on engineering judgement.

B. The city shall be responsible for all costs associated with the sign replacement project.

C. The street name signs shall be designed by MoDOT and meet all other MoDOT street name design aspects.

D. Block numbers, pictographs or any other added legend beyond what MoDOT would normally display on the street name shall not be displayed on these street name signs as MoDOT will assume maintenance of the new signs once they are installed.

E. Only those street name signs within the city’s jurisdictional boundaries will be permitted to be altered.

F. All street name signs along the state corridor within the city’s jurisdiction shall all be upgraded to the alternate color at the same time, no partial upgrades will be permitted.

Option. Cities and counties may install MUTCD compliant Street Name signs on MoDOT right of way at non-signalized intersections, either on an independent post adjacent to and to the right of the STOP sign or installed on the MoDOT post above the STOP sign.

Standard. If a city or county elects to install as street name sign above the MoDOT STOP sign, they shall first contact the local district office to make the request and to have their proposed attachment method approved, no contract or agreement is required. These installations shall meet the following criteria:

A. The installation of street name signs on MoDOT STOP signs must be approved by the appropriate MoDOT district.

B. Street name signs shall have a vertical clearance between 1 inch and 4 inches measured from the bottom of the Street Name sign to the top of the STOP sign.

C. The Street Name sign shall be mounted independently of the STOP sign, attaching only to the sign post and in no way connected to the STOP sign.

D. The installation shall not interfere with the maintenance of the STOP sign.

E. Only one Street Name sign shall be permitted for a side street, no street name sign is permitted for the state route, such installations shall be installed on a separate sign post.

F. Street name signs shall only be mounted above and not below the STOP sign.

G. The maintenance of the Street Name sign shall be the sole responsibility of the city or county, MoDOT will only maintain the sign post and the STOP sign.

H. The maximum width of a Street Name sign placed over a MoDOT STOP sign shall not exceed the width of the STOP sign, MoDOT will not upgrade existing STOP sign posts to allow for larger Street Name sign. Wider street name signs shall be installed on a separate sign post.

I. Attachments to MoDOT STOP sign posts shall be accomplished by use of a bracket, U-channel posts stub, or other methods pre-approved by MoDOT.

J. The Street Name sign representing the side street shall be mounted with its face parallel to the street it is naming.

K. If the Stop sign has a ONE WAY signs mounted above it, such as on expressways, a city or county shall install their Street Name sign on a separate sign post.

The installation and maintenance of all street name sign installed on MoDOT right of way by a city or county, either as an independent installation or a street name sign installed over a MoDOT STOP sign shall be the responsibility of the city or county.

Street name signs are the only form of route designation a city or county may install on MoDOT right of way, no other form of route designation is permitted.

Cities and counties are not permitted to install street name signs depicting anything other than the official street name of the roadway used by the US Postal service. Street name signs for alternate street names, such as, honorary, historic or memorial street names shall not be installed on MoDOT right of way.

MoDOT reserves the right to remove and return any street names signs which are not installed correctly or interfere with the visibility of the STOP sign.

Option. At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names may be displayed on the same Street Name (D3-1) sign along with Type D directional arrows, except where one arrow would point in a direction opposing the flow of traffic on a one-way street or where a turn in the direction of the arrow is not allowed.

Support. Information regarding the use of street names on supplemental plaques for use with intersection-related warning signs is contained in EPG 903.3.64.

Information regarding the identification of overcrossing and undercrossing roadways at grade separations is contained in EPG 903.8.10.

**Table 903.4.40** Minimum Letter Heights on Street Name Signs
Type of Mounting	Type of Street or Highway	Speed Limit	Recommended Minimum Letter Height *
Type of Mounting	Type of Street or Highway	Speed Limit	Initial Upper-Case	Lower-Case
Overhead	All types	All speed limits	10 inches	8 inches
Overhead - Two Line	All Types	All Speed Limits	6 inches	4.5 inches
Signal Column or Pedestal Base	All Types	All Speed Limits	6 inches	4.5 inches
* Letter heights are shown for the street name. Descriptors or other supplementary legend may be displayed in smaller lettering of at least 3 inches. Notes: MoDOT's overhead street name sign legend controlled by signal structure limitations. MoDOT only installs street name signs at signalized intersections.

903.4.41 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.46)

Support. Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs identify a downstream intersection. Although this is often the next intersection, it could also be several intersections away in cases where the next signalized intersection is referenced.

Standard. Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs, if used, shall supplement rather than be used instead of the Street Name (D3-1) signs at the intersection.

Option. Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs may be installed in advance of unsignalized intersections within a corridor of signalized intersections which has Advance Street Name signs to provide road users with advance information to identify the name(s) of the next intersecting street to prepare for crossing traffic and to facilitate timely deceleration and/or lane changing in preparation for a turn.

Special consideration may be given to isolated unsignalized intersections where it can be established that safety problems exist, and installation of this type of signing would be beneficial.

Guidance. On arterial highways in rural areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections and in advance of all intersections with mandatory turn lanes.

In urban areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections on divided highways, major arterial streets, or other routes as determined by the district, except where signalized intersections are so closely spaced that advance placement of the signs is impracticable.

If there is concern that the action message for Advance Street Name signs for unsignalized intersections could be misleading due to other entrances in the area or the sight distance to the intersection is limited, then the action message should be the distance shown to the nearest 100 ft.

Advance Street Name sign placement should be one-half or one-quarter mile in advance of the signal or intersection. In the event of closely spaced signals, this sign should be located immediately beyond the adjacent signalized or unsignalized intersection.

The heights of the letters on Advance Street Name signs should comply with the provisions of EPG 903.4.5.

Standard. If used, Advance Street Name signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background. Alternative background colors shall not be used on Advance Street Name signs.

If used for signalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top line(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and (or) NEXT SIGNAL.

If used for unsignalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top lines(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and an action message. The recommended action message for these signs is NEXT INTERSECTION or NEXT ROUNDABOUT. When the Advance Street Name sign is provided for at the junction of a state highway, the Advance Street Name sign shall replace the existing junction assembly.

The installation of an Advance Street Name sign for an unsignalized intersection shall be a supplement to any Street Name signing provided by others.

Pictographs shall not be displayed on Advance Street Name signs.

Option. Directional arrow(s) may be placed to the right or left of the street name or message such as NEXT SIGNAL, as appropriate, rather than on the bottom line of the legend. Curved-stem arrows may be used on Advance Street Name signs on approaches to circular intersections.

For intersecting crossroads where the same road has a different street name for each direction of travel, the different street names may be displayed on the same Advance Street Name sign along with directional arrows.

In advance of two closely-spaced intersections where it is impracticable to install separate Advance Street Name signs, the Advance Street Name sign may include the street names for both intersections along with appropriate supplemental legends for both street names, such as NEXT INTERSECTION, 2ND INTERSECTION, or NEXT LEFT and NEXT RIGHT, or directional arrows.

Guidance. If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name sign, the street names should be displayed in the following order:

A. For a single intersection where the same road has a different street name for each direction of travel, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or

B. For two closely-spaced intersections, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see EPG 903.3.61).

Option. An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque (see EPG 903.3.64) with black legend on a yellow background, installed to supplement an Intersection (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) warning sign may be used instead of an Advance Street Name guide sign.

903.4.42 Parking Area Guide Sign (D4-1, D4-1P, and D4-1a) (MUTCD Section 2D.47)

D4-1P

Option. The Parking Area (D4-1) guide sign may be used to show the direction to a nearby public parking area or parking facility.

The sign may also be used in all MoDOT commuter parking lots.

Standard. The parking area shall be owned or operated by a public agency in order to be signed.

The COMMUTER (D4-1P) plaque shall be mounted above the Parking Area sign at commuter parking lots. If used, the sign shall be a horizontal rectangle. The legend and border shall be green on a retroreflectorized white background.

COMMUTER PARKING (D4-1a) signs shall be utilized in each commuter parking area mounted back-to-back. One sign shall face the Interstate and the other will face the parking lot such that the maximum number of motorists on either side of the assembly can read the legend.

In addition, Commuter Parking Lot Restriction signs shall be erected at or near each entrance to the commuter parking lot.

Guidance. If used, the Parking Area (D4-1) guide sign should be installed as 1st order signing to the parking facility and where it can advise drivers of a place to park. The sign should not be used more than four blocks from the parking area.

903.4.43 PARK - RIDE Sign (D4-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.48)

Option. A PARK - RIDE (D4-2) sign may be used to direct road users to park-and-ride facilities.

The PARK - RIDE signs may be used in lieu of the Parking sign when a public transit stop is located within the commuter parking lot.

Standard. The signs shall display the word message PARK - RIDE and direction information (arrow or word message).

Option. PARK - RIDE signs may display the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol.

Standard. If used, the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol shall be located in the top part of the sign above the message PARK - RIDE. In no case shall the vertical dimension of the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol exceed 18 inches.

Guidance. If the function of the parking facility is to provide parking for persons using public transportation, the local transit pictograph should be used on the guide sign. If the function of the parking facility is to serve carpool riders, the carpool symbol should be used on the guide sign. If the parking facility serves both functions, both the pictograph and carpool symbol should be used. If used, the public transit pictograph should be of the same design as the local transit authority, however, the local transit authority name should not be a part of this sign.

The COMMUTER (D4-1P) plaque should be mounted below this sign.

Standard. These signs shall have a white legend and border on a rectangular green background. The carpool symbol shall be as shown for the D4-2 sign. The color of the local transit pictograph shall be selected by the local transit authority.

Option. To increase the target value and contrast of the local transit pictograph, and to allow the local transit pictograph to retain its distinctive color and shape, the pictograph may be included within a white border or placed on a white background.

903.4.44 Signing on Conventional Roads on Approaches to Interchanges (MUTCD Section 2D.49)

Support. Because there are a number of different ramp configurations that are commonly used at interchanges with conventional roads, drivers on the conventional road cannot reliably predict whether they will be required to turn left or right in order to enter the correct ramp to access the freeway or expressway in the desired direction of travel. Consistently applied signing for conventional road approaches to freeway or expressway interchanges is highly desirable.

Standard. On multi-lane conventional roads approaching an interchange, guide signs shall be provided to identify which direction of turn is to be made and/or which specific lane to use for ramp access to each direction of the freeway or expressway.

Guidance. The signing of conventional roads with one lane of traffic approaching an interchange should consist of a sequence containing the following signs (see Figure 903.4.44.1):

A. Junction Assembly

B. Destination sign

C. Directional Assembly or Entrance Direction sign for the first ramp

D. Advance Route Turn Assembly or Advance Entrance Direction sign with an advance turn arrow

E. Directional Assembly or Entrance Direction sign for the second ramp

Standard. If used, the Entrance Direction sign shall consist of a white legend and border on a green background. It shall contain the freeway or expressway route shield(s), cardinal direction, and directional arrow(s).

Option. The Entrance Direction sign may contain a destination(s) and/or an action message such as NEXT RIGHT.

At interchanges where right-of-way is restricted, the following alternate sequence of signs may be used (see Figure 903.4.44.2):

A. Junction Assembly

B. Directional Assembly for the first ramp

C. Directional Assembly for the second ramp

Guidance. On multi-lane conventional roads approaching an interchange, the sign sequence should contain the following signs (see Figures 903.4.44.3 through 903.4.44.5):

A. Junction Assembly

B. Advance Entrance Direction sign(s) for both directions (if applicable) of travel on the freeway or expressway

C. Entrance Direction sign for first ramp

D. Advance Turn Assembly

E. Entrance Direction sign for the second ramp

Support. Advance Entrance Direction signs are used to direct road users to the appropriate lane(s).

Standard. The Advance Entrance Direction sign shall consist of a white legend and border on a green background. It shall contain the freeway or expressway route shield(s) and cardinal direction(s).

Option. The Advance Entrance Direction sign may have destinations, directional arrows, and/or an action message such as KEEP LEFT, NEXT LEFT, or SECOND RIGHT. Signs in this sequence may be mounted overhead to improve visibility as shown in Figures 903.4.44.3 through 903.4.44.5.

Support. A post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction diagrammatic sign (see Figure 903.4.44.6), within the sequence of approach guide signing described in the first and second guidance paragraphs of this Article, might be helpful in depicting the location of a freeway or expressway entrance ramp that is in close proximity to an intervening intersection on the same side of the approach roadway and where signing for only the ramp might cause confusion to road users.

Standard. If used, the post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction diagrammatic sign shall display only the two successive turns from the same side of the roadway, one of which shall be the entrance ramp. The post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction sign shall depict only the successive turns and shall not depict lane use with lane lines, multiple arrow shafts for the approach roadway, action messages, or other representations.

Support. Example guide signing for a transposed-alignment crossroad at a diverging diamond interchange is shown in Figure 903.4.44.7. Example guide signing for a single-point urban intersection at a diamond interchange is shown in Figure 903.4.44.8.

903.4.45 WEIGH STATION Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.51)

Support. Independent facilities or areas have been added along many highways where certain commercial vehicles are directed to stop to be weighed and/or inspected. These areas are sometimes permanent, such as in a roadside area, or temporary mobile facilities deployed along the roadway.

The general concept for signing permanent Weigh Stations is similar to signing Rest Areas (see EPG 903.9.3) because in both cases traffic using either area remains within the right-of-way.

Standard. The standard sequence of signs for a Weigh Station on a conventional highway shall include three basic signs:

A. Advance Weigh Station Distance (D8-1) sign,

B. Weigh Station Advance Direction (D8-2) sign, and

C. Weigh Station Entrance Direction (D8-3) sign.

If the weigh station uses a preclearance system, a WEIGH STATION PRECLEARANCE – ALL TRUCKS RIGHT LANE sign shall be used.

Guidance. A Gore sign with the same basic legend as the Weigh Station Entrance Direction (D8-3) sign should also be used to emphasize the entrance to the weigh station.

The Weigh Station Advance Direction (D8-2) Sign or the Advance Weigh Station Distance (D8-1) sign should display, either on the sign or on a supplemental plaque or sign panel, the changeable legend OPEN or CLOSED.

903.4.46 Truck and Climbing Lane Signs (D17-1 and D17-2)

Support. A truck lane, commonly referred to as a climbing lane, is an additional lane added to the right of the travel lane. This added lane gives slow moving trucks and other slow-moving vehicles a dedicated lane to use to climb a steep grade at slower speeds if they are unable to climb the hill at the posted speed limit. At the end of the truck lane, the vehicles in the right lane that is ending must merge back into the normal travel lane. This helps reduce congestion by allowing normal traffic the ability to proceed up the grade unimpeded, in the normal travel lane, at the posted speed limit.

Truck lanes are typically installed at specific segments of roadway where vehicles commonly have difficulty maintaining the speed limit along an uphill grade and are not are typically not constructed as a series of continuous truck lanes along a corridor. Truck lanes utilize a unique set of regulatory and warnings signs as well as pavement markings to denote the availability of this added lane.

Guidance. If a series of truck lanes is provided along a highway, a Next Truck Lane (D17-1) sign should be installed after each truck lane segment.

Option. Most truck lanes are obvious to drivers and do not require advance notification. If a need to provide advance notification of the upcoming truck lane has been determined based on engineering judgement, one Truck Lane Mile (D17-2) sign may be installed in advance of the truck lane. The Truck Lane Mile (D17-2) sign, if used, is typically placed no more than ½ mile in advance of the beginning of the truck lane.

Support. See EPG 903.3.39 for Lane Ends Signs and EPG 620.2.14 for Lane-Reduction Transition pavement markings and see EPG 616.16 for the typical application for all traffic control devices as they are applied to a truck lane.

903.4.47 Passing Lane / Alternating Passing Lane Signs (D17-3, D17-4, D17-4a)

Support. A passing lane is lane added to the left of the normal travel lane. This lane gives drivers the ability to pass slower moving traffic without the need to use the opposing lane of traffic for passing maneuvers. At the end of the passing lane, vehicles in the left lane that is ending must merge back into the normal traffic lane.

In most cases, passing lanes are constructed as a series of passing lane segments in both directions of travel, alternating in availability from one direction of travel to the other along the corridor segment. This application is referred to as alternating passing lanes. This system of passing lanes can provide some of the benefits of a four-lane divided roadway within the right-of-way footprint of a conventional two-lane roadway. Passing lanes utilize a unique set of regulatory, warning and guide signs, as well as pavement markings, to denote the availability of the passing lane.

Guidance. On corridors where alternating passing lanes have been constructed, the ALTERNATING PASSING LANE NEXT XX MILES (17-4a) sign should be installed in advance of the first passing lane at each end of the alternating passing lane along the corridor. This sign notifies the driver that there will be a series of passing lane opportunities over the given distance displayed on the sign.

Option. Advanced notification of single passing lane opportunities is not typically required. If a need to provide advance notification of an upcoming passing lane has been determined to be needed based on engineering judgement, one PASSING LANE (D17-4) sign may be installed in advance of the passing lane. PASSING LANE (D17-4) sign, if used, is typically placed no more than ½ mile in advance of the beginning of the passing lane.

Standard. Each passing lane within an alternating passing lane corridor shall include a NEXT PASSING LANE X MILES (D17-3) sign at the end of passing lane.

Support. See EPG 903.3.39 for Lane Ends Signs and EPG 620.2.14 for Lane-Reduction Transition pavement markings and see EPG 616.16 for the typical application for all traffic control devices as they are applied to a passing lane.

903.4.48 Community Wayfinding Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.55)

Support. Community wayfinding guide signs are part of a coordinated and continuous system of signs that direct tourists and other road users to key civic, cultural, visitor, and recreational attractions and other similar secondary destinations within a city or a local urbanized or downtown area.

Community Wayfinding is a city installed and maintained signing program allowed on MoDOT right of way per this policy. Wayfinding signs are installed as MoDOT permit projects and require a TR47 agreement. MoDOT's only role is to ensure the city program signs meet the requirements of the wayfinding policies and do not interfere with safe operation of the state highway system.

Community wayfinding guide signs are a type of destination guide sign for conventional roads with a common color and/or identification marker for destinations within an overall wayfinding guide sign plan for an area.

Figure 903.4.48 illustrates various examples of the design of community wayfinding guide signs.

Standard. The use of community wayfinding guide signs shall be limited to conventional roads. Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed on freeway or expressway mainlines or ramps. Direction to community wayfinding destinations from a freeway or expressway shall be limited to the use of a Supplemental guide sign (see EPG 903.5.49) on the mainline and a Destination sign (see EPG 903.4.32) on the ramp to direct road users to the area or areas within which community wayfinding guide signs are used. A community wayfinding program shall have a minimum of three well defined districts before freeway/expressway signing will be permitted. A well-defined district shall represent a region or area with multiple sites or destinations within it. The individual wayfinding destinations shall not be displayed on the Supplemental guide and Destination signs except where the destinations are in accordance with this policy. Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be used to provide direction to primary destinations or highway routes or streets. Destination or other guide signs shall be used for this purpose as described elsewhere in EPG 903.4 and shall have priority over any community wayfinding sign in placement, prominence, and conspicuity.

Because regulatory, warning, and other guide signs have a higher priority, community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed where adequate spacing cannot be provided between the community wayfinding guide sign and other higher-priority signs. Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed in a position where they would obscure the road users' view of other traffic control devices.

Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be mounted overhead.

Support. Community wayfinding guide signs include boundary markers, welcome to messages or the simple display of a city name on a structure or sign (see EPG 903.17).

Guidance. If used, a community wayfinding guide sign system should be established on a local municipal or equivalent jurisdictional level or for an urbanized area of adjoining municipalities or equivalent that form an identifiable geographic entity that is conducive to a cohesive and continuous system of signs. Community wayfinding guide signs should not be used on a regional or statewide basis where infrequent or sparse placement does not contribute to a continuous or coordinated system of signing that is readily identifiable as such to the road user. In such cases, Destination or other guide signs detailed in EPG 903.4 should be used to direct road users to an identifiable area in which the type of eligible destination described in first Support paragraph of this Article is located.

When a system of community wayfinding guide signs is being considered, the system of existing guide signs should be evaluated for applicability and general compliance with the provisions of the EPG to ensure road user directional guidance is adequately being addressed.

Support. The specific provisions of this Article regarding the design of community wayfinding sign legends apply to vehicular community wayfinding signs and do not apply to those signs that are intended only to provide information or direction to pedestrians or other users of a sidewalk or roadside area.

Guidance. Because pedestrian wayfinding signs typically use smaller legends that are inadequately sized for viewing by vehicular traffic and because they can provide direction to pedestrians that might conflict with that appropriate for vehicular traffic, wayfinding signs designed for and intended to provide direction to pedestrians or other users of a sidewalk or other roadside area should be located to minimize their conspicuity to vehicular traffic. Such signs should be located as far as practicable from the street, such as at the far edge of the sidewalk. Where locating such signs farther from the roadway is impracticable, the pedestrian wayfinding signs should have their conspicuity to vehicular traffic minimized by employing one or a combination of the following methods:

A. Locating signs away from intersections where high-priority traffic control devices are present.

B. Facing the pedestrian message toward the sidewalk and away from the street.

C. Cantilevering the sign over the sidewalk if the pedestrian wayfinding sign is mounted at a height consistent with vehicular traffic signs, removing the pedestrian wayfinding signs from the line of sight in a sequence of vehicular signs.

To further minimize their conspicuity to vehicular traffic during nighttime conditions, pedestrian wayfinding signs should not be retroreflective.

Support. Color coding is sometimes used on community wayfinding guide signs to help road users distinguish between multiple potentially confusing traffic generator destinations located in different neighborhoods or subareas within a community or area.

Option. At the boundaries of the geographical area within which community wayfinding guide signing is used, an informational guide sign may be posted to inform road users about the presence of wayfinding signing and to identify the meanings of the various color codes or pictographs that are being used.

Standard. These informational guide signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background and shall have a design similar to that illustrated in Figure 903.4.2 and shall be consistent with the basic design principles for guide signs. These informational guide signs shall not be installed on freeway or expressway mainlines or ramps.

The color coding or a pictograph of the identification markers of the community wayfinding guide signing system shall be included on the informational guide sign posted at the boundary of the community wayfinding guide signing area. The color coding or pictographs shall apply to a specific, identifiable neighborhood or geographical subarea within the overall area covered by the community wayfinding guide signing. Color coding or pictographs shall not be used to distinguish between different types of destinations that are within the same designated neighborhood or subarea. The color coding shall be accomplished by the use of different colored square or rectangular panels on the face of the informational guide sign, each positioned to the left of the neighborhood or named geographic area to which the color-coding panel applies. The height of the colored square or rectangular panels shall not exceed 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.

Option. The different colored square or rectangular panels may include either a black or a white (whichever provides the better contrast with the color of the panel) letter, numeral, or other appropriate designation to identify the destination.

Except for the informational guide sign posted at the boundary of the wayfinding guide sign area, community wayfinding guide signs may use background colors other than green in order to provide a color identification for the wayfinding destinations by geographical area within the overall wayfinding guide signing system. Color-coded community wayfinding guide signs may be used with or without the boundary informational guide sign displaying corresponding color-coding panels described in the sixth Support paragraph (beginning with “Color coding is sometimes…”) through the sixth Standard paragraph (beginning with “The color coding or a pictograph…”) of this Article. Except as provided in the following Standard paragraph, in addition to the colors that are approved in the EPG for use on official traffic control signs (see EPG 903.1.6), other background colors may also be used for the color coding of community wayfinding guide signs.

Standard. The standard colors of red, orange, yellow, purple, or the fluorescent versions thereof, fluorescent yellow-green, and fluorescent pink shall not be used as background colors for community wayfinding guide signs, in order to minimize possible confusion with critical, higher-priority regulatory and warning sign color meanings readily understood by road users.

The minimum contrast value of legend color to background color for community wayfinding guide signs shall be at least 0.70 (or 70%).

All messages, borders, legends, and backgrounds of community wayfinding guide signs and any identification markers shall be retroreflective (see EPG 903.1.21 and 903.1.22).

Community wayfinding guide signs, exclusive of any identification marker used, shall be rectangular in shape.

Guidance. Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application as described in EPG 903.1.4 are important and should be incorporated into the community wayfinding guide sign design and location plans for the area.

Community wayfinding guide signs should be limited to three destinations per sign (see EPG 903.4.6).

Abbreviations (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)) should be kept to a minimum, and should include only those that are commonly recognized and understood.

Horizontal lines of a color that contrasts with the sign background color should be used to separate groups of destinations by direction from each other.

Support. The basic requirement for all highway signs, including community wayfinding signs, is that they be legible to those for whom they are intended and that they be understandable in time to permit a proper response. EPG 903.1.4 contains additional information on the design of signs, including desirable attributes of effective designs.

Guidance. Word messages should be as brief as practical and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance.

Standard. The minimum specific ratio of letter height to legibility distance shall comply with the provisions of EPG 903.1.8. The size of lettering used for destination and directional legends on community wayfinding signs shall comply with the provisions of minimum letter heights as provided in EPG 903.4.5.

Interline and edge spacing shall comply with the provisions of EPG 903.4.5.

Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, the lettering style used for destination and directional legends on community wayfinding guide signs shall comply with the provisions of EPG 903.4.4.

The lettering for destinations on community wayfinding guide signs shall be a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see EPG 903.4.4). All other word messages on community wayfinding guide signs shall be in all upper-case letters.

Guidance. Except as provided in the Option and Standard paragraphs below, letters, numerals, and other characters should be composed of the Standard Alphabets as detailed in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)).

Option. A lettering style other than the Standard Alphabets provided in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)) may be used on community wayfinding guide signs if an engineering study determines that the legibility and recognition values for the chosen lettering style meet or exceed the values for the Standard Alphabets for the same legend height and stroke width.

Standard. If a lettering style other than the Standard Alphabets is used, the alternative lettering style shall be conventional in form. The letters, numerals, and other characters shall not be italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or of other unusual forms.

In accordance with EPG 903.1.4, except for signs that are designed and located with the intent to be viewed only by pedestrians, bicyclists stopped out of the flow of traffic, or occupants of parked vehicles, Internet and e-mail addresses, including domain names and uniform resource locators (URL), and scanning graphics for the purpose of obtaining information (see EPG 903.1.4), shall not be displayed on any community wayfinding guide sign or sign assembly.

The arrow location and priority order of destinations shall follow the provisions described in EPG 903.4.8 and 903.4.32. Arrows shall be of the designs provided in EPG 903.4.8.

Option. Pictographs (see definition in EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)) may be used on community wayfinding guide signs.

Standard. If a pictograph is used, its height shall not exceed 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.

Except for pictographs, symbols that are not approved in the EPG for use on guide signs shall not be used on community wayfinding guide signs.

Business logos, commercial graphics, or other forms of advertising (see EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.07)) shall not be used on community wayfinding guide signs or sign assemblies.

Option. Other graphics that specifically identify the wayfinding system, including identification markers, may be used on the overall sign assembly and sign supports.

Support. An identification marker consists of a shape, color, and/or pictograph that is used as a visual identifier for the community wayfinding guide signing system for an area. Figure 903.4.48 shows examples of identification marker designs that can be used with community wayfinding guide signs.

Option. An identification marker may be used in a community wayfinding guide sign assembly, or may be incorporated into the overall design of a community wayfinding guide sign, as a means of visually identifying the sign as part of an overall system of community wayfinding signs and destinations.

Standard. The sizes and shapes of identification markers shall be smaller than the community wayfinding guide signs themselves. Identification markers shall not be designed to have an appearance that could be mistaken by road users as being a traffic control device.

Guidance. The area of the identification marker should not exceed ⅕ of the area of the community wayfinding guide sign with which it is mounted in the same sign assembly.

903.4.49 National Scenic Byways Sign and Plaque (M10-1 and M10-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2D.57)

Support. Certain roads have been designated by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation as National Scenic Byways or All-American Roads based on their archeological, cultural, historic, natural, recreational, or scenic qualities.

Table 903.4.49 lists the approved National Scenic Byways that follow state-maintained routes.

**Table 903.4.49 Approved National Scenic Byways in Missouri**
National Scenic Byways in Missouri
Crowley's Ridge Parkway
Little Dixie Highway of the Great River Road

Option. MoDOT may install the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign or (M10-1aP) plaque (see Figure 903.4.49) at entrance points to a route that has been recognized by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation as a National Scenic Byway or an All-American Road. The M10-1 sign may be installed as independent Directional (see EPG 903.4.28) or Confirming (see EPG 903.4.29) assemblies at periodic intervals along the designated route and near intersections where the designated route turns or follows a different numbered highway. The M10-1aP plaque may be installed below a route sign in a Confirming assembly. At locations where roadside features have been developed to enhance the traveler’s experience such as rest areas, historic sites, interpretive facilities, or scenic overlooks, the National Scenic Byways sign or plaque may be placed on the associated sign assembly to inform travelers that the site contributes to the byway travel experience.

Guidance. Where the byway is identified only by the National Scenic Byways sign, the Directional assembly should consist of the M10-1 sign and an M5 series or M6 series auxiliary plaque when indication of a turn is necessary to remain on the byway route.

Where the name of the byway is to be displayed on identification signs or plaques along the byway route, the name should be displayed in a Directional or Confirming assembly.

The size of the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign and (M10-1aP) plaque should be consistent with that specified for route signs (see EPG 903.4.10) for the roadway classification.

Where the name of the byway is to be displayed along the byway route as provided in the fifth paragraph of this Article, the byway Directional or Confirming assemblies should be located separately from any route Sign assemblies or Destination guide signs.

Standard. When a National Scenic Byways sign is installed on a National Scenic Byway or an All-American Road, the design shown for the M10-1 sign or M10-1aP plaque in Figure 903.4.49 shall be used. Use of this design shall be limited to routes that have been designated as a National Scenic Byway or All-American Road by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation.

If used, the M10-1 sign or M10-1aP plaque shall be placed such that the highway route signs have primary visibility for the road user.

The M10-1 sign or the M10-1aP plaque shall not be installed as sign panels on a guide sign or as part of a guide sign assembly.

The National Scenic Byway signs shall be paid for by the group or association responsible for byway.

Any additional signing, other than that provided by MoDOT, shall be located off of state maintained right of way.

903.4.50 State-Designated Scenic Byway, Historic Trail, and Auto Tour Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.58)

D6-4c

D6-4d

M17-1

Support. Signing for State-designated scenic byways, historic trails, and auto tour routes, is similar in concept to that for National Scenic Byways as provided in EPG 903.4.49.

Table 903.4.50 lists the approved Missouri Scenic Byways that follow state-maintained routes.

**Table 903.4.50** Approved Missouri Scenic Byways
Missouri Scenic Byway
Cliff Drive
Crowley's Ridge Parkway
Historic Route 66 Byway
Little Dixie Highway of the Great River Road
Old Trails Road
Ozark Mountain High Road
Ozark Mountain Parkway
Sho-Me Santa Fe Trail
Spirit of Kansas City
Stars and Stripes Historical/Cultural Byway

Named highways are officially designated and shown on official maps and serve the purpose of providing route guidance, primarily on unnumbered highways, and property addresses. A highway designated as a trail, auto tour route, or byway is not considered to be a highway name for the purposes of highway signing or road user navigation and orientation.

EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09) provides information on the authority for placement of traffic control devices within the highway right-of-way.

Guidance. Route Sign assemblies and Destination guide signs should have priority in visibility and location over signing related to historic trails, auto tour routes, and byways.

Standard. When a Missouri Scenic Byways sign is installed on state-maintained routes, the design shown for the D6-4b or D6-4c sign shall be used. Use of this design shall be limited to routes that have been designated as a Missouri Scenic Byway by the Commission.

The Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) signs shall be installed at the beginning of the byway and shall include the byway name at the bottom of the sign.

Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation signs shall be installed above route turn assemblies and at intersections where the designated route turns or follows a different numbered highway.

If used, the D6-4b or D6-4c sign shall be placed such that the roadway signs have primary visibility for the road user.

Any additional signing, other than that provided by MoDOT, shall be located off state maintained right of way.

Option. The end of the byway may be marked with the Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation sign with the END (M4-6) auxiliary sign mounted below.

At locations where roadside features have been developed to enhance the traveler’s experience, the Missouri Scenic Byways Point of Interest (D6-4d) plaque may be placed below the Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) sign to inform travelers that the site contributes to the byway travel experience.

Support. In some instances, a Missouri Scenic Byway will receive National Scenic Byway status in which case the byway is eligible for additional signing to denote this designation and is eligible for first order signing.

Standard. If a Missouri Scenic Byway receives National Scenic Byway status, the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign shall be mounted below the Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) sign or the Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation sign.

Support. If a Missouri Scenic Byway receives National Scenic Byway status it is eligible for first order signing.

Standard. First order signing for at grade intersections shall consist of a Public Use Area (D7-10) sign containing the byway name, the National Scenic Byway logo and a directional arrow and a distance, if applicable, to the beginning of the byway if less than one mile.

Option. For grade-separated interchanges, supplement guide signs and ramp signing may be installed to direct traffic to the byway.

Standard. The mainline signs shall be white on brown and contain the America’s Byway logo, the name of the byway and NEXT RIGHT. The ramp sign will be of the same design as the first order at grade signing.

The location of these signs shall be identical to that found on a normal Missouri Scenic Byway. The costs associated with the National Scenic Byways designation shall be the responsibility of the group or association responsible for byway.

Support. An auto tour route is a path along a historic route or a historic trail with the auto tour route traversing existing roadways. The roadway the auto tour route traverses may be the actual historic road or represent the exact location of a historic trail, however, it is more common the auto tour route traverses existing roadways which represent the closest approximation of where the historic route or trail originally existed.

MoDOT does not typically initiate auto tour routes, this action is typically initiated by historical organizations like the National Park Service or private organizations like the Historic Route 66 Association of Missouri who have an interest in preserving the history of a historic route or trail. These organizations are the technical experts on the history of the historic route or trail.

Auto tour signing is expensive to install and maintain and these costs are generally borne by the sponsoring organization requesting the signing. One of the primary issues with auto tour routes is they traditionally rely on signs to guide motorists along the path. If just one sign is stolen or damaged and taken out of service, the path is broken, and motorists can lose their way. In today’s technology and GPS guidance, there may be better more cost-effective ways of guiding motorists along an auto tour route. A sponsoring organization may want to consider instead of signing, such as a navigational map app for smart phone or GPS system. These types of apps are cheaper, can be easily updated, and are not as susceptible to failures like physical signs.

Standard. The Commission will consider marking an auto tour trail if the historic route or historic trail meets these minimum qualifications:

A. The road has been designated historic in one of the following ways:

The route is listed on the National Park Service’s National Register of Historic Places.
The route is a National Park Service National Historic Trail
The route has been designated as historic through state legislation or congressional action.

B. An organization shall exist who sponsors the historic route and who shall be responsible for determining the exact path of the historical road.

C. The historic route shall be a minimum of 50 miles long and contiguous in length.

Once a historic route or trail has been determined to qualify for auto tour signing, there are additional conditions and terms which must be met before signs can be installed on Commission right of way:

A. There shall be an agreement between the sponsoring organization and the Commission to define the responsibilities of each party. The agreement will have a 10-year term with options to renew the agreement. A new agreement will be executed as part of the renewal period. Any changes to the agreement during the 10-year period will void the agreement.

B. The sponsoring organization shall be responsible for paying a fee for the auto tour trail signing placed on Commission right of way. The fee shall be determined by the Commission and will cover the cost for initial sign installations as well as the estimated maintenance costs for the life of the 10-year agreement. If at the end of the 10-year term the sponsoring organization wishes to renew the agreement, the organization will be responsible for paying a renewal fee to cover the estimated maintenance costs for the subsequent 10 years. If a renewal is not executed with the Commission following the end date of the previous agreement the auto tour trail signing will no longer be maintained and will be removed from Commission right of way.

C. Historic route signs located on MoDOT right of way shall be installed and maintained by MoDOT per the agreement. These signs will always remain the property of the Commission and at the end of their life span will be disposed of as scrap material.

D. The Commission shall approve the path of the historic route prior to execution of the agreement.

E. The design of the sign used to mark the historic route shall be approved by the Commission as well as the Federal Highway Administration. The size of the sign shall not be larger than 24” x 30".

F. The Commission shall coordinate the fabrication of the approved historic route signs for both state route and non-state route portions of the historic route or path to assure uniformity in signing.

G. The installation of signs on Commission right of way shall be in accordance with MoDOT standards and specifications and approved by MoDOT prior to the execution of an agreement. The sign installations on routes outside of the Commission’s current right of way shall match the sign design and sign placement established for the state right of way, with the post selection meeting the approval of the local jurisdiction who owns the right of way the signs are being installed on.

H. If the path of the historic route travels on roadways outside of the Commission’s current highway system, the sponsoring organization shall acquire written commitments from local jurisdictions to allow the historic route’s path to traverse the local jurisdiction’s routes prior to the execution of the agreement with the Commission. These written commitments must also address how the signs will be initially installed along the local jurisdiction’s route as well as the commitments for the long-term maintenance of the signs. If these commitments cannot be obtained the historic route signing cannot be installed.

I. The auto tour path for the historic route shall be installed in a single phase within a year or less.

J. Any part of the Commission-maintained system shall be limited to a maximum of three concurrent historic route and/or trail designations.

K. The approved auto tour path shall be marked using trailblazer assemblies and confirmation assemblies installed on their own independent sign supports. The trailblazing assemblies shall comprise of one approved auto tour sign and the appropriate directional arrow. The confirmation assembly shall be comprised of only the approved auto tour sign. The confirmation assemblies shall be placed in advance of an intersection where the auto tour route makes a directional change, the confirmation assembly shall be installed downstream of the intersection where the auto tour route made the directional change. No other signs shall be installed along the route unless approved by the Commission. The Commission will work with the sponsoring organization to establish the sign installation plan identifying sign installation locations.

L. Cardinal Direction plaques shall not be used with auto tour route signing.

M. The AUTO TOUR (M17-1) auxiliary sign was an educational plaque, it is no longer used. All existing signs shall be removed from assemblies at the end of their life cycle.

The TR15 agreement for the auto tour route signing for sponsoring organizations who are not state or federal agencies shall contain the following provisions:

A. The sponsoring organization for the historic route shall provide a detailed map and description for the path of the historic route to be included in the agreement between the sponsoring organization and the Commission.

B. The sponsoring organization shall have the funding for the installation and 10 years of maintenance in place before the agreement will be executed.

C. If the historic road crosses a state line, there must be agreement with the adjoining state or states on the signing and the routing of the historic route. If agreements with the other states cannot be reached the historic signing shall end at the last intersection in Missouri.

D. If approved, Auto Tour Route signs shall not be installed on freeways or expressways, except as necessary to provide continuity between disconnected segments of conventional roadways that are designated as auto tour routes, for which the freeway or expressway provides the only connection between the segments. If installed on freeways or expressways, Auto Tour Route signs shall be installed as independent trailblazer assemblies and shall not be installed with other Route signs or confirmation assemblies or on guide signs. If installed on freeways or expressways, Auto Tour Route trailblazer assemblies shall be installed at less frequent intervals than route confirmation assemblies.

Support. Historic trail signing with state or federal sponsorship are typically installed under a memorandum of understanding (MOU), that is drafted specifically for each trail.

The Mississippi River Trail (MRT), while listed here, is a US Bike route which was established through the AASHTO Route Marking process. The MRT Trail is a designated bicycle and pedestrian trail that traverses the shores of the Mississippi River in the United States. The trail extends from the headwaters at Lake Itasca in Minnesota to near the mouth of the river in Venice, Louisiana. Much of the trail’s 3,000 miles (4,800 km) follows roadways used by motor vehicles, although some of the route is on multi-use trails.

There are several approved historic routes and trails that follow state-maintained routes which include:

A. Lewis and Clark Trail (M17-2)

B. Historic 66 (M17-8, M17-8a)

C. Santa Fe Trail (M17-4)

D. Oregon Trail (M17-3)

E. Trail of Tears (M17-5)

F. Pony Express (M17-10)

G. California Trail (M17-11)

H. Mississippi River Trail (MRT) bike trail / US Bike Route 45 (M17-7)

Option. Exclusive to the Lewis and Clark Trail (M17-2) marker, signing may be placed on the Guide Signs to provide guidance along the approved path on freeways and expressways. If there is insufficient space on the guide sign to display the Lewis and Clark Trail, the trail sign may be hung below the guide sign in accordance with MoDOT Standards and Specifications.

903.4.51 Corridor Designations

Support. Corridor designations are typically multi-state route names established and/or implemented by neighboring state DOTs. In Missouri, the adoption of corridor designations was accomplished through Commission action.

There are two approved corridor designations currently in the state:

Avenue of the Saints (M17-9) - The Avenue of the Saints was the concept of businessman Ernest Hayes of Mount Pleasant, Iowa who in the 1980s envisioned a four-lane highway between St. Paul and St. Louis. It was named by Gary Smith, who at the time was Executive Director of the Southeast Iowa Regional Planning Commission. Smith and Hayes convened a group of area business and political leaders, who organized an effort to convince the Iowa Department of Transportation to study the idea, which they did in 1988.

In 1990 the FHWA chose its route for the Avenue of the Saints: the signed highway would follow the existing Interstate 35 from St. Paul to a point south of Clear Lake, Iowa; U.S. Route 18 to Charles City, Iowa; U.S. Route 218 to Cedar Falls, Iowa; U.S. Route 20 and Iowa Highway 58 around Cedar Falls and Waterloo, Iowa; Interstate 380 from Waterloo through Cedar Rapids to Interstate 80 near Coralville, Iowa and Iowa City, Iowa; U.S. Route 218 to Donnellson, Iowa; Iowa Highway 394 and Route B to Wayland, Missouri; and Interstate 64 and U.S. Route 61 from Wayland to St. Louis. The Intermodal Surface Transportation Efficiency Act of 1991 made the Avenue of the Saints an official "high-priority corridor," and signs were put along the route by the end of the year.

On July 25, 2008, the final nine miles (14 km) of highway between the Lewis—Clark county line and Wayland, Missouri, was open to four-lane traffic. A ceremony was held at the intersection of US 61 and Route 27 to commemorate the completion of the four-lane highway in Missouri. The Avenue of the Saints is now complete from St. Paul to suburban St. Louis.

Chicago - Kansas City Expressway (CKC) – The Chicago–Kansas City Expressway is a highway that runs between Chicago, Illinois, and Claycomo, Missouri. The road is known as Route 110 in Missouri and Illinois Route 110 (IL 110) in Illinois. The Illinois Route 110 was created through legislation on May 27, 2010, as the designated route for the Illinois portion of the Chicago–Kansas City Expressway.

Missouri Route 110 and the Chicago-Kansas City Expressway designations were established through the actions of the Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission on January 4, 2012.

903.4.52 MoDOT Maintenance Signs (M19-2)

Standard. The MAINTENANCE ENDS (M19-2) sign shall be erected at the end of MoDOT maintenance on all marked highways except at a state line.

The MAINTENANCE BEGINS (M19-1) sign has been discontinued for normal use. MoDOT shall no longer provide MAINTENANCE BEGINS signs. Existing MAINTENANCE BEGINS signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.

Option. When state maintenance begins and ends at multiple locations along a route’s length as it enters and exits various municipalities, a MAINTENANCE BEGINS (M19-1) sign may be used to mark the boundaries of MoDOT maintenance responsibilities.

Guidance. The MAINTENANCE ENDS signs are not to be placed to mark the maintenance responsibilities for crossroads, such as within interchange limits unless there is a specific problem.

@@ Line 1: / Line 1: @@
-[[image:903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs.jpg|right|350px]]
+{|align="right"
+|__TOC__
+|}
+[[Category:903 Highway Signing (MUTCD Part 2)|903.04]]
+=={{SpanID|903.4.1}}903.4.1  Scope of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards and Application (MUTCD Section 2D.01)==
+'''Standard. '''The provisions of EPG 903.4 shall apply to any road or street other than expressways and freeways, except as otherwise provided in the EPG.
+'''Support. '''Guide signs direct road users along streets and highways; inform them of intersecting routes; direct them to cities, towns, villages, or other important destinations; identify nearby rivers and streams, parks, forests, and historical sites; and provide information that will help them along their way in the most simple and direct manner possible.
+'''Guidance. '''The selection of primary or control destinations (those displayed consistently over longer distances along a route) displayed on guide signs should be meaningful to road users in navigation and orientation. The destinations selected should be identifiable on official maps.
+'''Support. '''[[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1 | EPG 903.1]] addresses placement, location, and other general criteria for signs.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.2}}903.4.2  Color, and Retroreflection, and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2D.02)==
+'''Support. '''Requirements for illumination, retroreflection, and color are stated under the specific headings for individual guide signs or groups of signs. General provisions are given in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.6|EPG 903.1.6]], [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|903.1.21]], and [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.22|903.1.22]].
+'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG for individual signs or groups of signs, guide signs on streets and highways shall have a white message and border on a green background. All messages, borders, and legends shall be retroreflective and all backgrounds shall be retroreflective.
+'''Support. '''Color coding is sometimes used to help road users distinguish between multiple potentially confusing destinations. Examples of valuable uses of color coding include guide signs for roadways approaching or inside an airport property with multiple terminals serving multiple airlines, and community wayfinding guide signs for various traffic generator destinations within a community or area.
+'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, different color sign backgrounds shall not be used to provide color coding of destinations. The color coding shall be accomplished by the use of different colored square or rectangular sign panels on the face of the guide signs (see [[#fig903.4.2|Figure 903.4.2]]).
-==='''903.7.1 Scope and Application of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards''' (MUTCD Sections 2D.01 and 2D.02)===
+'''Option. '''The different colored sign panels on the face of a sign may include a black or white (whichever provides the better contrast with the panel color) letter, numeral, or other appropriate designation to identify an airport terminal or other destination.
-'''Standard.'''  Standards for conventional road guide signs shall apply to any road or street other than expressways and freeways.
+'''Support.  '''[[#903.4.48|EPG 903.4.48]] contains specific provisions regarding Community Wayfinding guide signs.
-'''Support.'''  Guide signs are essential to direct travelers along streets and highways, inform them of intersecting routes, direct them to cities, towns, villages or other important destinations, identify nearby rivers and streams, parks, forests and historical sites, and give information that will help them along their way in the most simple, direct manner.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.2}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.2 Examples of Color-Coded Destination Guide Signs.png|thumb|center|500px|alt="Two signs are shown. A horizontal rectangular green sign with a white border is shown with a square pink panel in the upper left portion with a white ""A"" on it. To the right of the pink panel, the words ""Budget Air,"" ""Express Air,"" and ""Air Midwest"" are in white on three lines. The words “NEXT LEFT” are in white, centered horizontally on the bottom line.
-Refer to [[903.1 Extent of Signing|EPG 903.1 Extent of Signing]] for additional information on placement, location and other general criteria for signs.
+Another horizontal rectangular green sign with a white border is shown. In the upper left portion of the sign, a square blue panel is shown with a white ""B"" on it. To the right of the blue panel, the words ""Pan Atlantic,"" ""Alpha Air,"" and ""Constell"" are in white on three lines. Two downward-pointing short white arrows are shown centered horizontally on the bottom line." |'''Figure 903.4.2''' Examples of Color-Coded Destination Guide Signs]]
-==='''903.7.2 Color, [http://www.trafficsign.us/reflidguide.pdf Retroreflection] and Illumination''' (MUTCD Section 2D.03)===
+=={{SpanID|903.4.3}}903.4.3  Size of Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.03)==
-'''Support.'''  Requirements for illumination, retroreflection and color are stated under the specific headings for individual guide signs or groups of signs.  General provisions are provided in [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.13 Types of Fabricated Signs (MUTCD Section 2A.06a)|EPG 903.1.13]] and [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.15 Retroreflectivity and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2A.08)|EPG 903.1.15]].
+'''Standard. '''Except as provided in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]], the minimum sizes of conventional road guide signs that have standardized designs shall be as shown in [[#tab903.4.3|Table 903.4.3]].
-'''Standard.'''  Except where otherwise specified for individual signs or groups of signs, guide signs on streets and highways shall have a white message and border on a green background.  All messages, borders and legends shall be retroreflective and all backgrounds shall be retroreflective or illuminated.
+'''Support.''' [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]] contains information regarding the applicability of the various columns in [[#tab903.4.3|Table 903.4.3]].
-==='''903.7.3 Size of Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.04)===
+'''Option.''' Signs larger than those shown in [[#tab903.4.3|Table 903.4.3]] may be used (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.7|EPG 903.1.7]]) for special applications where speed, volume or other factors result in conditions where increased emphasis, improved recognition or increased legibility would be desirable, with approval from the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
-'''Support.'''  Most guide sign legends are so variable that a standardized size is not appropriate.   The sign size needed for proper legibility is determined primarily by the length of the message, and lettering size and spacing.  However, for signs with standardized designs, such as route signs, it is practical to use the prescribed sizes that are given in the Table 903.7.3 and the Standard Highway Signs book.  Also refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11  Relation to Other Publications|EPG 903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications]].
+'''Support.''' For other guide signs, the legends are so variable that a standardized design or size is not appropriate. The sign size is determined primarily by the length of the message, and the size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.
-'''Option.'''  Reduced letter height, interline spacing and edge spacing may be used on guide signs if sign size must be limited by factors such as lane width or vertical or lateral clearance.
+'''Option.''' Reduced letter height, reduced interline spacing, and reduced edge spacing may be used on guide signs if sign size must be limited by factors such as lane width or vertical or lateral clearance.
-====<center> ''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''</center>====
+'''Guidance.''' Reduced spacing between the letters or words on a line of legend should not be used as a means of reducing the overall size of a guide sign, except where determined necessary by engineering judgment to meet unusual lateral-space constraints. In such cases, the legibility distance of the sign legend should be the primary consideration in determining whether to reduce the spacing between the letters or the words or between the words and the sign border, or to reduce the letter height.
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|+ ''(Sheet 1 of 6)''
+When a reduction in the prescribed size is necessary, the design used should be as similar as possible to the design for the standard size.
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Sign Number !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Article !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Conventional !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Expressway (At Grade) !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Freeway (Grade Separated) !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Other
+<center>
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.3}}
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;min-width: 600px"
+|+ Table 903.4.3. Conventional Road Guide Sign and Plaque Sizes
+|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
+! rowspan="2" | Sign or Plaque
+! rowspan="2" | Sign Designation
+! rowspan="2" | EPG Article
+! colspan="3" | Conventional Road (in. x in.)
+! Freeway/Expressway (in. x in.)
+|- style="vertical-align:middle;"
+! Standard
+! Oversized
+! Special
+! Mainline & Ramps
 |-
-!INTERSTATE ROUTE SHIELD (INDEPENDENT USE)
+| Interstate Route (1 or 2 digits)
-| align="center"|M1-1||  align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|903.7.10]]|| align="center"|	-|| align="center"|	-|| align="center"|	var x 24 (interstate only)|| align="center"|	-
+| M1-1, M1-1a
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 24
+| Varies X 24
+| -
+| Varies X 24
 |-
-!BUSINESS LOOP SHIELD (INDEPENDENT USE)
+| Interstate Route (3 digits)
-| align="center"|	M1-2||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|903.7.10]]||  align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|-|| align="center"|	-	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-1, M1-1a
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 30
+| Varies X 30
+| -
+| Varies X 30
 |-
-!US NUMBERED SHIELD (INDEPENDENT USE)
+| Off-Interstate Route (1 or 2 digits)
-| align="center"|	M1-4||	align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|903.7.10]]|| align="center"|var x 24|| align="center"|	var x 24	|| align="center"|var x 24	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-2
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 24
+| Varies X 24
+| -
+| Varies X 24
 |-
-!STATE NUMBERED SHIELD (INDEPENDENT USE)
+| Off-Interstate Route (3 digits)
-| align="center"|	M1-5||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|903.7.10]]|| align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-2
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 30
+| Varies X 30
+| -
+| Varies X 30
 |-
-!STATE LETTERED SHIELD  (INDEPENDENT USE)
+| U.S. Route (1 or 2 digits)
-| align="center"|	M1-5a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|903.7.10]]||  align="center"|var x 24|| align="center"|	-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-4
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 24
+| Varies X 24
+| -
+| Varies X 24
 |-
-!JUNCTION
+| U.S. Route (3 digits)
-|	 align="center"|M2-1||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.12 Junction Auxiliary Sign (M2-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.13)|903.7.12]]	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M1-4
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 30
+| Varies X 30
+| -
+| Varies X 30
 |-
-!NORTH (BLACK/WHITE) OR (WHITE/BLUE)
+| State Route (1 or 2 digits)
-|	 align="center"|M3-1(BL)||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)|903.7.14]] ||	 align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-5
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 24
+| Varies X 24
+| -
+| Varies X 24
 |-
-!EAST (BLACK/WHITE) OR (WHITE/BLUE)
+| State Route (3 digits)
-|	 align="center"|M3-2(BL)||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)|903.7.14]] || align="center"|	24 x 12||	 align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-5
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 30
+| Varies X 30
+| -
+| Varies X 30
 |-
-!SOUTH (BLACK/WHITE) OR (WHITE/BLUE)
+| State Route (Letter)
-|	 align="center"|M3-3(BL)||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)|903.7.14]] ||	 align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M1-5a
+| [[#903.4.11|903.4.11]]
+| Varies X 24
+| Varies X 24
+| -
+| Varies X 24
 |-
-!WEST (BLACK/WHITE) OR (WHITE/BLUE)
+| Junction (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M3-4(BL)||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)|903.7.14]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M2-1P
+| [[#903.4.13|903.4.13]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!ALTERNATE
+| North (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M4-1||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.16 ALTERNATE Auxiliary Signs (M4-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.17)|903.7.16]]|| align="center"|24 x 12|| align="center"|-|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M3-1P
+| [[#903.4.14|903.4.14]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!SPUR
+| East (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M4-1b||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.17 SPUR Auxiliary Sign (M4-1b) (MUTCD Section 2D.17a)|903.7.17]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M3-2P
+| [[#903.4.14|903.4.14]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!BUSINESS
+| South (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M4-3||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.19 BUSINESS Auxiliary Sign (M4-3) (MUTCD Section 2D.19)|903.7.19]]|| align="center"|24 x 12|| align="center"|-|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M3-3P
+| [[#903.4.14|903.4.14]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!TO
+| West (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M4-5||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.21 TO Auxiliary Sign (M4-5) (MUTCD Section 2D.21)|903.7.21]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12|| align="center"|24 x 12|| align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|-
+| M3-4P
+| [[#903.4.14|903.4.14]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!END
+| Alternate (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M4-6||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.22 END Auxiliary Sign (M4-6) (MUTCD Section 2D.22)|903.7.22]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M4-1P
+| [[#903.4.16|903.4.16]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!TEMPORARY
+| Spur (plaque)
-| align="center"|M4-7||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.23 TEMPORARY Auxiliary Signs (M4-7) (MUTCD Section 2D.23)|903.7.23]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|-
+| M4-1bP
+| [[#903.4.17|903.4.17]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!ADVANCE TURN ARROW: 90 DEGREE RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Business (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M5-1R (L)||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.25 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M5-1, M5-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.25)|903.7.25]] ||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|-
+| M4-3P
+| [[#903.4.18|903.4.18]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!ADVANCE TURN ARROW: 45 DEGREES RIGHT (LEFT)
+| To (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M5-2R (L)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.25 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M5-1, M5-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.25)|903.7.25]]||	 align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|-
+| M4-5P
+| [[#903.4.19|903.4.19]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: LEFT (RIGHT)
+| End (plaque)
-|	 align="center"|M6-1||	 align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]] ||	 align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|-
+| M4-6P
+| [[#903.4.20|903.4.20]]
+| 24 X 12
+| 24 X 12
+| -
+| 24 X 12
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: 45 DEGREE RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Advance Turn Arrow (90° Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|M6-2R (L)||	align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]|| align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M5-1P
+| [[#903.4.22|903.4.22]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: STRAIGHT
+| Advance Turn Arrow (45° Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|M6-3||	align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]||	 align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|-
+| M5-2P
-|}
+| [[#903.4.22|903.4.22]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+| -
-|+ '''''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''' (Sheet 2 of 6)''
+| 21 X 15
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign Number !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Article !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Conventional !!style="background:#BEBEBE"| Expressway (At Grade) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Freeway (Grade Separated) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Other
+|-
+| Advance Turn Arrow (Curved Stem)
+| M5-3P
+| [[#903.4.22|903.4.22]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: TWO-WAY
+| Lane Designation (Left)
-| align="center"|M6-4	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]	|| align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M5-4P
+| [[#903.4.23|903.4.23]]
+| 24 X 18
+| 24 X 18
+| -
+| 24 X 18
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: 45 DEGREE RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Lane Designation (Center)
-|	 align="center"|M6-5R (L)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M5-5P
+| [[#903.4.23|903.4.23]]
+| 24 X 18
+| 24 X 18
+| -
+| 24 X 18
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: DOUBLE UP & RIGHT  (LEFT)
+| Lane Designation (Right)
-| align="center"|M6-6R (L)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]	|| align="center"|21 x 15	|| align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M5-6P
+| [[#903.4.23|903.4.23]]
+| 24 X 18
+| 24 X 18
+| -
+| 24 X 18
 |-
-!DIRECTIONAL ARROW: DOUBLE UP & 45 DEGREE RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Directional Arrow (Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|M6-7R (L)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)|903.7.26]]||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|21 x 15||	 align="center"|-
+| M6-1P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!DESTINATION SIGNS (ARROWS ONLY)
+| Directional Arrow (45° Left/Right)
-| align="center"|D1-1(one line), D1-2(two-line), D1-3(three-line)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.34 Destination Signs (D1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.34)|903.7.34]]	|| align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|varies   (ramp)
+| M6-2P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!DESTINATION SIGNS (ARROWS AND MILES)
+| Directional Arrow (Straight)
-| align="center"|D1-1a(one line), D1-2a(two-line), D1-3a(three-line)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.34 Destination Signs (D1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.34)|903.7.34]]	|| align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|varies   (ramp)
+| M6-3P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!DISTANCE SIGNS
+| Directional Arrow (Two-Way)
-| align="center"|D2-1 (one line), D2-2 (two-line), D2-3 (three-line)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.36 Distance Signs (D2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.36)|903.7.36]]	|| align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|varies||	 align="center"|-
+| M6-4P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!STREET OR ROAD NAME
+| Directional Arrow (Two-Way 45° Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|D-3a (one line),D-3b (two-line)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.38 Street Name Signs (D-3 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.38)|903.7.38]]||	 align="center"|var x 16, var x 18||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M6-5P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!ONE LINE ADVANCE STREET NAME
+| Directional Arrow (Up & Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|D3-2	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.39 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.39)|903.7.39]]	|| align="center"|var x 36||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M6-6P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!TWO-LINE ADVANCE STREET NAME
+| Directional Arrow (Up & 45° Left/Right)
-|	 align="center"|D3-2a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.39 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.39)|903.7.39]]	|| align="center"|var x (48)||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M6-7P
+| [[#903.4.24|903.4.24]]
+| 21 X 15
+| 21 X 15
+| -
+| 21 X 15
 |-
-!ADVANCE STREET NAME WITH ROUTE SHIELD
+| Auto Tour
-|	 align="center"|D3-2b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.39 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.39)|903.7.39]]	|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|var x 60||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M-17 Series
+| [[#903.4.50|903.4.50]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!DOUBLE ADVANCE STREET NAME
+| MoDOT Maintenance Ends
-|	 align="center"|D3-2c	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.39 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.39)|903.7.39]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|var x 72||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| M19-2
+| [[#903.4.52|903.4.52]]
+| 18 X 12
+| -
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!LAKE ROAD RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Destination (1 line)
-|	 align="center"|M1-15R(L)|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.40 Lake Road Signs (M1-15) (MUTCD Section 2D.39a)|903.7.40]]	|| align="center"|var x 18||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-1
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!MoDOT MAINTENANCE BEGINS (ENDS)
+| Destination (2 lines)
-|	 align="center"|M12-1 (M12-2)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.41 MoDOT Maintenance Signs (M12-1, M12-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.39b)|903.7.41]]||	 align="center"|18 x 12||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-2
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!PARKING AHEAD (RIGHT,LEFT, 45 DEGREE RIGHT, 45 DEGREE LEFT)
+| Destination (3 lines)
-|	 align="center"|D4-1A (R,L, R45,L45)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.42 Parking Area Signs (D4-1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.40)|903.7.42]] ||	 align="center"|30 x 24||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-3
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!COMMUTER PLAQUE
+| Destination and Distance (1 line)
-|	 align="center"|D4-1b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.42 Parking Area Signs (D4-1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.40)|903.7.42]] 	|| align="center"|30 x 6||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-1a
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!COMMUTER PARKING
+| Destination and Distance (2 lines)
-|	 align="center"|D4-1c	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.42 Parking Area Signs (D4-1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.40)|903.7.42]] 	|| align="center"|60 x 36||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-2a
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!PARK AND RIDE RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Destination and Distance (3 lines)
-| align="center"|D4-2R (L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.43 PARK & RIDE Sign (D4-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.41)|903.7.43]]	|| align="center"|30 x 36||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-3a
+| [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!REST AREA NEXT RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Circular Intersection Destination (1 line)
-|	 align="center"|D5-1bR(L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]]	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|144 x 60 (132 x 60)||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-1d
+| [[#903.4.35|903.4.35]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!REST AREA GUIDE (ADVANCE)
+| Circular Intersection Departure Guide
-| align="center"|D5-1	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]]|| align="center"|	-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|132 x 60||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-1e
+| [[#903.4.35|903.4.35]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!REST AREA EXIT
+| Circular Intersection Destination (2 lines)
-| align="center"|D5-2a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]]|| align="center"|	-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|132 x 60||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-2d
+| [[#903.4.35|903.4.35]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!REST AREA GORE EXIT
+| Circular Intersection Destination (3 lines)
-| align="center"|D5-2b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]], [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.61 Rest and Scenic Area Signs (MUTCD Section 2E.52)|903.8.61]]|| align="center"|	-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|72 x 84||	 align="center"|-
+| D1-3d
+| [[#903.4.35|903.4.35]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!NEXT REST AREA X MILES
+| Distance (1 line)
-| align="center"|D5-6	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]] || align="center"|	-|| align="center"|	-||	 align="center"|132 x 36   (interstate only)||	 align="center"|-
+| D2-1
+| [[#903.4.38|903.4.38]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!LAST REST AREA IN MISSOURI
+| Distance (2 lines)
-| align="center"|D5-6a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|903.7.44]] ||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|132 x 36   (interstate only)||	 align="center"|-
+| D2-2
-|}
+| [[#903.4.38|903.4.38]]
+| Varies
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+| Varies
-|+ '''''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''' (Sheet 3 of 6)''
+| -
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign Number !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Article !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Conventional !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Expressway (At Grade) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Freeway (Grade Separated) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Other
+| Varies
 |-
-!ROADSIDE TABLE ½ MILE
+| Distance (3 lines)
-| align="center"|D5-5e	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]] ||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D2-3
+| [[#903.4.38|903.4.38]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!ROADSIDE TABLE WITH ARROW RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Street Name (1 line)
-|	 align="center"|D5-5R (L)	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D3-1
+| [[#903.4.40|903.4.40]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!ROADSIDE PARK X MILES
+| Street Name (2 lines)
-|	 align="center"|D5-5d	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D3-1b
+| [[#903.4.40|903.4.40]]
+| Varies X 18
+| Varies X 18
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!ROADSIDE PARK WITH ARROW RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Advance Street Name
-|	 align="center"|D5-5bR (L)	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D3-2
+| [[#903.4.41|903.4.41]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!NAMED ROADSIDE PARK
+| Parking Area
-| align="center"|D5-5h||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D4-1
+| [[#903.4.42|903.4.42]]
+| 30 X 24
+| 30 X 24
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!HISTORIC MARKER ½ MILE
+| Commuter
-| align="center"|D5-5i	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D4-1P
+| [[#903.4.42|903.4.42]]
+| 30 X 6
+| 30 X 6
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!TABLE
+| Commuter Parking
-| align="center"|D5-5k	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)|903.7.45]]||	 align="center"|24 x 12	|| align="center"|24 x 12||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D4-1a
+| [[#903.4.42|903.4.42]]
+| 60 X 36
+| 60 X 36
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!SCENIC VIEW ½ MILE
+| Park - Ride
-|	 align="center"|D6-1a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.46 Scenic Area Signs (D6-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43)|903.7.46]] ||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|42 x 30||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D4-2
+| [[#903.4.43|903.4.43]]
+| 30 X 36
+| 30 X 36
+| -
+| -
 |-
-!SCENIC VIEW WITH ARROW RIGHT (LEFT)
+| Missouri Scenic Byway
-|	 align="center"|D6-1R (L)	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.46 Scenic Area Signs (D6-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43)|903.7.46]],  [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.63 Missouri Welcome Center Affiliates (MUTCD Section 2E.53a)|903.8.63]]||	 align="center"|42 x 30||	 align="center"|42 x 30	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| D6-4b
+| [[#903.4.50|903.4.50]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!AIRPORT AHEAD (RIGHT, LEFT)
+| Missouri Scenic Byway Confirmation
-| align="center"|1-5aA(R,L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.47 Airport Sign (I-5a series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43a)|903.7.47]]||	 align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|var x 36||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| D6-4c
+| [[#903.4.50|903.4.50]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!WEIGH STATION X MILES
+| Point of Interest
-| align="center"|D8-1	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.48 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.44)|903.7.48]] ||	 align="center"|60 x 48||	 align="center"|108 x 84||	 align="center"|108 x 84||	 align="center"|-
+| D6-4d
+| [[#903.4.50|903.4.50]]
+| Varies
+| Varies
+| -
+| Varies
 |-
-!WEIGHT STATION RIGHT LANE
+| Advance Weigh Station Distance
-| align="center"|D8-2a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.48 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.44)|903.7.48]]|| align="center"|	-|| align="center"|	120 x 72||	 align="center"|120 x 72	|| align="center"|-
+| D8-1
+| [[#903.4.45|903.4.45]]
+| 48 X 48
+| 48 X 48
+| -
+| 108 X 84
+|-
+| Weigh Station Advance Direction
+| D8-2
+| [[#903.4.45|903.4.45]]
+| -
+| -
+| -
+| 120 X 72
 |-
-!WEIGH STATION GORE EXIT SIGN
+| Weigh Station Entrance Direction
-| align="center"|D8-3	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.48 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.44)|903.7.48]],  [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.67 Weigh Station Signing (MUTCD Section 2E.58)|903.8.67]]||	 align="center"|48 x 42	|| align="center"|84 x 72	|| align="center"|84 x 72||	 align="center"|-
+| D8-3
+| [[#903.4.45|903.4.45]]
+| 48 X 48
+| 48 X 48
+| -
+| 84 X 72
 |-
-!OFFICIAL WEIGHT STATION – MoDOT
+| Combination Lane Use/Destination
-| align="center"|F3-1	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.48 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.44)|903.7.48]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|84 x 24   (weigh station)
+| D15-1
+| [[#903.4.34|903.4.34]]
+| Varies X 96
+| Varies X 96
+| -
+| Varies X 96
 |-
-!GENERAL SERVICE SIGNS
+| Next Truck Lane
-| align="center"|D9 Series	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.49 General Service Signs (D9 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.45)|903.7.49]] ||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|24 x 24|| align="center"|	24 x24||	 align="center"|-
+| D17-1
+| [[#903.4.46|903.4.46]]
+| 42 X 48
+| 42 X 48
+| -
+| 60 X 66
 |-
-!NEXT SERVICES X MILES
+| Advance Truck Lane
-|	 align="center"|D9-17	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.49 General Service Signs (D9 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.45)|903.7.49]]||	 align="center"|72 x 60	|| align="center"|72 x 60||	 align="center"|72 x 60	|| align="center"|-
+| D17-2
+| [[#903.4.46|903.4.46]]
+| 42 X 42
+| 42 X 42
+| -
+| 60 X 54
 |-
-!HOSPTIAL NEXT RIGHT
+| Next Passing Lane
-| align="center"|D9-27-132	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.50 HOSPITAL Signs (D9-27, D9-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.45a)|903.7.50]] ||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|132 x 60	|| align="center"|132 x 60	|| align="center"|-
+| D17-3
+| [[#903.4.47|903.4.47]]
+| 42 X 48
+| 42 X 48
+| -
+| 60 X 66
 |-
-!“H” HOSPITAL
+| Advance Passing Lane
-| align="center"|D9-2	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.50 HOSPITAL Signs (D9-27, D9-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.45a)|903.7.50]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|24 x 24
+| D17-4
+| [[#903.4.47|903.4.47]]
+| 42 X 42
+| 42 X 42
+| -
+| 60 X 54
 |-
-!FIRE HYDRANT SIGN
+| Alternating Passing Lanes
-| align="center"|provided by others	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.51 Emergency Service Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.45b)|903.7.51]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| D17-4a
+| [[#903.4.47|903.4.47]]
+| 84 X 36
+| 84 X 36
+| -
+| -
 |}
+</center>
+=={{SpanID|903.4.4}}903.4.4  Lettering Style (MUTCD Section 2D.04)==
+'''Standard. '''The design of upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numerals, route shields, and spacing shall be as provided in the EPG articles and FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
+The lettering for names of places, streets, and highways on conventional road guide signs shall be a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.8|EPG 903.1.8]]). The nominal loop height of the lower-case letters shall be ¾ the height of the initial upper-case letter. When a mixed-case legend letter height is specified referring only to the initial upper-case letter, the height of the lower-case letters that follow shall be determined by this proportion. When the height of a lower-case letter is referenced, the reference is made to the nominal loop height. The height of the initial upper-case letter shall also be determined by this proportion.
+All other word legends on conventional road guide signs shall be in upper-case letters.
+The unique letter forms for each of the Standard Alphabet series shall not be stretched, compressed, warped, or otherwise manipulated. Modifications to the length of a word for a given letter height and series shall be accomplished only by the methods described in [[#903.4.3|EPG 903.4.3]] and shall be approved by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.5}}903.4.5  Size of Lettering (MUTCD Section 2D.05)==
+'''Support. '''Sign legibility is a direct function of letter size and spacing. Legibility distance has to be sufficient to give road users enough time to read and comprehend the sign. Under optimum conditions, a guide sign message can be read and understood in a brief glance. The legibility distance takes into account factors such as inattention, blocking of view by other vehicles, unfavorable weather, inferior eyesight, or other causes for delayed or slow reading. Where conditions permit, repetition of guide information on successive signs gives the road user more than one opportunity to obtain the information needed.
+'''Standard. '''Design layouts for conventional road guide signs shall be provided by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
+Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, the principal legend on post-mounted guide signs shall be in letters and numerals at least 6 inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a combination of 6 inches in height for upper-case letters and 4.5 inches in nominal loop height (see [[#903.4.4|EPG 903.4.4]]) for lower-case letters.
+Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, the principal legend on overhead guide signs shall be in letters and numerals at least 6 inches in height for all upper-case letters, or a combination of 6 inches in height for upper-case letters and 4.5 inches in nominal loop height (see [[#903.4.4|EPG 903.4.4]]) for lower-case letters.
+'''Guidance. '''Lettering sizes should be consistent on any particular class of highway.
+The minimum lettering and numeral sizes provided in the EPG (see [[#tab903.5.1|Table 903.4.5.1]]) should be exceeded where conditions indicate a need for greater legibility.
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+<center>
-|+ '''''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''' (Sheet 4 of 6)''
+{{SpanID|tab903.5.1}}
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign Number !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Article !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Conventional !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Expressway (At Grade) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Freeway (Grade Separated) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Other
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;min-width: 600px"
+|+ '''Table 903.4.5.1''' Typical Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Conventional Road Guide Signs
+|-
+! style="text-align:center;" | Type of   Sign
+! D1 & D2   Series <br />     55 mph and less
+! D1 & D2   Series/D3-2 <br /> 60 mph and greater
+! E8 Series
+! E1-1 Series
+|-
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#eaecf0" |'''A. Intersection or Interchange Advance Guide Signs and entrance Direction Guide Signs'''
+|-
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Interstate or Off-Interstate Business Route signs'''
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Numerals**
+| 6
+| 9
+| 9
+| 14
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | 1- or 2-Digit   Shields
+| 18 X 18
+| 24 X 24
+| 24 X 24
+| 36 X 36
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | 3-Digit   shields
+| 22.5 X 18
+| 30 X 24
+| 30 X 24
+| 45 X 36
+|-
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''U.S. or State Route Signs'''
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Numerals
+| 9
+| 12
+| 12
+| 18
 |-
-!EMERGENCY DIAL *55
+| style="text-align:left;" | 1- or 2-Digit   Shields
-| align="center"|I-13b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.52 EMERGENCY DIAL *55 Sign (I-13b) (MUTCD Section 2D.45c)|903.7.52]]||	 align="center"|36 x 36	|| align="center"|36 x 36||	 align="center"|36 x 36	|| align="center"|-
+| 18 X 18
+| 24 X 24
+| 24 X 24
+| 36 X 36
 |-
-!SAFETY BREAK – FREE COFFEE
+| style="text-align:left;" | 3-Digit   shields
-| align="center"|D5-16a	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.53 Safety Stop Sign (D5-16a) (MUTCD Section 2D.45d)|903.7.53]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|144 x 48||	 align="center"|-
+| 22.5 X 18
+| 30 X 24
+| 30 X 24
+| 45. X 36
 |-
-!BUSINESS DISTRICT RIGHT (LEFT)
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''County Route Signs'''
-| align="center"|I15-1R (L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.54 BUSINESS DISTRICT and INDUSTRIAL PARK Signs (I-15 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.45e)|903.7.54]]||	 align="center"|36 x 18||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!COMMUNITY BOARD
+| style="text-align:left;" | Numerals
-| align="center"|I5-1	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.56 TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPEED Signs (I1-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.47)|903.7.57]]||	 align="center"|var x 12||	 align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| 6
+| 8
+| 8
+| 10
 |-
-!CITY LIMIT
+| style="text-align:left;" | 1- 2-, or   3-Digit Shields
-| align="center"|I4-1	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.58 City/County Limit Signs (I4, I5, I6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.48a)|903.7.58]] ||	 align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|var x 36||	 align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|-
+| 18 X 18
+| 24 X 24
+| 24 X 24
+| 36 X 36
 |-
-!EXPRESSWAY CITY LIMIT
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''U.S. or State Text identification (Examples: U S 56, Md 2)'''
-| align="center"|I4-2	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.58 City/County Limit Signs (I4, I5, I6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.48a)|903.7.58]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|var x 36||	 align="center"|var x 36||	 align="center"|-
 |-
-!COUNTY LINE
+| style="text-align:left;" | Numerals &   Letters
-| align="center"|I6-1	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.58 City/County Limit Signs (I4, I5, I6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.48a)|903.7.58]]||	 align="center"|var x 18||	 align="center"|var x 42||	 align="center"|var x 42||	 align="center"|-
+| 8
+| 12
+| 12
+| 15
 |-
-!CUSTOM CITY LIMIT
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" | '''Cardinal   Directions (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST)'''
-| align="center"|I4-1a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.60 Custom City/County Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48c)|903.7.60]] ||	 align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!EXPRESSWAY CUSTOM CITY LIMIT
+| style="text-align:left;" | First Letter -   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|I4-2b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.60 Custom City/County Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48c)|903.7.60]] ||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|var x 36	|| align="center"|-
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10
+| 10
 |-
-!EXPRESSWAY CUSTOM COUNTY LINE
+| style="text-align:left;" | Rest of Word -   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|I6-1a	||  align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.60 Custom City/County Limit Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48c)|903.7.60]] ||	 align="center"|var x 18||	 align="center"|var x 48||	 align="center"|var x 48	|| align="center"|-
+| 5
+| 6
+| 8
+| 8
 |-
-!CITY ACCOMPLISHMENT PLAQUE
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Auxiliary and Alternative Route Legends (Examples: JCT, TO,   ALT, BUSINESS)'''
-| align="center"|I4-1b, I4-2d	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.61 City/County Accomplishment Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48d)|903.7.61]] ||	 align="center"|var x 12	|| align="center"|var x 12||	 align="center"|var x 12	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!MISSOURI STATE LINE
+| style="text-align:left;" | Words-   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|I-2	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.63 STATE LINE Signs (I-2, I-2a) (MUTCD Section 2D.48f)|903.7.63]] ||	 align="center"|36 x 18           (72 x 36)||	 align="center"|36 x 18        (72 x 36)||	 align="center"|72 x 36||	 align="center"|-
+| 5
+| 6
+| 8
+| 8
 |-
-!WELCOME TO MISSOURI
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main   St, 2nd Ave)'''
-| align="center"|I-2a	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.63 STATE LINE Signs (I-2, I-2a) (MUTCD Section 2D.48f)|903.7.63]]||	 align="center"|72 x 36         (120 x 60)||	 align="center"|72 x 36      (120 x 60)	|| align="center"|72 x 36             (120 x 60)||	 align="center"|-
 |-
-!STREAM NAME
+| style="text-align:left;" | Leading   Upper-Case Letter or Numerals
-| align="center"|I-3	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.64 Stream Name Signs (I-3) (MUTCD Section 2D.48g)|903.7.64]]||	 align="center"|var x 18||	 align="center"|var x 24||	 align="center"|var x 24	|| align="center"|-
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10.67
+| 13.33
 |-
-!AMTRAK STATION	EXIT SIGN
+| style="text-align:left;" | Following   Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**
-| align="center"|E14-2	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.65 Transportation Signs (I-5, I-7, E14-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.48h)|903.7.65]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|180 x 48	|| align="center"|180 x 48	|| align="center"|-
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10
 |-
-!AMTRAK STATION	TRAILBLAZER
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP   RIGHT)'''
-| align="center"|I-7	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.65 Transportation Signs (I-5, I-7, E14-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.48h)|903.7.65]]||	 align="center"|36 x 48||	 align="center"|36 x 48	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!ADOPT-A-HIGHWAY
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance   Numerals
-| align="center"|I9-1, I9-1a, I9-1b, I9-1c	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.66 Roadside Improvement Signs (I9-1, I9-2, I9-3) (MUTCD Section 2D.48i)|903.7.66]] ||	 align="center"|48 x 36	|| align="center"|48 x 36||	 align="center"|48 x 36	|| align="center"|-
+| 6
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10
 |-
-!GROWING TOGETHER
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance   Fraction Numerals
-| align="center"|I9-2	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.66 Roadside Improvement Signs (I9-1, I9-2, I9-3) (MUTCD Section 2D.48i)|903.7.66]]||	 align="center"|48 x 48||	 align="center"|48 x 48||	 align="center"|96 x 72	|| align="center"|-
+| 4.5
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 8
 |-
-!WILDFLOWER AREA
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance Words   - Upper-Case
-| align="center"|I9-3	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.66 Roadside Improvement Signs (I9-1, I9-2, I9-3) (MUTCD Section 2D.48i)|903.7.66]]||	 align="center"|36 x 18	|| align="center"|36 x 18||	 align="center"|36 x 18	|| align="center"|-
+| 4.5
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 8
 |-
-!HISTORIC DOWNTOWN EXIT SIGN
+| style="text-align:left;" | Action Message   Words - Upper-Case
-| align="center"|E11-1b	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.67 HISTORIC DOWNTOWN Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48j)|903.7.67]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|120 x 84||	 align="center"|120 x 84	|| align="center"|-
+| 6
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10
 |-
-!HISTORIC DOWNTOWN TRAILBLAZER AHEAD (RIGHT, LEFT)
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#eaecf0" |'''B. Destination and Other Guide Signs'''
-| align="center"|D7-10aA (R,L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.67 HISTORIC DOWNTOWN Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48j)|903.7.67]]||	 align="center"|84 x 36||	 align="center"|84 x 36||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!HISTORIC DOWNTOWN TRAILBLAZER AHEAD (RIGHT, LEFT) FOR LIMITED SPACE
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main   St, 2nd Ave)'''
-| align="center"|D7-10A (R,L)	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.67 HISTORIC DOWNTOWN Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48j)|903.7.67]]||	 align="center"|36 x 36||	 align="center"|36 x 36||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!FERRY CROSSING
+| style="text-align:left;" | Leading   Upper-Case Letter or Numerals
-| align="center"|special	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.68 Ferry Crossing Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.48k)|903.7.68]]|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| 4
+| 6
+| 8
+| 10.67
 |-
-!MISSOURI PORT AUTHORITIES
+| style="text-align:left;" | Following   Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**
-| align="center"|special	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.69 Missouri Regional Port Authorities (MUTCD Section 2D.48L)|903.7.69]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| 3
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 8
+|-
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP RIGHT)'''
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance   Numerals
+| 5
+| 6
+| 8
+| 8
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance   Fraction Numerals
+| 4
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 6
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Distance Words   - Upper-Case
+| 4
+| 4.5
+| 6
+| 6
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" | Action Message   Words - Upper-Case
+| 5
+| 6
+| 8
+| 8
 |}
+</center>
+&nbsp;
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+<center>
-|+ '''''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''' (Sheet 5 of 6)''
+{{SpanID|tab903.5.2}}
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign Number !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Article !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Conventional !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Expressway (At Grade) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Freeway (Grade Separated) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Other
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;max-width: 650px"
+|+ '''Table 903.4.5.2''' Typical Overhead Letter and Number Sizes for Conventional Overhead Road Guide Signs for complex intersections (Multi-Lane Roundabouts, DDIs, Ramp Terminals, etc.)
+|-
+! Type of Sign
+!
+|-
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#eaecf0"|'''A. Intersection or   Interchange Advance Guide Signs and Entrance Direction Guide Signs'''
 |-
-!MEMORIAL HIGHWAY NAME
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Interstate, or Off-Interstate Business Route Signs'''
-| align="center"|M11-1	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.70 Signing of Named Highways (M11-1, M11-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.49)|903.7.70]]||	 align="center"|72 x 36||	 align="center"|72 x 36||	 align="center"|72 x 36	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!MEMORIAL HIGHWAY BRIDGE
+| style="text-align:left;" |Numerals**
-| align="center"|M11-2	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.70 Signing of Named Highways (M11-1, M11-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.49)|903.7.70]]||	 align="center"|72 x 36||	 align="center"|72 x 36||	 align="center"|72 x 36	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |9
 |-
-!VETERANS
+| style="text-align:left;" |1- or 2-Digit   Shields
-| align="center"|special	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.71 Veterans Signing (MUTCD Section 2D.49a)|903.7.71]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-|| align="center"|	-
+| style="text-align:left;" |24 X 24
 |-
-!COLLEGE SIGNING
+| style="text-align:left;" |3-Digit   shields
-| align="center"|-|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.72 College Signing Policy|903.7.72]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|Refer to 903.7.72	|| align="center"|Refer to 903.7.72	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |30 X 24
 |-
-!CORRECTIONAL CENTER
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''U.S. or State Route   Signs'''
-| align="center"|	special	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.73 Correctional Center Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.49c)|903.7.73]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!TRAIL/HISTORIC ROUTE
+| style="text-align:left;" |Numerals
-| align="center"|	special	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]] ||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |12
 |-
-!GREAT RIVER ROAD
+| style="text-align:left;" |1- or 2-Digit   Shields
-| align="center"|M10-6	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |24 X 24
 |-
-!SANTA FE TRAIL
+| style="text-align:left;" |3-Digit   Shields
-| align="center"|M10-4	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |30 X 24
 |-
-!OREGON TRAIL
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''County Route Signs'''
-| align="center"|M10-3	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!AVENUE OF THE SAINTS
+| style="text-align:left;" |Numerals
-| align="center"|	M10-9	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 13	|| align="center"|24 x 13||	 align="center"|24 x 13||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8
 |-
-!MISSISSIPPI RIVER TRAIL (MRT)
+| style="text-align:left;" |1- 2-, or   3-Digit Shields
-| align="center"|	M10-7	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|18 x 24	|| align="center"|18 x 24	|| align="center"|18 x 24||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |24 X 24
 |-
-!TRAIL OF TEARS
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''U.S. or State Text identification (Examples: U S 56, Md 2)'''
-| align="center"|M10-5	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|-
 |-
-!HISTORIC U.S. 66 MARKERS BROWN (BLUE SIGN)
+| style="text-align:left;" |Numerals &   Letters
-| align="center"|	M10-8 (M10-8a)	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 30	|| align="center"|24 x 30	|| align="center"|24 x 30	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |12
 |-
-!LEWIS AND CLARK TRAIL
+| colspan="5" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" | '''Cardinal   Directions (NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, WEST)'''
-| align="center"|M10-2	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 30||	 align="center"|24 x 30	|| align="center"|24 x 30	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!AUTO TOUR ROUTE
+| style="text-align:left;" |First Letter -   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|M10-1	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series) (MUTCD Section 2D.50)|903.7.74]]||	 align="center"|24 x 18	|| align="center"|24 x 18||	 align="center"|24 x 18||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |10
 |-
-!LEWIS AND CLARK HISTORIC SITES
+| style="text-align:left;" |Rest of Word -   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|M10-2a	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.75 Lewis and Clark Historic Site Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.50a)|903.7.75]]||	 align="center"|24 x 30||	 align="center"|24 x 30||	 align="center"|24 x 30||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8
 |-
-!HISTORICAL SITE
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Auxiliary and Alternative Route Legends (Examples: JCT, TO,   ALT, BUSINESS)'''
-| align="center"|special	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.76 Historical Site Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.50b)|903.7.76]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
 |-
-!BLUE STAR MARKERS
+| style="text-align:left;" |Words-   Upper-Case
-| align="center"|provided by others	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.77 Blue Star Markers (MUTCD Section 2D.50c)|903.7.77]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8
 |-
-!STATE HISTORICAL SOCIETY MARKERS
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main   St, 2nd Ave)'''
-| align="center"|	provided by others	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.78 State Historical Society Markers (MUTCD Section 2D.50d)|903.7.78]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!LOCAL REFERENCE MARKER
+| style="text-align:left;" |Leading   Upper-Case Letter or Numerals
-| align="center"|	provided by others	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]] ||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |10.67 (des.)
 |-
-!CITY HALL AND COURTHOUSE
+| style="text-align:left;" |Following   Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**
-| align="center"| 	provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|24 x 24	|| align="center"|24 x 24||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|24 x 24     (ramp)
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
 |-
-!BUS STOPS
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP   RIGHT)'''
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+|-
-|}
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance   Numerals
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
+|-
-{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance   Fraction Numerals
-|+ '''''Table 903.7 Guide Sign Sizes''' (Sheet 6 of 6)''
+| style="text-align:left;" |6 (des.)
-! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Sign Number !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Article !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Conventional !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Expressway (At Grade) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Freeway (Grade Separated) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Other
+|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance Words   - Upper-Case
+| style="text-align:left;" |6 (des.)
 |-
-!MASS TRANSIT
+| style="text-align:left;" |Action Message   Words - Upper-Case
-|	 align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
 |-
-!COMMUNITY AWARENESS
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#eaecf0" |'''B. Destination and Other Guide Signs
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!MISSOURI COMMUNITY BETTERMENT
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Names of Destinations or Roads (Examples: Springfield, Main   St, 2nd Ave)'''
-| align="center"|	I-12	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|12 x 12	|| align="center"|12 x 12	|| align="center"|12 x 12	|| align="center"|-
 |-
-!TREE CITY USA
+| style="text-align:left;" |Leading   Upper-Case Letter or Numerals
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |10.67 (des.)
 |-
-!DISASTER RESISTANT COMMUNITY
+| style="text-align:left;" |Following   Lower-Case Letters or Ordinals**
-| align="center"|	provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|12 x 12||	 align="center"|12 x 12||	 align="center"|12 x 12||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
 |-
-!STORM READY
+| colspan="2" style="text-align:left;background-color:#f0f5ff" |'''Distance or Action Messages (Examples: 2 MILES, 1/2 MILE, KEEP   RIGHT)'''
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
 |-
-!MADD
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance   Numerals
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
 |-
-!NEIGHBORHOOD WATCH
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance   Fraction Numerals
-| align="center"|	provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |6 (des.)
 |-
-!DARE SIGNING
+| style="text-align:left;" |Distance Words   - Upper-Case
-| align="center"|	provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.53)|903.7.81]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |6 (des.)
 |-
-!THIS IS A DARE FREE SCHOOL ZONE
+| style="text-align:left;" |Action Message   Words - Upper-Case
-| align="center"|	provided by others	|| align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.82 School Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.54)|903.7.82]] ||	 align="center"|12 x 18||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-
+| style="text-align:left;" |8 (des.)
 |-
-!DRUG FREE SCHOOL ZONE
+| colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff; text-align: left;" | <div style="padding-left: 2.3em"><div style="text-indent: -2em"><p><span style="font-family:monospace">&nbsp;&nbsp;*</span> Except as provided otherwise in the EPG</p><p><span style="font-family:monospace">&nbsp;**</span> Minimum size listed for 3-digit shields. Larger numeral sizes used for 1-digit, some 2 digit, and some 3-digit shields. See the FHWA Standard Highways Signs publication for more information on Route Sign numeral heights and Standard Alphabet series.</p><p><span style="font-family:monospace">***</span> Lower-case letter height (loop height) is determined by the initial upper-case letter height (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.8|EPG 903.1.8]])</p></div></div>
-| align="center"|provided by others	||align="center"|[[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.82 School Awareness Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.54)|903.7.82]]||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-||	 align="center"|-	|| align="center"|-
+Notes:<br><ol><li>Sizes are shown in inches and where applicable as width x height.</li><li>For Street Name (D3-1 Series) signs, see [[#tab903.4.40|Table 903.4.40]].</li><li>The 18-inch route shield size is not for independent use, such as in Directional or Confirmation Assemblies.</li></ol>
 |}
-'''Guidance.'''  Reduced spacing between the letters or words on a line of legend should not be used as a means of reducing the overall size of a guide sign, except where determined necessary by engineering judgment to meet unusual lateral space constraints.  In such cases, the legibility distance of the sign legend (refer to [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.21 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.14)|EPG 903.1.21 Word Messages]]) should be the primary consideration in determining whether to reduce the spacing between the letters or the words or between the words and the sign border, or to reduce the letter height.
+</center>
-When a reduction in the prescribed size is necessary, the design used should be as similar as possible to the design for the standard size.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.6}}903.4.6  Amount of Legend (MUTCD Section 2D.06)==
-==='''903.7.4 Lettering Style''' (MUTCD Section 2D.05) ===
+'''Support. '''The longer the legend on a guide sign, the longer it will take road users to recognize and comprehend it, regardless of letter size.
-'''Standard.'''  The design of upper-case letters, lower-case letters, capital letters, numerals, route shields and spacing shall be as provided in Sign Detail and the Standard Highway Signs.  Also refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11  Relation to Other Publications|EPG 903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications]].
+'''Guidance. '''Except where otherwise provided in the EPG, guide signs should be limited to no more than three lines of destinations, which include place names, route numbers, street names, and cardinal directions. Where two or more signs are included in the same overhead display, the amount of legend should be further minimized. Where appropriate, a distance message or action information, such as an exit number, NEXT RIGHT, or directional arrows, should be provided on guide signs in addition to the destinations.
-The lettering for names of places, streets, and highways on conventional road guide signs shall be a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters or all capital letters (refer to [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.21 Word Messages (MUTCD Section 2A.14)|EPG 903.1.21 Word Messages]]).  All other word legends on conventional road guide signs shall be in capital letters.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.7}}903.4.7  Abbreviations (MUTCD Section 2D.07)==
-==='''903.7.5 Size of Lettering''' (MUTCD Section 2D.06)===
+'''Support. '''The use of commonly recognized abbreviations for certain words can be useful in reducing the reading time and improve quicker comprehension of a sign message. Descriptors and directional or quadrant orientations for street names and destinations, such as Boulevard (Blvd), North (N), and Southwest (SW), are some examples of commonly recognized abbreviations. Examples of the use of some guide sign abbreviations are shown in [[#fig903.4.7|Figure 903.4.7]].
-'''Support.'''  Sign legibility is a direct function of letter size and spacing.  Legibility distance has to be sufficient to give travelers enough time to read and comprehend the sign.  Under optimum conditions, a guide sign message can be read and understood in a brief glance.  The legibility distance includes a reasonable safety factor for inattention, blocking of view by other vehicles, unfavorable weather, inferior eyesight or other causes for delayed or slow reading.  Where conditions permit, repetition of guide information on successive signs gives the traveler more than one opportunity to obtain the information needed.
+'''Standard. '''The words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, and WEST shall not be abbreviated when used to indicate cardinal directions of numbered or named highways on guide signs.
-'''Standard.'''  Design layouts for conventional road guide signs showing interline spacing, edge spacing and other specification details shall be as shown in Sign Detail and the Standard Highway Signs.  Also refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11  Relation to Other Publications|EPG 903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications]].
+'''Guidance. '''Abbreviations should be kept to a minimum; however, they are useful when complete destination messages produce excessively long signs. If used, abbreviations should be unmistakably recognized by road users (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.4.8 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]). Longer commonly used words that are not part of a proper name and are readily recognizable, such as street name descriptors (such as Street, Boulevard, or Avenue), should be abbreviated as provided in [[#tab903.4.7.1|Table 903.4.7.1]] to expedite recognition of the sign legend by reducing the amount and complexity of the legend. Shorter street name descriptors, such as those shown in [[#tab903.4.7.2|Table 903.4.7.2]], should not be abbreviated.
-The principal legend on guide signs shall be in letters and numerals at least 6 in. tall.
+Periods, apostrophes, question marks, ampersands, or other punctuation or characters that are not letters, numerals, or hyphens should not be used in abbreviations, unless necessary to avoid confusion.
-'''Guidance.'''  Lettering sizes should be consistent on any particular class of highway.
+The solidus is intended to be used for fractions only and should not be used to separate words on the same line of legend. Instead, a hyphen should be used for this purpose, such as “TRUCKS – BUSES.”
-The minimum lettering sizes specified herein should be exceeded where conditions indicate a need for greater legibility.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.7}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.7 Examples of Uses of Abbreviations on Guide Signs.png|thumb|center|alt=The figure includes three labeled sections demonstrating how abbreviations are used on guide signs. In the section titled “A. Cardinal Directions and Orientations,” two signs illustrate how cardinal directions and street name descriptors are treated. One sign reads “South Ave EAST,” showing that “South” is part of the street name and is not abbreviated, “EAST” is the direction of travel and is not abbreviated, and “Avenue” may be abbreviated. Another sign reads “S Randolphville Rd EAST,” showing that “South” as a pre-direction may be abbreviated, “EAST” is not abbreviated, and “Road” may be abbreviated when a standard form exists. In the section titled “B. Quadrant and Cardinal Directions,” the figure shows how quadrant orientations differ from full street names. A sign reading “SE Boulevard” demonstrates that “Southeast,” when used as a quadrant orientation, should be abbreviated, while “Boulevard” as the street name is not abbreviated. Another sign, “Southeast Blvd,” shows that when “Southeast” is the street name itself, it is not abbreviated, and “Boulevard” may be abbreviated. In the section titled “C. Other Descriptors Within Proper Names,” the figure shows examples of geographical feature descriptors. A sign reading “Avalanche Peak” indicates that “Peak,” as part of a proper name, is not abbreviated when no recognized abbreviation exists. Two additional signs, “Mount Olive” and “Mt Olive,” show that “Mount” may be abbreviated when a standard abbreviation exists.|700px|'''Figure 903.4.7''' Examples of Uses of Abbreviations on Guide Signs]]
-==='''903.7.6 Amount of Legend''' (MUTCD Section 2D.07)===
+<div style="display:flex;flex-direction: row;flex-wrap: wrap; justify-content:center;width: 100%; gap: 20px;;">
+<center>
-'''Support.'''  The lengthier the legend is on a guide sign, the longer it will take travelers to comprehend it, regardless of letter size.
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.7.1}}
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; min-width: 300px;"
-'''Guidance.'''  Guide signs should be limited to three lines of principal legend.  Where two or more signs are included in the same overhead display, the amount of legend should be minimized.  The principal legend should include only place names, route numbers and street names.
+|+ '''Table 903.4.7.1''' Acceptable Abbreviations for Street Name Descriptors
+|-
-'''Option.'''  Symbols, action information, cardinal directions and exit numbers may be used in addition to the principal legend where sign space is available.
+! style="width: 50%"|Descriptor !! style="width: 50%"|Standard Abbreviation
+|-
-==='''903.7.7 Arrows''' (MUTCD Section 2D.08)===
+| Avenue || Ave
+|-
-'''Support.'''  Arrows are used for lane assignment and to indicate the direction toward designated routes or destinations.  Figure 903.7.7 shows the up-arrow and the down-arrow designs that have been approved for use on guide signs.  Detailed drawings of these arrows are shown in Sign Detail and the Standard Highway Signs.  Also refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11  Relation to Other Publications|EPG 903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications]].
+| Boulevard || Blvd
+|-
-'''Standard.'''  On overhead signs where it is desirable to indicate a lane to be followed, a down arrow shall point downward toward the center of that lane.  Down arrows shall be used only on overhead guide signs that restrict the use of specific lanes to traffic bound for the destination(s) and/or route(s) indicated by these arrows.  Down arrows shall not be used unless an arrow can be pointed to each lane that can be used to reach the destination shown on the sign.
+| Bypass || Byp
+|-
-Where a roadway is leaving the through lanes, an up arrow shall point upward at an angle representative of the alignment of the exit roadway.
+| Causeway || Cswy
+|-
-'''Guidance.'''  Arrows used on guide signs to indicate the directions toward designated routes or destinations should be pointed at the appropriate angle to clearly convey the direction to be taken.  A horizontally oriented up-arrow design should be used at right-angle intersections.
+| Circle || Cir
+|-
-On a ground-mounted guide sign, a directional arrow for a straight-through movement should point upward.  For a turn, the arrow on a guide sign should point upward and at an angle related to the sharpness of the turn.
+| Corner || Cor
+|-
-'''Option.'''  Arrows may be placed below the principal sign legend or on the appropriate side of the legend.
+| Court || Ct
+|-
-'''Guidance.'''  At an exit, an arrow should be placed at the side of the sign that will reinforce the movement of exiting traffic.  The up-arrow design should be used.
+| Crescent || Cres
+|-
-Diagrammatic signing used on conventional roads should follow the principles set forth in Interchange Classification.
+| Drive || Dr
+|-
-Figure 903.7.7 (2D-1) Arrows for Use on Guide Signs
+| East || E*
+|-
-==='''903.7.8 Numbered Highway Systems''' (MUTCD Section 2D.09)===
+| Expressway || Expwy
+|-
-'''Support.'''  The purpose of numbering and signing highway systems should identify routes and facilitate travel.
+| Extension || Ext
+|-
-The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) number the interstate and U.S. highway systems upon recommendations of the state highway organizations because the respective states own these systems.  State and county road systems are numbered by the appropriate authorities.
+| Freeway || Fwy
+|-
-The basic policy for numbering the U.S. and interstate highway systems is contained in the following Purpose and Policy statements published by AASHTO (see [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications (MUTCD Section 1A.11)|EPG 903.19.11.2 for AASHTO’s address]]):
+| Highway || Hwy
+|-
-A.	“Establishment and Development of United States Numbered Highways”; and
+| Lane || La, Ln
+|-
-B.	“Establishment of a Marking System of the Routes Comprising the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways.”
+| Landing || Lndg
+|-
-'''Guidance.'''  The principles of these policies should be followed in establishing the above highway systems and any other system, with effective coordination between adjacent jurisdictions.  Care should be taken to avoid the use of numbers or other designations that have been assigned to interstate, U.S., or state routes in the same geographic area.   Overlapping numbered routes should be kept to a minimum.
+| North || N*
+|-
-'''Standard.'''  Route systems shall be given preference in this order:  interstate, United States, state and county.  The preference shall be given by installing the highest-priority legend on the top or the left of the sign panel.
+| Northeast || NE*
+|-
-==='''903.7.9 Route Signs and Auxiliary Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.10)===
+| Northwest || NW*
+|-
-'''Standard.'''  All numbered highway routes shall be identified by route signs and auxiliary signs.  The signs for each system of numbered highways, which are distinctive in shape and color, shall be used only on that system and the approaches thereto.
+| Parkway || Pkwy
+|-
-Route signs and any auxiliary signs that accompany them shall be retroreflective.
+| Place || Pl
+|-
-'''Option.'''  Route signs and auxiliary signs may be proportionally enlarged where greater legibility is needed.
+| Plaza || Plz
+|-
-'''Support.'''  Route signs are typically mounted in assemblies with auxiliary signs.
+| Road || Rd
+|-
-==='''903.7.10 Design of Route Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.11)===
+| Route || Rte
+|-
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+| South || S*
+|-
+| Southeast || SE*
+|-
+| Southwest || SW*
+|-
+| Square || Sq
+|-
+| Street || St
+|-
+| Terrace || Ter
+|-
+| Thruway || Thwy
+|-
+| Trafficway || Trfway
+|-
+| Trail || Tr
+|-
+| Turnpike || Tpk
+|-
+| West || W*
 |-
-|[[image:M1-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M1-1'''</center>|85px]]
+| colspan="2" style="background-color: #ffffff; max-width: 100px;text-align: left; line-height: 1.3em;" | '''* For pre-directional or post-directional designations or cardinal orientations, such as E Main St or 3rd St SW'''
-||[[image:M1-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M1-2'''</center>|85px]]
-||[[image:M1-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M1-4'''</center>|85px]]||[[image:M1-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M1-5'''</center>|85px]]
-||[[image:M1-5a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M1-5a'''</center>|85px]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  The in Sign Detail and the Standard Highway Signs (also refer to [[903.19 Highway Signing General Information#903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications (MUTCD Section 1A.11)|EPG 903.19.11 Relation to Other Publications]]) shall be used for designing route signs.  The authority having jurisdiction shall establish other route sign designs.
+<center>
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.7.2}}
-Interstate Route signs (M1-1) shall consist of a cutout shield, with the route number in white letters on a blue background, the word INTERSTATE in white capital letters on a red background and a white border.  This sign shall be used on all interstate routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; min-width: 300px;"
+|+ '''Table 903.4.7.2''' Street Name Descriptors Not Acceptable for Abbreviation
-A 24 in. x 24 in. minimum sign size shall be used for interstate route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 in. x 24 in. minimum sign size shall be used for interstate route numbers having three digits.
+|-
+! Descriptor
-Off-Interstate Business Route (M1-2) signs shall consist of a cutout shield carrying the number of the connecting Interstate route and the words BUSINESS and LOOP in capital letters.  The legend and border shall be white on a green background and the shield shall be the same shape and dimensions as the Interstate Route sign.  In no instance shall the word INTERSTATE appear on the Off-Interstate Business Route sign.
+|-
+| Alley
-'''Option.'''  The Off-Interstate Business Route sign may be used on a major highway that is not a part of the Interstate system, but one that serves the business area of a city from an interchange on the system and rejoins the major highway.  When used on a green guide sign, a white square or rectangle may be placed behind the shield to improve contrast.
+|-
+| Belt
-'''Standard.'''  U.S. Route (M1-4) signs shall consist of black numerals on a white shield surrounded by a black background without a border.  This sign shall be used on all U.S. routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
+|-
+| Beltway
-State Numbered Route (M1-5) signs shall consist of black numerals on a white representation of the State of Missouri surrounded by a black background without a border. (A design detail is provided in Sign Detail) This sign shall be used on all state routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
+|-
+| Close
-State Lettered Route (M1-5a) signs shall be rectangular with the route letter in the center. The legend and border shall be black on a white background.
+|-
+| Cove
-'''Guidance.'''  The letters G, I, L, Q, S and X should not be used on State Lettered Route signs.
+|-
+| Edge
-==='''903.7.11 Design of Route Sign Auxiliaries''' (MUTCD Section 2D.12)===
+|-
+| Gate
-[[image:M2-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M2-1'''</center>|95px]]
+|-
+| Green
+|-
+| Grove
+|-
-'''Standard.'''  All route sign auxiliaries shall match the color combination of the route sign that they supplement.
+| Hill
+|-
-'''Option.'''  A route sign and any auxiliary signs used with it may be combined on a single panel.
+| Loop
+|-
-==='''903.7.12 Junction Auxiliary Sign (M2-1)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.13)===
+| Mews
+|-
-'''Standard.'''  The Junction (M2-1) auxiliary sign shall carry the abbreviated legend JCT and shall be mounted at the top of an assembly (see [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.24 TEMPORARY DETOUR and Auxiliary Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.24)|EPG 903.7.24]]) either directly above the route sign or above a sign for an alternative route (see EPG 903.7.14) that is part of the route designation.  The minimum size of the Junction auxiliary sign shall be 21 in. x 15 in. for compatibility with auxiliary signs carrying arrow symbols.
+| Oval
+|-
-==='''903.7.13 Combination Junction Sign (M2-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.14)===
+| Pass
+|-
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+| Passage
+|-
-==='''903.7.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.15)===
+| Path
+|-
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+| Ridge
+|-
+| Row
+|-
+| Run
+|-
+| Trace
+|-
+| Turn
+|-
+| View
+|-
+| Vista
 |-
-|[[image:M3-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M3-1'''</center>|90px]]
+| Walk
-||[[image:M3-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M3-2'''</center>|90px]]
-||[[image:M3-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M3-3'''</center>|90px]]||[[image:M3-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M3-4'''</center>|90px]]
 |}
+</center>
+</div>
-'''Guidance.'''  Cardinal Direction auxiliary signs carrying the legend NORTH, EAST, SOUTH or WEST should be used to indicate the general direction of the entire route.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.8}}903.4.8  Arrows (MUTCD Section 2D.08)==
-'''Standard.'''  To improve the readability, the first letter of the cardinal direction words shall be ten percent larger, rounded up to the nearest whole number size.
-If used, the Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign or an auxiliary sign for an alternative route.  Cardinal Directions shall not be used with a business route or lettered route markers.
+'''Support. '''Arrows are used for lane assignment and to indicate the direction toward designated routes or destinations. [[#fig903.4.8|Figure 903.4.8]] shows the various standard arrow designs that have been approved for use on guide signs. Detailed drawings for these arrows will be provided by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
-'''Support.'''  Odd-numbered routes run north south; even-numbered routes east west.
+'''Standard. '''Except for Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs (see [[#903.4.33|EPG 903.4.33]]), on overhead signs where it is desirable to indicate a lane to be followed, a down arrow shall be positioned over the approximate center of the lane and shall point vertically downward toward the approximate center of that lane. Down arrows shall be used only on overhead guide signs that restrict the use of specific lanes to traffic bound for the destination(s) and/or route(s) indicated by these arrows. Down arrows shall not be used unless an arrow can be located over and pointed to the approximate center of each lane that can be used to reach the destination displayed on the sign.
-==='''903.7.15 Auxiliary Signs for Alternative Routes (M4 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.16)===
+If down arrows are used, having more than one down arrow pointing to the same lane on a single overhead sign (or on multiple signs on the same overhead sign structure) shall not be permitted.
-'''Option.'''  Auxiliary signs, carrying legends such as ALTERNATE, SPUR, or BUSINESS may be used to indicate an alternate route of the same number between two points on that route.
+Where a roadway is leaving the through lanes, a directional arrow shall point upward at an angle that approximates the alignment of the exit roadway in the vicinity of the point of departure.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the auxiliary signs for alternative routes shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
+The Type E directional arrow for circular intersections shall not be used on any sign that is not associated with a circular intersection.
-==='''903.7.16 ALTERNATE Auxiliary Signs (M4-1)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.17)===
+'''Guidance. '''The Type A directional arrow should be used on guide signs on freeways, expressways, and conventional roads to indicate the direction to a specific destination or group of destinations, except as otherwise provided in this Article and in [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.17|EPG 903.5.17]].
-[[image:M4-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-1'''</center>|95px]]
+When a directional arrow in a vertical, upward-pointing orientation is placed to the side of a group of destinations to indicate a through movement, the Type A directional arrow should be used. When a directional arrow in a vertical, upward-pointing orientation is placed to the side of a single destination or under a destination or group of destinations, the Type B directional arrow should be used.
-'''Support.'''  An alternate route starts at a point where it branches from the main numbered route, may pass through certain cities and towns and then connect back with the regular route some miles distant.
+The Type B directional arrow should be used on guide signs on conventional roads when placed at any angle to the side of a single destination or when placed in a horizontal orientation to the side of a group of destinations.
-'''Option.'''  The ALTERNATE (M4-1) auxiliary sign may be used to indicate an officially designated alternate routing of a numbered route between two points on that route.
+The Type C advance turn directional arrow should be used on conventional road guide signs placed in advance of an intersection where a turn must be made to reach a posted destination or group of destinations.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the ALTERNATE auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
+The Type D directional arrow should be used primarily for sign applications other than guide signs, except as provided in the fourth Option paragraph below.
-'''Guidance.'''  The shorter (time or distance) or better-constructed route should retain the regular route number, and the longer or worse-constructed route should be designated the alternate route.
+If the Type E directional arrow is used, the principles set forth in [[#903.4.22|EPG 903.4.22]] through [[#903.4.25|903.4.25]] should be followed.
-==='''903.7.17 SPUR Auxiliary Sign (M4-1b)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.17a)===
+'''Option. '''The Type A-Extended directional arrow may be used on guide signs where additional emphasis regarding the direction is needed relative to the amount of legend on the sign.
-[[image:M4-1b.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-1b'''</center>|95px]]
+The Type C directional arrow may be used to the side of the legend of an overhead guide sign to accentuate a sharp turn exit maneuver from a mainline roadway (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.25|EPG 903.5.25]] for additional information regarding Exit Direction signs for low advisory ramp speeds).
-'''Support.'''  A spur is a highway that diverges from its primary parent highway to serve a specific area or connect to another highway
+On conventional roads on the approach to an intersection where the Combination Lane-Use/Destination overhead guide sign (see [[#903.4.24|EPG 903.4.24]]) is not used, the Type C advance turn directional arrow may be used beneath the legend of an overhead guide sign to indicate the fact that a turn must be made from a mandatory movement lane over which the sign is placed to reach the destination or destinations displayed on the sign.
-'''Option.'''  The SPUR (M4-1b) auxiliary sign may be used to indicate a designated spur routing of a route.
+The Type D directional arrow may be used on post-mounted guide signs on conventional roads with lower operating speeds if the height of the text on the sign is 8 inches or less. Type D arrows may be used on a Street Name (D3-1 only) sign displaying two street names to indicate the different direction of travel for each street.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the SPUR auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
+The Type E directional arrow may be used on guide signs on approaches to circular intersections to represent the intended driver paths to destinations involving left-turn movements around the circulatory island.
-==='''903.7.18 BY-PASS Auxiliary Sign (M4-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.18)===
+The directional and down arrows shown in [[#fig903.4.8|Figure 903.4.8]] may be used on signs other than guide signs for the purposes of providing directional guidance and lane assignment.
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+'''Guidance. '''Arrows used on guide signs to indicate the directions toward designated routes or destinations should be pointed at the appropriate angle to clearly convey the direction to be taken. A horizontally-oriented directional arrow design should be used at right-angle intersections.
-==='''903.7.19 BUSINESS Auxiliary Sign (M4-3)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.19)===
+On a post-mounted guide sign, a directional arrow for a straight-through movement should point upward. For a turn, the arrow on a guide sign should point horizontally or at an upward angle that approximates the sharpness of the turn.
-[[image:M4-3.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-3'''</center>|95px]]
+At an exit, an arrow should be placed at the side of the sign that will reinforce the movement of exiting traffic. The directional arrow design should be used.
-'''Option.'''  The BUSINESS (M4-3) auxiliary sign may be used to designate an alternate route that branches from a numbered route, passes through the business portion of a city and rejoins the numbered route beyond that area.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Type C advance turn directional arrow shall display a right or left arrow, the shaft of which is bent at a 90-degree or oblique angle.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the BUSINESS auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
+'''Option. '''Arrows may be placed below the principal sign legend or on the appropriate side of the legend that is consistent with the direction of the movement.
-Cardinal Directions shall not be used with a business route.
+On a post-mounted sign at an exit where placement of the arrow to the side of the legend farthest from the roadway would create an unusually wide sign that limits the road user's view of the arrow, the directional arrow may be placed at the bottom portion of the sign, centered under the legend.
-==='''903.7.20 Truck Auxiliary Sign (M4-4)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.20)===
+'''Guidance. '''The width across the arrowhead for the Types A, B, and C directional arrows should be between 1.5 and 1.75 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign. The width across the arrowhead for the Type D directional arrow should be at least equal to the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign. For down arrows used on overhead signs, the width across the arrowhead should be approximately 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+'''Support.''' [[#903.4.33|EPG 903.4.33]] contains the provisions for arrows used in Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs on approaches to conventional road intersections.
-==='''903.7.21 TO Auxiliary Sign (M4-5)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.21)===
+The FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) and [https://www.modot.org/media/16919 Standard Plan 903.01] contains design details and standardized sizes of the various arrows based on ranges of letter heights of principal legends.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.8}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.8 Arrows for Use on Guide Signs.png|thumb|center|alt="The figure shows six directional arrows in the top row labeled Type A, Type A Extended, Type B, Type C, Type D, and Type E. Type A is an upward pointing arrow with a tapered vertical shaft. Type A Extended is similar but with a longer tapered vertical shaft. Type B is an upward pointing arrow with a shorter tapered vertical shaft. Type C has a tapered shaft that rises vertically and then turns to the right to form a right pointing arrow. Type D is an upward pointing arrow with a straight vertical shaft that does not taper, unlike the shafts in the other upward and right pointing arrow types. Type E is a curved arrow bending toward the left.
+Below the top row, a single large downward pointing arrow is shown and labeled Down arrow. A note states that the Standard Plans for Highway Construction contain the detailed design specifications for these arrow types."|800px|'''Figure 903.4.8''' Arrows for Use on Guide Signs]]
-[[image:M4-5.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-5'''</center>|95px]]
+=={{SpanID|903.4.9}}903.4.9  Numbered Highway Systems (MUTCD Section 2D.09)==
+'''Support. '''The purpose of numbering and signing highway systems is to identify routes and facilitate travel.
-'''Option.'''  The TO (M4-5) auxiliary sign may be used to provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity (see EPG 903.7.29).
+The Interstate and United States (U.S.) highway systems are numbered by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) upon recommendations of the State highway organizations because the respective States own these systems. State and county road systems are numbered by the appropriate authorities.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the TO auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign or an auxiliary sign for an alternative route.
+The basic policy for numbering the Interstate and U.S. highway systems is contained in the following Purpose and Policy statements published by AASHTO:
-==='''903.7.22 END Auxiliary Sign (M4-6)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.22)===
+::A. “Establishment and Development of United States Numbered Highways,” and
-[[image:M4-6.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-6'''</center>|95px]]
+::B. “Establishment of a Marking System of the Routes Comprising the National System of Interstate and Defense Highways.”
-'''Guidance.'''  The END (M4-6) auxiliary sign should be used where the route being traveled ends, usually at a junction with another route. 	The END auxiliary sign is not to be used to indicate the end of a lettered route.
+'''Guidance. '''The principles of these policies should be followed in establishing the highway systems described in the preceding paragraph and any other systems, with effective coordination between adjacent jurisdictions. Care should be taken to avoid the use of numbers or other designations that have been assigned to Interstate, U.S., or State routes in the same geographic area. Overlapping numbered routes should be kept to a minimum.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the END auxiliary sign shall be mounted either directly above a route sign, above a sign for an alternative route or above a business route marker that is part of the designation of the route being terminated.
+'''Standard. '''Route systems shall be given preference in this order: Interstate, United States, State, and county. The preference shall be given by installing the highest-priority route number on the top or the left of the sign, except as provided in the Option paragraph below.
-==='''903.7.23 TEMPORARY Auxiliary Signs (M4-7)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.23)===
+Interstate route numbering shall be approved by the FHWA.
-[[image:M4-7.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''M4-7'''</center>|95px]]
+'''Option. '''The prioritization of route systems may be modified when a different prioritization would better accommodate the expectancy of the road user and provide more effective direction, such as for separate decision points for routes that are encountered in a particular order.
-'''Option.'''  The TEMPORARY (M4-7) auxiliary sign may be used for an interim period to designate a section of highway that is not planned as a permanent part of a numbered route, but that connects completed portions of that route.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.10}}903.4.10  Route Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.10)==
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the TEMPORARY auxiliary sign shall be mounted either directly above the route sign, above a Cardinal Direction sign, or above a sign for an alternate route that is a part of the route designation.  TEMPORARY auxiliary signs shall be promptly removed when the temporary route is abandoned.
+'''Standard. '''Except as provided in the third Option paragraph of [[#903.4.25|903.4.25]], all numbered highway routes shall be identified by route signs and auxiliary plaques.
-==='''903.7.24 TEMPORARY DETOUR and Auxiliary Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.24)===
+The signs for each system of numbered highways, which are distinctive in shape and color, shall be used only on that system and the approaches thereto.
-'''Support.'''  Traffic Control for Field Operations contains information regarding Temporary Detour and Auxiliary signs.
+'''Option. '''Route signs and auxiliary plaques may be proportionally enlarged where greater conspicuity or legibility is needed.
-==='''903.7.25 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M5-1, M5-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.25)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:M5-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M5-1'''</center>|90px]]
-||[[image:M5-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M5-2'''</center>|90px]]
-|}
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly below the route sign in Advance Route Turn assemblies and display a right or left arrow, the shaft of which is bent at a 90-degree angle (M5-1) or at a 45-degree angle (M5-2).
+'''Support. '''Route signs are typically mounted in assemblies with auxiliary plaques.
-==='''903.7.26 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.26)===
+[[#903.4.49|EPG 903.4.49]] contains information regarding the signing for National Scenic Byways.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+[[#903.4.50|EPG 903.4.50]] contains information regarding the signing for Missouri Scenic Byways, historic trails, and auto tour routes.
-|-
-|[[image:M6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-1'''</center>|90px]]
-||[[image:M6-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-2'''</center>|90px]]
-||[[image:M6-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-3'''</center>|90px]]||[[image:M6-4.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-4'''</center>|90px]]
-|}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.11}}903.4.11  Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)==
+<center>
+{|
 |-
-|[[image:M6-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-5'''</center>|90px]]
+|[[File:M1-1.png|thumb|center|200px|alt=|<center>'''M1-1'''</center>]]
-||[[image:M6-6.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-6'''</center>|90px]]
+|[[File:M1-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M1-2'''</center>]]
-||[[image:M6-7.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M6-7'''</center>|90px]]
+|} </center><center>
-|}
+{|
+| [[File:M1-4.png|thumb|center|215px|alt=|<center>'''M1-4'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M1-5.png|thumb|center|200px|alt=|<center>'''M1-5'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M1-5a.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M1-5a'''</center>]]
+|}</center>
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the Directional Arrow auxiliary sign shall be mounted below the route sign in directional assemblies and display a single- or double-headed arrow pointing in the general direction that the route follows.
+'''Standard. '''The design of standard route signs shall conform to the designs provided in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]). The design of other route signs shall be established by the authority having jurisdiction and shall be in general conformance with the designs provided in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication.
-'''Guidance.'''  The Straight Arrows (M6 Series) may be substituted for the Advance Turn arrows (M5-1 and M5-2) used near the “on” ramps of tight diamond interchanges to reduce the possibility of motorist confusion about which ramp to enter.
+The Interstate Route (M1-1) sign shall be used on all Interstate routes and in connection with Route Sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
-==='''903.7.27 Route Sign Assemblies''' (MUTCD Section 2D.27)===
+Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, a 24 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for Interstate route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for Interstate route numbers having three digits.
-'''Standard.'''  A Route Sign assembly shall consist of a route sign and auxiliary signs that further identify the route and indicate the direction.  Route Sign assemblies shall be installed on all approaches to numbered routes that intersect with other numbered routes.
+The Off-Interstate Business Route (M1-2) sign shall consist of a cutout shield displaying the number of the connecting Interstate route and the words BUSINESS and LOOP in upper-case letters. The legend and border shall be white on a green background, and the shield shall be the same shape and dimensions as the Interstate Route sign. In no instance shall the word INTERSTATE appear on the Off-Interstate Business Route sign.
-Where two or more routes follow the same section of highway, the route signs for interstate, U.S., state and county routes shall be mounted in that order from the left in horizontal arrangements and from the top in vertical arrangements.  Subject to this order of precedence, route signs for lower-numbered routes shall be placed at the left or top.
+'''Option. '''The Off-Interstate Business Route sign may be used on a major highway that is not a part of the Interstate system, but one that serves the business area of a city from an interchange on the system.
-Within groups of assemblies, information for routes intersecting from the left shall be mounted at the left in horizontal arrangements and at the top or center of vertical arrangements.  Similarly, information for routes intersecting from the right shall be at the right or bottom, and for straight-through routes at the center in horizontal arrangements or top in vertical arrangements.
+'''Standard. '''U.S. Route signs shall consist of black numerals on a white shield surrounded by a rectangular black background without a border. This sign shall be used on all U.S. routes and in connection with Route Sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
-Route Sign assemblies shall be mounted according to the [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0903.pdf Sec 903.1] for highway signs, with the lowest sign in the assembly at the height prescribed for single signs.
+A  24 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers having three digits.
-'''Guidance.'''  Assemblies for two or more routes, or for different directions on the same route, should be mounted in groups on a common support.
+State Numbered Route (M1-5) signs shall consist of black numerals on a white representation of the State of Missouri surrounded by a rectangular black background without a border. This sign shall be used on all state numbered routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways.
-'''Option.'''  Route Sign assemblies may be installed on the approaches to numbered routes on unnumbered roads and streets that carry an appreciable amount of traffic destined for the numbered route.
+A 24 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state numbered route numbers with one or two digits, and a 30 in. x 24 in. minimum sign size shall be used for state numbers having three digits.
-If engineering judgment indicates that groups of assemblies that include overlapping routes or multiple turns might be confusing, route signs or auxiliary signs may be omitted or combined, provided that clear directions are given to road users.
+The legend on State Route signs shall conform to the Standard Alphabets contained in the FHWA’s “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911_General_(MUTCD_Part_1) #911.1.5 | EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
-'''Support.'''  Refer to Typical Signing Applications for additional information.
+'''Guidance. '''Where U.S. or State Route signs are used as components of guide signs, only the distinctive shape of the shield itself and the route numerals within should be used. The rectangular background upon which the distinctive shape of the shield is mounted, such as the black area around the outside of the shields on the M1-4 and standard M1-5 signs, should not be included on the guide sign. Where U.S. or State Route signs are used as components of other signs of non-contrasting background colors, the rectangular background should be used so that recognition of the distinctive shape of the shield can be maintained.
-==='''903.7.28 Junction Assembly''' (MUTCD Section 2D.28)===
+'''Standard. '''All references to numbered routes in this EPG 903.4 shall be interpreted to also include lettered routes.
-'''Standard.'''  A Junction assembly shall consist of a Junction auxiliary sign and a route sign.  The route sign shall carry the number of the intersected or joined route.
+State Lettered Route (M1-5a) signs shall be rectangular with the route letter in the center. The legend and border shall be black on a white background.
-The Junction assembly shall be installed in advance of every intersection where a numbered route is intersected or joined by another numbered route.  In urban areas it shall be installed in the block preceding the intersection and in rural areas it shall be installed at least 400 ft. in advance of the intersection.  In rural areas, the minimum distance between the Destination sign and the Route Turn assembly shall be 200 ft. and the minimum distance between the Route Turn assembly and the Junction assembly shall be 200 ft.
+A 24 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state lettered routes with one letter and a 30 in. x 24-inch minimum sign size shall be used for state lettered routes having two letters.
-'''Option.'''  Where two or more routes should be indicated, a single Junction auxiliary sign may be used for the assembly and all route signs grouped in a single mounting.
+'''Guidance. '''The letters G, I, L, Q and S should not be used on State Lettered Route signs. The letter R should be used on supplemental routes connecting state parks or other recreational facilities.
-==='''903.7.29 Advance Route Turn Assembly''' (MUTCD Section 2D.29)===
+'''Support. '''Usually, but not always, double letter routes are farm to market roads that end at county roads or are former alignments of other highways.
-'''Standard.'''  An Advance Route Turn assembly shall consist of a route sign, an Advance Turn Arrow or word message auxiliary sign and a Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign, if needed.  It shall be installed in advance of an intersection where a turn must be made to remain on the indicated route.
+Missouri is the only state to extensively use lettering on its highway system. The 1952 Missouri 10-Year Highway Modernization and Expansion Program (the “Takeover Program”) upgraded 12,000 miles of county roads. The roads became known as supplemental routes. The program provided a state-maintained road within 2 miles of 95% of all rural units, such as farm homes, churches, schools, stores, etc. Missouri opted to use letters to label these routes to avoid confusion with the existing numbered routes.
-'''Option.'''  The Advance Route Turn assembly may be used to supplement the required Junction assembly in advance of intersecting routes.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.12}}903.4.12  Design of Route Sign Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.12)==
-'''Guidance.'''  Where a multiple-lane highway approaches an interchange or intersection with a numbered route, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be used to pre-position turning vehicles in the correct lanes from which to make their turn.
+'''Standard. '''Route sign auxiliary plaques displaying word legends, except the Junction (M2-1P) auxiliary plaque, shall have a minimum standard size of 24 x 12 inches. The Junction auxiliary plaque and those auxiliary plaques displaying arrows shall have a minimum standard size of 21 x 15 inches. All route sign auxiliary plaques shall match the color combination of the route sign that they supplement.
-'''Standard.'''  An assembly that includes an Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary sign shall not be placed so that an intersection is between it and the designated turn.
+'''Guidance.''' The background, legend, and border of a route sign auxiliary plaque should have the same colors as those of the route sign with which the auxiliary plaque is mounted in a route sign assembly (see [[#903.4.25|EPG 903.4.25]]). For a route sign design that uses multiple background colors, such as the Interstate Route sign, the background color of the corresponding auxiliary plaque should be that of the background area on which the route number is placed on the route sign.
-'''Guidance.'''  Sufficient distance should be allowed between the assembly and any preceding intersection that could be mistaken for the indicated turn.
+'''Option. '''A route sign and any auxiliary plaques used with it may be combined on a single sign as a guide sign.
-==='''903.7.30 Directional Assembly''' (MUTCD Section 2D.30)===
+'''Standard. '''If a route sign and its auxiliary plaques are combined to form a single guide sign, the background color of the sign shall be green and the design shall comply with the basic principles for the design of guide signs. The auxiliary messages shall be white legends placed directly on the green background. Auxiliary plaques shall not be mounted directly to a guide sign or other type of sign.
-'''Standard.'''  Directional assembly shall consist of a route sign, a Directional Arrow auxiliary sign, and a Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign, if needed.  Uses of Directional assemblies shall be:
+=={{SpanID|903.4.13}}903.4.13  Junction Auxiliary Plaque (M2-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.13)==
-A.	Turn movements (indicated in advance by an Advance Route Turn assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the turning route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the turn.
+[[File:M2-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M2-1P'''</center>]]
-B.	The beginning of a route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of that route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the route.
+'''Standard.''' The Junction (M2-1P) auxiliary plaque shall display the abbreviated legend JCT and shall be mounted at the top of an assembly (see [[#903.4.26|EPG 903.4.26]]) directly above the route sign, the sign for an alternative route (see [[#903.4.17|EPG 903.4.17]]) that is part of the route designation, or the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque where access is available only to one direction of the intersected route. The minimum size of the Junction auxiliary plaque shall be 21 x 15 inches for compatibility with auxiliary plaques displaying arrow symbols.
-C. 	The end of a route shall be marked by a Directional assembly with an END auxiliary sign and a route sign displaying the number of that route.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.14}}903.4.14  Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Plaques (M3-1P through M3-4P) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)==
-D.	An intersected route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) shall be designated by:
+<center>
+{|
+| [[File:M3-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M3-1P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M3-2P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M3-2P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M3-3P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M3-3P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M3-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M3-4P'''</center>]]
+|}
+</center>
-:1.	Two Directional assemblies, each with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route, a Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign, and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of movement on that route; or
+'''Guidance. '''Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaques displaying the legend NORTH, EAST, SOUTH, or WEST should be used to indicate the general direction of the entire route.
-:2.	A Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route and a double-headed arrow, pointing at appropriate angles to the left, right or ahead.
+'''Standard. '''Cardinal Directions shall not be used with an Off-Interstate Business Route (M1-2) sign or State Letter Route (M1-5a) sign.
-'''Guidance.'''  Straight-through movements should be indicated by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the continuing route and a vertical arrow.  A Directional assembly is not to be used for a straight-through movement in the absence of other assemblies indicating right or left turns, as the Confirming assembly sign beyond the intersection normally provides adequate guidance.
+To improve the readability and recognition of the cardinal directions, the first letter of the cardinal direction words shall be ten percent larger, rounded up to the nearest whole number size.
-Directional assemblies should be located on the near right corner of the intersection.  At major intersections and at Y or offset intersections, additional Directional assemblies should be installed on the far right or left corner to confirm the near-side assemblies.  When the near-corner position is not practical for Directional assemblies, the far right corner should be the preferred alternative, with oversized signs, if necessary, for legibility.  Where unusual conditions exist, the location of a Directional assembly should be determined by engineering judgment with the goal being to provide the best possible combination of view and safety.
+If used, the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign or, if used, an auxiliary plaque for an alternative route.
-'''Support.'''  It is more important that guide signs be readable at the right time and place than to be located with absolute uniformity.  Refer to Typical Signing Applications for additional information.
+'''Support. '''Odd-numbered routes typically run north-south, and even-numbered routes typically run east-west.
-==='''903.7.31	Confirming or Reassurance Assemblies''' (MUTCD Section 2D.31)===
+=={{SpanID|903.4.15}}903.4.15  Alternative Route Auxiliary Plaques - General (MUTCD Section 2D.16)==
-'''Standard.'''  Confirming or Reassurance assemblies shall consist of a Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign or a route sign mounted above the Route Marker unless a lettered route is indicated.
+'''Option. '''Alternative Route auxiliary plaques displaying legends such as ALTERNATE, SPUR, or BUSINESS, may be used to indicate an alternate route of the same number between two points on that route.
-Confirming assemblies shall be erected on the far side of all junctions to identify the route the driver is currently on.  Confirming assemblies shall be used of the far side of major intersections in urban areas.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Alternative Route auxiliary plaques shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
-'''Guidance.'''  A Confirming assembly should be placed 25 to 200 ft. beyond the far shoulder or curb line of the intersected highway, see [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications#Figure 903.13.15 Standard Diamond Interchange Signing|Figure 903.13.15]].
+=={{SpanID|903.4.16}}903.4.16  ALTERNATE Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.17)==
+[[File:M4-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M4-1P'''</center>]]
-Route signs for either confirming or reassurance purposes should be spaced at such intervals as necessary to keep road users informed of their routes.
+'''Support. '''An alternate route branches from the numbered route, follows a separate alignment, and rejoins the numbered route downstream.
-'''Option.'''  Additional confirmation assemblies may be used on the far side of minor intersections in heavy commercial or congested areas.
+'''Option. '''The ALTERNATE (M4-1P) auxiliary plaque may be used to indicate an officially designated alternate routing of a numbered route between two points on that route.
-'''Support.'''  Confirming and Reassurance assemblies are considered to be a type of Directional assembly.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the ALTERNATE auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
-==='''903.7.32 Trailblazer Assembly''' (MUTCD Section 2D.32)===
+The M4-1P plaque shall not be used to sign an alternative routing that is not officially designated and incorporated into the numbered highway system, such as alternative routings for incident management or emergency detours.
-'''Support.'''  Trailblazer assemblies provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity.  This is accomplished by installing Trailblazer assemblies at strategic locations to indicate the direction to the nearest or most convenient point of access.  The use of the word TO indicates that the road or street where the sign is posted is not a part of the indicated route and that a traveler is merely being directed progressively to the route.
+'''Guidance. '''The shorter (time or distance) or better-constructed route should retain the regular route number, and the longer or worse-constructed route should be designated as the alternate route.
-'''Standard.'''  A Trailblazer assembly shall consist of a TO auxiliary sign, a route sign (or a special road facility symbol), and a single-headed Directional Arrow auxiliary sign pointing in the direction leading to the route.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.17}}903.4.17  SPUR Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1bP)==
+[[File:M4-1bP.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M4-1bP'''</center>]]
-'''Option.'''  A Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign may be used with a Trailblazer assembly.
+'''Support. '''A spur route is a highway that branches from a state numbered route or state letter route to serve a specific area or connect to another highway.
-'''Guidance.'''  The TO auxiliary sign, Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign and Directional Arrow auxiliary sign should be of the standard size specified for auxiliary signs of their respective type.  The route sign should be the size specified in [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.10 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)|EPG 903.7.10]].
+'''Option. '''The SPUR (M4-1bP) auxiliary plaque may be used to indicate an officially designated alternate route that branches from a numbered route and does not rejoin the same route.
-Trailblazer assemblies may be installed with other Route Sign assemblies, or alone, in the immediate vicinity of the designated facilities.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the SPUR auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
-==='''903.7.33	Destination and/or Distance Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.33)===
+The SPUR auxiliary plaque shall only be used in conjunction with state numbered routes or state letter routes. The SPUR auxiliary plaque shall not be used in conjunction with Interstate or U.S. routes.
-'''Support.'''  In addition to guidance by route numbers, it is desirable to supply the road user information concerning the destinations that can be reached by way of numbered or unnumbered routes.  This is done by means of Destination and/or Distance signs.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.18}}903.4.18  BUSINESS Auxiliary Plaque (M4-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.19)==
+[[File:M4-3P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M4-3P'''</center>]]
-States are not routinely listed as destinations in conjunction with the control city or destination.  For example, when listing Des Moines on a guide sign, it is not necessary to list Iowa or the abbreviation IA. When ambiguity exits such as Kansas City, Missouri or Kansas City, Kansas, it becomes necessary to list the city with the states proper abbreviation.  Justification is required when using abbreviations of states or the entire state name on Destination and/or Distance Signs.
+'''Option. '''The BUSINESS (M4-3P) auxiliary plaque may be used to designate an alternate route that branches from a numbered route, passes through the business portion of a city, and rejoins the numbered route beyond that area.
-'''Option.'''  Route and Cardinal Direction auxiliary signs may be included on the Destination sign panel with the destinations and arrows.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the BUSINESS auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
-'''Guidance.'''  The size of the route signs and Cardinal Direction auxiliary signs should be at least the minimum size specified for these signs.
-'''Standard.'''  Except where special interchange signing is prescribed, Destination and/or Distance Signs (D1-1, D2-1 and D1-1a Series) shall be white on green horizontal rectangle signs carrying the name of a city, town, village or other state route.  The letters “MO” shall not be used, however, the letter “I” for interstate routes or “US” for United States routes will be shown.  When state route is required, the legend ROUTE XX or its shield shall be used, regardless whether it is a numbered or lettered route.  For signs with legends 8 in. or larger, Route Shields shall be used in lieu of text legend.
+Cardinal direction auxiliary plaques shall not be used on a sign assembly with a BUSINESS auxiliary plaque.
-The order of destinations shall be ahead, left and then right.  If there is more than one destination shown in the same direction, the name of the nearest destination shall appear above the names of any destinations that are farther away.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.19}}903.4.19  TO Auxiliary Plaque (M4-5P) (MUTCD Section 2D.21)==
+[[File:M4-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M4-5P'''</center>]]
-Destinations shall not include traffic generators such as universities, stadiums amusement parks or other publicly or privately owned attractions.
+'''Option.''' The TO (M4-5P) auxiliary plaque may be used to provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity (see [[#903.4.30|EPG 903.4.30]]).
-'''Guidance.'''  No more than three destinations should be used on a Destination and/or Distance Sign (D1-1, D2-1 and D1-1a Series).
+'''Standard. '''If used, the TO auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above a route sign or an auxiliary plaque for an alternative route. If a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque is also included in the assembly, the TO auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly above the Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque.
-Adequate separation should be made between any destinations or group of destinations in one direction and those in other directions by suitable design of the arrow, spacing of lines of legend, heavy lines entirely across the panel or separate panels.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.20}}903.4.20  END Auxiliary Plaque (M4-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.22)==
+[[File:M4-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M4-6P'''</center>]]
-Destinations should appear on all subsequent Destination and/or Distance Signs (D1-1, D2-1, and D1-1a Series) for continuity until the corporate limits of the destination are reached.
-'''Option.'''  Unincorporated communities may be used on Destination and/or Distance Signs (D1-1, D2-1 and D1-1a Series) at junctions of state routes where it is more appropriate than using incorporated communities.
+'''Guidance. '''The END (M4-6P) auxiliary plaque should be used where the route being traveled ends, usually at a junction with another route.
-'''Standard.'''  On DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) and DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series), an arrow pointing to the right shall be at the extreme right of the sign, and an arrow pointing left or up shall be at the extreme left.
+The END auxiliary plaque should not be used to indicate the end of a lettered route.
-'''Guidance.'''  Arrows used on DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) and DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) for conventional routes should be limited to left, thru and right arrows.  Unless a sloping arrow conveys a clearer indication of the direction to be followed, the directional arrows should be horizontal or vertical.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the END auxiliary plaque shall be mounted either directly above a route sign or above a sign for an alternative route that is part of the designation of the route being terminated.
-When used in high-speed areas, DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) and DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) should be located 200 ft. or more in advance of the intersection, and following any Junction or Advance Route Turn assemblies that may be required.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.21}}903.4.21  Temporary Detour Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.25)==
-'''Option.'''  In urban areas, shorter advance distances may be used.
+'''Support. '''[[616.9_Temporary_Traffic_Control_Zone_Guide_Signs_(MUTCD_Chapter_6I)|EPG 616.9]] contains information regarding Temporary Detour signs and auxiliary plaques.
-Because the DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) and DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) are of lesser importance than the Junction, Advance Route Turn or Directional assemblies, the DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) and DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) may be eliminated when sign spacing is critical.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.22}}903.4.22  Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M5-1P, M5-2P, and M5-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)==
+<center>
-'''Standard.'''  For DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) and DISTANCE SIGNS (D2-1 Series), mileages to towns and cites shall be computed from the point of the sign to a terminal point, usually a major intersection with another state route, near the business district of that town or city.  In no case should the mileage shown on the DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) or DISTANCE SIGNS (D2-1 Series) at an intersection exit be different from that shown for the same destination on any other leg of the approach to/from said intersection.
+{|
+| [[File:M5-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-1P'''</center>]]
-Terminal points for use in determining distances for DISTANCE AND DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1a Series) and DISTANCE SIGNS (D2-1 Series) to more important towns and cities shall be revised and furnished by the State Traffic Engineer, upon request.
+| [[File:M5-2P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-2P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M5-3P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-3P'''</center>]]
-The selection of destinations on a Distance sign shall be determined by the following rules:
-A.  The first or top line shall identify the next interchange or community along the route;
-B.  If used, the second or middle line should list the next control point on the route; and
-C.  The third or bottom line shall identify the next control city on the route.
-'''Guidance.'''  Distances should be rounded to the nearest whole mile and the distances should be to the actual destination (for example, the actual city limits), not the ramp exit gore or intersection.
-Distance signs may have one line or a maximum of three lines.
-Distances may be a number of miles from the route terminus.
-On two-lane roads where the distance between intersections of numbered routes exceeds 10 miles, additional Distance signs should be placed after intersections with lettered routes so that the spacing between Distance signs does not exceed 10 miles.
-The control city should remain the same on all successive Distance signs throughout the length of the route until that city is reached.
-'''Option.'''  If more than one distant point may properly be designated (e.g. where the route divides at some distance ahead to serve two destinations of similar importance) and if these two destinations cannot appear on the same sign, the two names may be alternated on successive signs.
-On a route extending into another state, destinations in the adjacent state may be shown.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="180px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''MoDOT routes approved for distance signing'''
-|-
-|[[media:903.7.33 Control Points.doc|Control Points - Distance Signing]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Support.'''  Control cities are defined for the interstate system in the AASHTO List of Control Cities for Use in Guide Signs on Interstate Highways and [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#Table 903.8.13 Interstate Sign Control Cities|Table 903.8.13, Interstate Sign Control Cities]].  Control cities on other systems are determined as the next community located where the route intersects with a U.S. numbered route.  A [[media:903.7.33 Control Points.doc|list of routes eligible for distance signing and the appropriate control points]] is available.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaque shall be mounted directly below the route sign in Advance Route Turn assemblies, and shall display a right or left arrow, the shaft of which is bent at a 90-degree angle (M5-1P) or at an oblique angle (M5-2P).
-'''Guidance.'''  The destination shown for each direction should ordinarily be the next county seat or the next principal city, rather than a more distant destination.  In the case of overlapping routes, there should be shown only one destination in each direction for each route.
+If used, the Circular Intersection Advance Turn Arrow (M5-3P) auxiliary plaque shall be used only on the approach to a circular intersection to depict a movement along the circulatory roadway around the central island and to the left, relative to the approach roadway and entry into the intersection.
-==='''903.7.34 Destination Signs (D1 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.34)===
+'''Guidance.''' If the M5-3P plaque is used, then this arrow type should also be used consistently on any regulatory lane-use signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]]), Destination signs (see [[#903.4.32|EPG 903.4.32]]), and pavement markings (see [[:Category: 620 Pavement Marking (MUTCD Part 3)|EPG 620]]) for a particular destination or movement.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.23}}903.4.23  Lane Designation Auxiliary Plaques (M5-4P, M5-5P, and M5-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.27)==
-|-
+<center>
-|[[image:D1-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D1-1'''</center>|125px]]
+{|
-||[[image:D1-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D1-2'''</center>|125px]]
+| [[File:M5-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-4P'''</center>]]
-||[[image:D1-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D1-3'''</center>|125px]]
+| [[File:M5-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-5P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M5-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M5-6P'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 through D1-3) shall display a directional arrow indicating the direction to the destination.  DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) shall not indicate distance to the destination.
+'''Option. '''A Lane Designation (M5-4P, M5-5P, or M5-6P) auxiliary plaque may be mounted directly below the route sign in an Advance Route Turn assembly on multi-lane roadways to allow road users to move into the appropriate lane prior to reaching the intersection or interchange.
-DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) shall be provided at the junctions of all interstate, US and state routes except where it is deemed not appropriate or routes that have no destination to be listed.  Locations for which DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) might not be appropriate are business routes, loops, alternate routes or locations signed in EPG 903.7.37, DESTINATION and DISTANCE SIGNS.
-DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series) shall be installed along crossroads within the limits of an interchange.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Lane Designation auxiliary plaques shall be used only where the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane and shall be located adjacent to the full-width portion of the mandatory movement lane. The Lane Designation auxiliary plaques shall not be installed adjacent to a through lane in advance of a lane that is being added or along the taper for a lane that is being added.
-At intersections where a DISTANCE SIGN (D2Series) is provided after the turn, a DESTINATION SIGN (D1-1 Series) shall be installed on the approach to the intersection.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.24}}903.4.24  Directional Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.28)==
+<center>
-'''Option.'''  Where an incorporated or locally recognized unincorporated community is located on a county road off the state system, a single line DESTINATION SIGN (D1-1) may be installed at the intersection of the county road with the state system.
+{|
+| [[File:M6-1P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-1P'''</center>]]
-'''Guidance.'''  If several individual name panels are assembled into a group, all panels in the assembly should be of the same length.
+| [[File:M6-2P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-2P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M6-3P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-3P'''</center>]]
-In the case where no communities exist, numbered routes should be provided on the DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series).
+| [[File:M6-4P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-4P'''</center>]]
-==='''903.7.35	Location of DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.35)===
-'''Support.'''  Refer to [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications|Typical Signing Applications]] for typical placements of DESTINATION SIGNS (D1-1 Series).
-==='''903.7.36 DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.36)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D2-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D2-1'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:D2-2.gif|left|125px|thumb|<center>'''D2-2'''</center>]]
-||[[image:D2-3.gif|left|125px|thumb|<center>'''D2-3'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) signs shall be erected on interstate, U.S. numbered and Missouri numbered routes only.  DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) shall be erected:
+<center>
+{|
-A.  When leaving an incorporated area;
+| [[File:M6-5P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-5P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:M6-6P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-6P'''</center>]]
-B.  Following an on ramp at an interchange; and
+| [[File:M6-7P.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''M6-7P'''</center>]]
-C.  Following an intersection with another numbered route.
-DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) shall not be erected in urban areas, except following an interchange.
-DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) shall display the distance (to the nearest mile) to the destination in the forward direction.  DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) shall not include arrows.
-'''Location of DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series).  (MUTCD Section 2D.37)'''
-'''Guidance.'''  Where overlapping routes separate a short distance from the municipal limits, the DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) at the municipal limits should be omitted.  The DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series) should be installed approximately 300 ft. beyond the separation of the two routes.
-Where, just outside of an incorporated municipality, two routes are concurrent and continue concurrently to the next incorporated municipality, the top name on the DISTANCE SIGN (D2 Series)  should be that of the place where the routes separate; the bottom name should be that of the city to which the greater part of the through traffic is destined.
-'''Support.'''  [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.13 Typical Signing Applications]] shows typical placements of DISTANCE SIGNS (D2 Series).
-==='''903.7.37	DESTINATION AND DISTANCE SIGN(D1-1a Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.37a)'''===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D1-1a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D1-1a'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:D1-2a.gif|left|125px|thumb|<center>'''D1-2a'''</center>]]
-||[[image:D1-3a.gif|left|125px|thumb|<center>'''D1-3a'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  DESTINATION AND DISTANCE SIGNS (D1-1a Series) shall display a directional arrow and distance to the destination.
-DESTINATION AND DISTANCE SIGNS (D1-1a Series) shall not be installed within the limits of an interchange, except at the ramp terminal.
+'''Standard.''' If used, the Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque shall be mounted below the route sign and any other auxiliary plaques in Directional assemblies (see [[#903.4.25|EPG 903.4.25]]), and shall display a single-headed or double-headed arrow pointing in the general direction that the route follows.
-At an intersection, where a DISTANCE SIGN (D2-1 Series) is not provided leaving the intersection or at the end of the ramp terminal, a DESTINATION AND DISTANCE SIGN (D1-1a Series) shall be used in advance of the intersection instead of the DESTINATION SIGN (D1-1 Series).
+A Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque that displays a double-headed arrow shall not be mounted in any Directional assembly in advance of or at a circular intersection.
-An arrow pointing to the right shall be at the extreme right of the sign, and an arrow pointing left or up shall be at the extreme left.  The distance figures shall be placed to the right of the destination names.
+'''Option. '''The Straight Arrows (M6 Series) may be substituted for the Advance Turn arrows (M5-1 and M5-2) when used near the “on” ramps of tight diamond interchanges to reduce the possibility of motorist confusion about which ramp to enter.
-==='''903.7.38 Street Name Signs (D-3 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.38)===
+=={{SpanID|903.4.25}}903.4.25  Route Sign Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.29)==
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+'''Standard. '''A Route Sign assembly shall consist of a route sign and auxiliary plaques that further identify the route and indicate the direction. Route Sign assemblies shall be installed on all approaches to numbered routes that intersect with other numbered routes.
-|-
-|[[image:D-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D-3'''</center>|135px]]
-||[[image:D-3a.gif|left|135px|thumb|<center>'''D-3a'''</center>]]
-||[[image:D-3b.gif|left|135px|thumb|<center>'''D-3b'''</center>]]
-|}
-'''Guidance.'''  Street Name signs should be installed in urban areas at all street intersections regardless of other route signs that may be present and should be installed in rural areas to identify important roads that are not otherwise signed.
+Where two or more routes follow the same section of highway, the route signs for Interstate, U.S., and State routes shall be mounted in that order from the left in horizontal arrangements and from the top in vertical arrangements. Subject to this order of precedence, route signs for lower-numbered routes shall be placed at the left or top.
-'''Option.'''  Any political subdivision may erect, furnish and maintain a Street Name sign of the same type as the D-3a series on state right of way at non-signalized intersections.
-Conventional abbreviations (refer to Abbreviations Used on Traffic Control Devices) may be used except for the street name itself.
+Within groups of assemblies, information for routes intersecting from the left shall be mounted at the left in horizontal arrangements and at the top or center of vertical arrangements. Similarly, information for routes intersecting from the right shall be at the right or bottom, and for straight-through routes at the center in horizontal arrangements or top in vertical arrangements.
-A symbol or letter designation may be used on a Street Name sign to identify the governmental jurisdiction, area of jurisdiction or other government-approved institution.
+Route Sign assemblies shall be mounted in accordance with the general specifications for signs ([[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1|EPG 903.1]]), with the lowest sign in the assembly at the height prescribed for single signs.
-Street Name signs may be either the street name (surname) or route identification and may display block numbers or a logo to compliment the design of the signs used by the community a state route passes through.  Because there are size limitations for Street Name signs, these features will be omitted if the space is required for sign legend.
+'''Guidance. '''Assemblies for two or more routes, or for different directions on the same route, should be mounted in groups on a common support.
-'''Standard.'''  If a symbol or letter designation is used, the height and width of the symbol or letter designation shall not exceed the letter height of the sign.
+'''Option. '''Route Sign assemblies may be installed on the approaches to numbered routes on unnumbered roads and streets that carry an appreciable amount of traffic destined for the numbered route.
-'''Guidance.'''  The symbol or letter designation should be positioned to the left of the street name.
+If engineering judgment indicates that groups of assemblies that include overlapping routes or multiple turns might be confusing, route signs or auxiliary signs may be omitted or combined, provided that clear directions are given to road users.
-'''Standard.'''  The Street Name sign shall be retroreflective or illuminated to show the same shape and similar color both day and night.  The legend and background shall be of contrasting colors.
+'''Support. '''[[#fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]] show typical placements of route signs.
-MoDOT shall not install Street Name signs at non-signalized intersections.  Requests for a Street Name sign from individuals shall not be considered.  The Street Names sign erected by others shall be a minimum of 7 ft. above the roadway surface and a minimum of 2 ft. beyond all shoulder points.  All locations shall be field checked before installation approval is granted.
+Route sign assemblies are flat sheet signs. For interstate route signs, payment is the same, but these contain blue sheeting. For cardinal directions placed above interstate route signs, a note is placed on Form D-30 to indicate the number of cardinal directions which are interstate design (white on blue), and which are the black on white type. This is also indicated for arrow signs placed below the interstate route signs. For overlapping routes with an interstate and any other type of roadway containing the same cardinal direction, only one cardinal direction is required, and one arrow sign, with the interstate design being used.
-Street Name (D-3 Series) signs shall be installed at signalized intersections, permanent or span wire except those signals at ramp terminals, fire stations, commercial entrances and schools, on conventional or expressway-type highways.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.25.1}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.25.1 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (Sheet 1 of 3).png|thumb|center|700px|alt=On the left side of the figure, a two-lane highway is shown running vertically and intersecting a two-lane highway running horizontally. At the bottom of the figure traveling northbound in advance of the intersection, a white “junction assembly” and a white “directional assembly” are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane. On the north side of this intersection,  an “optional” white “confirming assembly" and an “optional” D2-2 sign are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane. On the right side of the figure, another two-lane highway is shown running vertically and intersecting a two-lane highway running horizontally. At the bottom of the figure traveling northbound in advance of the intersection: a route assembly and D1-3a signs are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane. On the north side of this intersection, a white “directional assembly (enlarged, if necessary),” an “optional” white “confirming assembly,” and an “optional” D2-2 sign are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane.
+|'''Figure 903.4.25.1''' Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs ''(Sheet 1 of 3)'']]
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.25.2}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.25.2 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (Sheet 2 of 3).png|thumb|center|700px|alt="On the left side of the figure, a two-lane highway is shown running vertically and intersecting a two-lane highway running horizontally. At the bottom of the figure, traveling upward in advance of the intersection, a junction assembly and an advance route turn assembly with a D1-2a sign are shown consecutively on the right side of the lane. Just before the intersection, a directional assembly is shown on the right side of the lane. On the north side of this intersection, a confirming assembly and an optional D2-2 sign are shown consecutively on the right side of the lane.
+On the right side of the figure, another two-lane highway is shown running vertically and intersecting a two-lane highway running horizontally. At the bottom of the figure, traveling upward in advance of the intersection, a junction assembly, a D1-2a sign, and a directional assembly are shown consecutively on the right side of the lane. On the north side of this intersection, a confirming assembly and an optional D2-2 sign are shown consecutively on the right side of the lane."|'''Figure 903.4.25.2''' Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs ''(Sheet 2 of 3)'']]
-The Street Name signs shall be mounted on a mast arm and span wire support pole or between the carrier and tether wires.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.25.3}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.25.3 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (Sheet 3 of 3).png|thumb|center|700px|alt=At the top left side of the figure, a two-lane highway is shown running vertically and intersecting with a T intersection, with a two-lane highway running horizontally. At the bottom of the figure traveling northbound in advance of the intersection, a white “junction assembly,” a white “advance route turn assembly,” a D1-2a sign, and a white “directional assembly” are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane. On the east side of the horizontal roadway and beyond the T intersection, an “optional” white “confirming assembly” and an “optional” D2-2 sign are shown consecutively, facing west on the right of the eastbound lane. At the bottom left side of the figure, a two-lane highway is shown running vertically intersecting two, two-lane highways at a "Y" intersection. At the bottom of the figure traveling northbound in advance of the Y intersection, a white “advance route turn assembly” and a green D1-2a are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane. On the gore between the forks of the Y intersection, a white “directional assembly (enlarged, if necessary)” is shown facing south, the direction of travel on the vertical highway. On the right fork of the two-lane highway, an “optional” white “confirming assembly” and an “optional” D2-2 sign are shown consecutively, facing southwest on the right of the northeast lane. On the right side of the figure, a two-lane highway is shown running vertically intersecting a street running horizontally. Prior to the intersection, a D1-1 sign is shown on the right of the northbound lane and facing south. A D3-1 sign is shown on the right of the southbound lane and facing south. Beyond the intersection, a second D3-1 sign and an “optional” white “confirming assembly” are shown consecutively, facing south on the right of the northbound lane.
+|'''Figure 903.4.25.3''' Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs ''(Sheet 3 of 3)'']]
-One-line Street Name (D-3a) signs shall be used when mounting onto either a signal mast arm or between the carrier and tether wires on span wire signals.  This sign shall be 16 in. high by variable length, not to exceed 8 ft.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.26}}903.4.26  Junction Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.30)==
-Two-line Street Name (D-3b) signs shall be mounted onto either a signal mast arm or between tether wires on span wire signals.  This sign shall be 18 in. high by variable length, not to exceed 8 ft.
+'''Standard.''' A Junction assembly shall consist of a Junction auxiliary plaque (see [[#903.4.13|EPG 903.4.13]]) and a route sign. The route sign shall display the number or letter of the intersected or joined route.
-D-3 signs shall be mounted on vertical signal posts.  These signs shall be 9 in. high by variable length, not to exceed 4 ft.  If a two-line type Street Name sign is needed on the vertical signal post, either permanent or span wire signal; two D-3 signs shall be used.
+The Junction assembly shall be installed in advance of every intersection where a numbered or lettered route is intersected or joined by another numbered or lettered route.
-If a Street Name sign is installed above a STOP sign, it should be located with a vertical clearance between 1 and 4 in. measured from the bottom of the Street Name sign to the top of the STOP sign.  The Street Name sign shall be mounted independently of the STOP sign and the installation shall not interfere with the maintenance of the STOP sign.  Only one Street Name sign shall be allowed for a side street and shall be mounted above the STOP sign.  MoDOT shall maintain the STOP sign and post.  Maintenance of the Street Name sign shall be the responsibility of the local political subdivision.  It is not MoDOT’s intention to upgrade existing STOP sign posts to allow the addition of a Street Name sign.  Attachments to our existing STOP sign post shall be by bracket, flat stock, channel “U” posts or other methods approved by MoDOT.
+'''Guidance. '''In urban areas, the Junction assembly should be installed in the block preceding the intersection. In urban areas where speeds are low, the Junction assembly should not be installed more than 300 feet in advance of the intersection.
-When a Street Name sign, erected by others, is installed on a separate post, maintenance of the Street Name sign and post shall be the responsibility of the political subdivision.
+In rural areas, the Junction assembly should be installed at least 400 feet in advance of the intersection. In rural areas, the minimum distance between a Junction assembly and either a Destination sign or an Advance Route Turn assembly should be 200 feet.
-MoDOT shall not participate in the establishment, procurement or installation of any local route markers.
+Where speeds are high, greater spacings should be used.
-MoDOT's route numbering system shall be considered when developing the local route numbering system in order to preclude the possibility of the route number of the local system intersecting the same number of the state system.
+'''Option. '''Where two or more routes are to be indicated, a single Junction auxiliary plaque may be used for the assembly and all route signs grouped in a single mounting.
-The local route signing shall be limited to one installation per direction for an intersection.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.27}}903.4.27  Advance Route Turn Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.31)==
-If D-3 type signs are being used, then they shall be installed according to the Street Name signing for non-signalized intersections.
+'''Standard. '''An Advance Route Turn assembly shall consist of a route sign, an Advance Turn Arrow or word message auxiliary plaque, and a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, if needed. It shall be installed in advance of an intersection where a turn must be made to remain on the indicated route.
-All locations should be field checked before installation to ensure the sign causes no reduction in sight distance.
+'''Option. '''The Advance Route Turn assembly may be used to supplement the required Junction assembly in advance of intersecting routes.
-'''Guidance.'''  Encourage the local subdivision to use route markers like either our Street Name, D-3 sign or a local route shield similar to that shown in the MUTCD as sign number M1-5.
+'''Guidance. '''Where a multi-lane highway approaches an interchange or intersection with a numbered route, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be used to provide advance notice so that road users know the correct lane(s) from which to make their turn.
-Street Name signs should have a white legend on a green background.  A border, if used, should be the same color as the legend.
+'''Option.''' Lane Designation auxiliary plaques (see [[#903.4.23|EPG 903.4.23]]) may be used in Advance Route Turn Assemblies in place of the Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaques where engineering judgment indicates that specific lane information associated with each route is needed and overhead signing is impracticable and the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane. An assembly with the Lane Designation auxiliary plaques may supplement or substitute for an assembly with Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaques.
-In business districts and on principal arterials, Street Name signs should be placed at least on diagonally opposite corners.   In residential areas, at least one Street Name sign should be mounted at each intersection.  Signs naming both streets should be installed at each intersection and should be mounted with their faces parallel to the streets they name.
+'''Guidance. '''In low-speed areas, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be installed not less than 200 feet in advance of the turn. In high-speed areas, the Advance Route Turn assembly should be installed not less than 300 feet in advance of the turn. In rural areas, the minimum distance between an Advance Route Turn assembly and either a Destination sign or a Junction assembly should be 200 feet.
-On two-line type Street Name signs arrows should be used to indicate which side of the street the name applies.
+'''Standard. '''An assembly that includes an Advance Turn Arrow auxiliary plaque shall not be placed where there is an intersection between it and the designated turn.
-The width of a Street Name sign mounted above a STOP sign is not to be greater than the width of the STOP sign it is mounted over.  Route marking shield signs are not to be installed above our STOP sign.
+'''Guidance. '''Sufficient distance should be allowed between the assembly and any preceding intersection that could be mistaken for the indicated turn.
-The Street Name sign should be mounted with its face parallel to the street it is naming.  If the Stop sign has ONE WAY signs mounted above it, such as on expressways, the Street Name sign should be installed on a separate post.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.28}}903.4.28  Directional Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.32)==
-When a Street Name sign, erected by others, is installed on a separate post, the sign should be located near the STOP sign and not block the face of the STOP sign.  If the Street Name sign is being installed at a location where there is no STOP sign, it should be located on the far right-hand side of the intersection for traffic on the major street.  Any Street Name sign should be mounted with its face parallel to the street it is naming
+'''Standard. '''A Directional assembly shall consist of a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, if needed; a route sign; and a Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque. The uses of Directional assemblies shall comply with the  following:
-In areas where we have narrow right of way, consideration should be given to placing the Street Name sign at the right of way if sight distance permits.
+::A. Turn movements (indicated in advance by an Advance Route Turn assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the turning route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the turn.
-'''Option.'''  To optimize visibility, Street Name signs may be mounted overhead.  Street Name signs may also be placed above a regulatory or STOP or YIELD sign.
+::B. The beginning of a route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) shall be marked by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of that route and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of the route.
-At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names may be shown on the same sign along with directional arrows.
+::C. An intersected route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) on a crossroad where the route is designated on both legs shall be designated by:
-If local route shield type signs are being used, the signs may be installed in one of the following ways: at the right of way line facing either parallel or perpendicular to the highway, at the intersection near, but not to block, the stop sign; or in advance of the intersection with the appropriate horizontal arrow of the same width as the shield.
+:::1. Two Directional assemblies, each with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route, a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of movement on that route; or
-'''Guidance.'''  In urban or suburban areas, especially where Advance Street Name signs are not used, the use of overhead-mounted Street Name signs should be considered.  If overhead Street Name signs are used, the lettering should be at least 12 in. tall capital letters, or 12 in. upper-case letters with 9 in. lower-case letters.
-'''Support.'''  Information regarding the use of street names on supplemental plaques for use with intersection-related warning signs is contained in [[903.6 Warning Signs#903.6.46 Use of Supplemental Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.43)|EPG 903.6.46]].
-In those cases where the local jurisdiction has not designated a street name to the state route, it is acceptable to use the route number or letter on the Street Name signs.
-==='''903.7.39 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.39)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D3-2.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''D3-2'''</center>|175px]]
-||[[image:D3-2b.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''D3-2b'''</center>|175px]]
-|-
-|[[image:D3-2a.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''D3-2a'''</center>|175px]]
-||[[image:D3-2c.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''D3-2c'''</center>|175px]]
-|-
-|'''Advance Street Name Sign, Signalized Intersection'''||'''Advance Street Name Sign, Non-Signalized Intersection'''
-|}
-'''Support.'''  Advance Street Name (D3-2 Series) signs identify an upcoming intersection.  Although this is often the next intersection, it could also be several intersections away in cases where the next signalized intersection is referenced.
+:::2. A Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route and a double-headed arrow, pointing at appropriate angles to the left, right, or ahead.
-'''Standard.'''  Advance Street Name (D3-2 Series) signs, if used, shall supplement rather than be used instead of the Street Name (D-3, D-3a, D-3b) signs at the intersection.
+::D. An intersected route (indicated in advance by a Junction assembly) on a side road or on a crossroad where the route is designated only on one of the legs shall be designated by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the intersected route, a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction of movement on that route.
-'''Option.'''  Advance Street Name (D3-2 Series) signs may be installed in advance of unsignalized intersections within a corridor of signalized intersections, which have Advance Street Name signs.  The purpose should provide road users with advance information to identify the name(s) of the next intersecting street to prepare for crossing traffic and to facilitate timely deceleration and/or lane changing in preparation for a turn.
-Special consideration may be given to isolated unsignalized intersections where it can be established that safety problems exist and installation of this type of signing would be beneficial.
+'''Guidance. '''Straight-through movements should be indicated by a Directional assembly with a route sign displaying the number of the continuing route and a vertical arrow. A Directional assembly should not be used for a straight-through movement in the absence of other assemblies indicating right or left turns, as the Confirming assembly sign beyond the intersection normally provides adequate guidance.
-'''Guidance.'''  On arterial highways in rural areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections and in advance of all intersections with exclusive turn lanes.
+Directional assemblies should be located on the near right corner of the intersection. At major intersections and at Y or offset intersections, additional Directional assemblies should be installed on the far right or left corner to confirm the near-side assemblies. When the near-corner position is impractical for Directional assemblies, the far right corner should be the preferred alternative, with oversized signs, if necessary, for legibility. Where unusual conditions exist, the location of a Directional assembly should be determined by engineering judgment with the goal being to provide the best possible combination of view and safety.
-In urban areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections on divided highways, major arterial streets or other routes as determined by the district except where signalized intersections are so closely spaced that advance placement of the signs is impractical.
+'''Support. '''It is more important that guide signs be readable, and that the information and direction displayed thereon be readily understood, at the appropriate time and place than to be located with absolute uniformity.
-The heights of the letters on Advance Street Name signs should be the same as those used for Street Name signs.  Refer to EPG 903.7.35 for more information.
+[[#fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]] show typical placements of Directional assemblies.
-If there is concern that the action message for Advance Street Name signs for unsignalized intersections could be misleading due to other entrances in the area or the sight distance to the intersection is limited, then the action message should be the distance shown to the nearest 100 ft.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.29}}903.4.29  Confirming or Reassurance Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.33)==
-Advance Street Name sign placement should be one-half or one-quarter mile in advance of the signal or intersection.  In the event of closely spaced signals, this sign should be located immediately beyond the adjacent signalized or unsignalized intersection.
+'''Standard.''' If used, Confirming or Reassurance assemblies shall consist of a Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque and a route sign, except as provided in the following paragraph. Where the Confirming or Reassurance assembly is for an alternative route, the appropriate auxiliary plaque for an alternative route (see [[#903.4.15|EPG 903.4.15]]) shall also be included in the assembly.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, Advance Street Name signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background.
+Cardinal Direction auxiliary signs shall not be used on Confirming or Reassurance assemblies for lettered routes, off-interstate business routes (business loops), business routes, and spur routes.
-If used for signalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top line(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and (or) NEXT SIGNAL.
+A Confirming assembly shall be installed just beyond intersections of state numbered and lettered routes.
-If used for unsignalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top lines(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and an action message.  The recommended action message for these signs is NEXT INTERSECTION or LEFT or RIGHT.  When the Advance Street Name sign is provided for at the junction of a state highway, the Advance Street Name sign shall replace the existing junction assembly.
+'''Guidance.''' Confirmation assemblies should be placed 25 to 200 feet beyond the far shoulder or curb line of the intersected highway.
-The installation of an Advance Street Name sign for an unsignalized intersection shall be a supplement to any Street Name signing provided by others.
+A Confirming assembly should be placed 500 feet beyond the downstream end of interchange acceleration lanes confirming the route(s) the driver is entering onto.
-'''Option.'''  Directional arrow(s) may be placed to the right or left of the street name or message such as NEXT SIGNAL, as appropriate, rather than on the bottom line of the legend.
-For intersecting crossroads where the same road has a different street name for each direction of travel, the different street names may be shown on the same Advance Street Name sign along with directional arrows.
+'''Option.''' Confirmation assemblies may be installed downstream of non-state routes based on engineering judgement.  Examples of such application may include non-state routes which carry a significant volume of non-local traffic, or where the intersection with the non-state route may be confusing to the motorist as to which direction the state route departs from the intersection.
-In advance of two closely spaced intersections where it is not practical to install separate Advance Street Name signs, the Advance Street Name sign may include the street names for both intersections along with appropriate supplemental legends for both street names, such as NEXT INTERSECTION, 2ND INTERSECTION, or NEXT LEFT and NEXT RIGHT, or advance directional arrows.
+On freeways with emergency reference markers the confirming route assembly may be omitted only if there is no overlapping route on that portion of the freeway, as the emergency reference marker serves as the confirmation.
-An Advance Street Name (W16-8) plaque with black legend on a fluorescent yellow background, installed supplemental to an Intersection (W2) or Advance Traffic Control (W3) series warning sign may be used instead of an Advance Street Name guide sign (see [[903.6 Warning Signs#903.6.47 Design of Supplemental Plaques (MUTCD Section 2C.44)|EPG 903.6.47]]).
+Reassurance assemblies may be installed on a route if the distance between state-to-state intersections is 20 miles or greater, with the route markers being installed at the approximate midpoint between the state intersections.
-==='''903.7.40 Lake Road Signs (M1-15)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.39a)===
+=={{SpanID|903.4.30}}903.4.30  Trailblazer Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.34)==
-[[image:M1-15.gif|thumb|150px|center|<center>'''M1-15'''</center>]]
+'''Support. '''Trailblazer assemblies provide directional guidance to a particular road facility from other highways in the vicinity. This guidance is accomplished by installing Trailblazer assemblies at strategic locations to indicate the direction to the nearest or most convenient point of access. The use of the word TO indicates that the road or street where the sign is posted is not a part of the indicated route, and that a road user is merely being directed progressively to the route.
-'''Standard.'''  Only those lakes with a minimum surface area of 7,000 acres shall be considered for directional signing.  Directional guide signs shall be provided wherever the principal access highways serving the lake areas intersect with the National Highway System.
+'''Standard.''' A Trailblazer assembly shall consist of a TO auxiliary plaque (see [[#903.4.19|EPG 903.4.19]]) or an identification sign for a byway, historic trail, or auto tour route sign (see  EPG [[#903.4.49|903.4.49]] and [[#903.4.50|903.4.50]]), and a single-headed Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque pointing in the direction leading to the route. Where the Trailblazer assembly is for an alternative route, the appropriate auxiliary plaque for an alternative route (see [[#903.4.15|EPG 903.4.15]]) shall also be included in the assembly.
-The Lake Road sign shall be erected in those areas authorized for a Lake Road System.  The top line shall read “LAKE RD”.  The bottom line shall show the lake road number.  The number of the road (160-1, 180-1, or M-1, M-2) shall be allocated under the following rules:
+'''Option.''' A Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque (see [[#903.4.14|EPG 903.4.14]]) may be used in a Trailblazer assembly where the direction leading to the route provides access only to one direction of travel for that route.
-:A.  With the exception of “BU” for Business Route, no route prefix shall be used;
+'''Guidance.''' The TO auxiliary plaque, Cardinal Direction auxiliary plaque, and Directional Arrow auxiliary plaque should be of the standard size provided for auxiliary plaques of their respective type. The route sign should be the size provided in [[#903.4.11|EPG 903.4.11]].
-:B.  The lake road number shall show the intersecting route name first (on left) and the lake road number thereafter.  Normally, the lake road numbers will begin on the north and increase numerically toward the south for north-south routes and begin on the east and increase numerically toward the west for east-west routes.  In the case of short routes, the numbering will begin at the intersection or beginning of the route with another state route and increase numerically toward the end terminal of the route;
+'''Option. '''Trailblazer assemblies may be installed with other Route Sign assemblies, or alone, in the immediate vicinity of the designated facilities.
-:C.  To qualify for a Lake Road sign, the road shall lead to a lake or have reasonably close access to the lake.  It must serve one or more commercial establishments and/or four or more private lodges or dwellings;
+=={{SpanID|903.4.31}}903.4.31  Destination and Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.35)==
-:D.  After the lake road signing is in place and if the lake road is given a permanent name or made a permanent part of the state highway system, it will lose its lake road designation and the Lake Road sign shall be removed;
+'''Support. '''In addition to guidance by route numbers, it is desirable to supply the road user information concerning the destinations that can be reached by way of numbered or unnumbered routes. This is done by means of Destination signs and Distance signs.
-:E.  If a new U.S., state, or supplementary highway is constructed between the lake proper and the old highway, all intersecting lake roads shall be signed from their intersection with the new highway and Lake Road signs shall be removed from the old highway; and
+State abbreviations are not routinely listed in conjunction with the control city of destination, unless the need is determined by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.
-:F.  Lake Road signs shall be erected only on Missouri Department of Transportation right of way.
+'''Option. '''Route shields and cardinal directions may be included on the Destination sign with the destinations and arrows.
-The Lake Road sign shall be erected, if possible, with two signs back-to-back on the same post and located so it is visible to traffic from both directions.
+'''Guidance. '''If Route shields and cardinal directions are included on a Destination sign, the height of the Route shields should be at least two times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend and not less than 18 inches (15 inches for lettered routes), and the letter height of cardinal directions should be at least the minimum letter height specified for these signs.
-'''Guidance.'''  To qualify for a Lake Road sign, the road’s condition should be reasonably serviceable to the traveling public.
+'''Standard. '''When a route designation is displayed on a destination sign with legends 8 inches or greater, route shields shall be used to display route names.  When the destination has 6-inch legend or less, the route name shall be spelled out with text.  State routes, both state numbered and state lettered routes, shall be listed simply as ROUTE XX.  The letters “MO” shall not be used for state route designations, however, the letter “I” for interstate routes and “US” for United States routes will be shown.
-If the lake road is named, the district should work with the local government to facilitate the change from the lake road number to the new name.  A transition program should be created and the change should have community and 911 service support.
+'''Support. '''Control cities are defined for the interstate system in the AASHTO List of Control Cities for Use in Guide Signs on Interstate Highways and [https://epg.modot.org/index.php/903.8_Freeway_and_Expressway_Guide_Signs Table 903.8.11, Interstate Sign Control Cities]. Control cities on other systems are determined as the next community located where the route intersects with a U.S. numbered route. A list of routes eligible for distance signing and the appropriate control points is available. The MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division determines the control cities for non-interstate state-maintained routes.
-==='''903.7.41 MoDOT Maintenance Signs (M12-1, M12-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.39b)===
+'''Standard. '''The distances displayed on destination signs shall be based on the control point of the destination. Control points are typically the intersection of two major routes within the destination, these control points are determined by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division.  Distances displayed on destination signs are not measured to the jurisdictional boundary of the destination as boundaries change over time.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.32}}903.4.32  Destination Signs (D1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.36)==
-|-
+<center>
-|[[image:M12-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M12-1'''</center>|135px]]
+{|
-||[[image:M12-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M12-2'''</center>|135px]]
+| [[File:D1-1.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-1'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-2.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-2'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-3.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-3'''</center>]]
+|}
+</center>
+<center>
+{|
+| [[File:D1-1a.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-1a'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-2a.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-2a'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-3a.png|thumb|center|160px|alt=|<center>'''D1-3a'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
+'''Standard.''' Except on approaches to interchanges (see [[#903.4.44|EPG 903.4.44]]), the Destination (D1-1 through D1-3) signs, if used, shall be a horizontal rectangle displaying the name of a city or unincorporated community and a directional arrow.
-'''Standard.'''  The MoDOT MAINTENANCE ENDS (M12-2) sign shall be erected at the end of MoDOT maintenance on all marked highways except at a state line.
+Destinations shall not include traffic generators such as universities, stadiums, amusement parks, or other publicly or privately owned attractions.
-The MoDOT MAINTENANCE BEGINS (M12-1) sign shall face traffic approaching MoDOT maintained roadway while the MoDOT MAINTENANCE ENDS sign will be located on the opposite side of the road facing traffic leaving MoDOT maintained roadway.
+'''Option.''' The distance (see [[#903.4.38|EPG 903.4.38]]) to the place named may also be displayed on the Destination (D1-1a through D1-3a) signs. If several destinations are to be displayed at a single point, the several names may be placed on a single sign with an arrow (and the distance, if desired) for each name.
-'''Option.'''  The MoDOT MAINTENANCE BEGINS sign may be erected at the beginning of MoDOT maintenance on all marked highways except at a State Line.
+'''Guidance. '''Adequate separation should be made between any destinations or group of destinations in one direction and those in other directions by suitable design of the arrow, spacing of lines of legend or separate signs.
-Parallel outer roadways and/or service roads may be marked with these signs when our roadways connect to other public roads.
+'''Standard. '''Except as otherwise provided in the EPG, an arrow pointing to the right shall be at the extreme right of the sign, and an arrow pointing left or up shall be at the extreme left. The distance numerals, if used, shall be placed to the right of the destination names.
-'''Guidance.'''  The MoDOT MAINTENANCE BEGINS and MoDOT MAINTENANCE ENDS signs are not to be placed to mark the maintenance responsibilities for crossroads, such as within interchange limits unless there is a specific problem.
+'''Guidance. '''Unless a sloping arrow will convey a clearer indication of the direction to be followed, the directional arrows should be horizontal or vertical.
-==='''903.7.42 Parking Area Signs (D4-1 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.40)===
+If several individual name signs are assembled into a group, all signs in the assembly should be of the same horizontal width.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+Destination signs should be used:
-|-
-|[[image:D4-1a.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1A'''</center>|80px]]
-||[[image:D4-1L.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1L'''</center>|80px]]
-||[[image:D4-1R.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1R'''</center>|80px]]||
-|[[image:D4-1L45.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1L45'''</center>|80px]]
-|-
-|[[image:D4-1R45.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1R45'''</center>|80px]]
-||[[image:D4-1b.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1b'''</center>|110px]]||[[image:D4-1c.gif|thumb|<center>'''D4-1c'''</center>|110px]]
-|}
+::A. At the intersections of U.S. or State numbered routes with Interstate, U.S., or State numbered routes; and
-'''Option.'''  The Parking Area (D4-1A, D4-1L, D4-1R, D4-1L45, D4-1R45) signs may be used to show the direction to a nearby public parking area.  The sign is also used in all MoDOT commuter parking lots.
+::B. At points where they serve to direct traffic from U.S. or State numbered routes to the business section of towns, or to other destinations reached by unnumbered routes.
-'''Standard.'''   The area shall be owned or operated by a public agency in order to be signed.
+'''Standard.''' Where a total of three or fewer destinations are displayed on the Advance guide (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.23|EPG 903.5.23]]) and Supplemental guide (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.49|EPG 903.5.49]]) signs, no more than three destination names shall be displayed on a Destination sign. Where four destinations are displayed on the Advance guide and Supplemental guide signs, no more than four destination names shall be displayed on a Destination sign.
-The COMMUTER (D4-1b) plaque shall be mounted above the Parking Area sign at commuter parking lots.  If used, the sign shall be a horizontal rectangle.  The legend and border shall be green on a retroreflectorized white background.
+'''Option.''' Unincorporated communities may be displayed on Destination signs at junction of state routes where it is more appropriate than using incorporated communities if that destination meets the qualifications for Unincorporated Community (I5-1) Signs (see [[903.9 General Information Signs #903.9.9|EPG 903.9.9]] City/County Limit Signs).
-Two Commuter Parking MoDOT (D4-1c) signs shall be utilized in each commuter parking area mounted back-to-back.  One sign shall face the Interstate and the other will face the parking lot such that the maximum number of motorists on either side of the assembly can read the legend.
+'''Guidance. '''If space permits, four destinations should be displayed on two separate signs at two separate locations.
-In addition, Commuter Parking Lot Restriction signs shall be erected at or near each entrance to the commuter parking lot.
+'''Option. '''Where space does not permit, or where all four destinations are in one direction, a single sign may be used. Where a single sign is used and all destinations are in the same direction, the arrow may be placed below the destinations for the purpose of enhancing the conspicuity of the arrow.
-'''Guidance.'''  If used, the Parking Area sign should be installed as 1st order signing to the parking facility and where it can advise drivers of a place to park.  The sign is not to be used more than a reasonable distance from the parking area.
+'''Standard. '''Where a single four-name sign assembly is used, a heavy line approximating the width of the sign border entirely across the sign or separate signs shall be used to separate destinations by direction.
-'''Support.'''  A reasonable distance is typically four blocks from the parking area.
+'''Guidance. '''The closest destination lying straight ahead should be at the top of the sign or assembly, and below it the closest destinations to the left and to the right, in that order. The destination displayed for each direction should ordinarily be the next county seat or the next principal city, rather than a more distant destination. In the case of overlapping routes, only one destination should be displayed in each direction for each route.
-==='''903.7.43 PARK & RIDE Sign (D4-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.41)===
+'''Standard. '''If more than one destination is displayed in the same direction, the name of a nearer destination shall be displayed above the name of a destination that is farther away.
-[[image:D4-2.gif|center|thumb|115px|<center>'''D4-2'''</center>]]
+'''Support. '''Overhead destination guide signs are sometimes helpful on multi-lane conventional roadways with complex or unusual roadway alignments or geometrics at intersecting highways to provide positive direction to destinations and to assign lanes to be used for destinations.
-'''Option.'''  PARK & RIDE (D4-2) signs may be used to direct road users to park and ride facilities.
+'''Option. '''Overhead Destination signs may be used to provide lane assignment and destination information for some or all of the lanes on the approach to a multi-lane intersection. Destination information may include cardinal directions, route numbers, street names, and/or place names.
-The PARK & RIDE signs may be used in lieu of the Parking sign when a public transit stop is located within the commuter parking lot.
+Overhead signs using the Arrow-per-Lane sign design configuration may be used to provide lane assignments for some or all lane destinations at the approach to a multi-lane intersection (see [[#903.4.33|EPG 903.4.33]]).
-'''Standard.'''  The signs shall contain the word message PARK & RIDE and direction information (arrow or word message).
+=={{SpanID|903.4.33}}903.4.33  Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Destination Guide Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.37)==
-'''Option.'''  PARK & RIDE signs may contain the local transit logo and/or carpool symbol within the sign border.
+'''Support.''' Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide signs are sometimes used on multi-lane conventional roadways to provide positive direction to destinations and to indicate lanes to be used for those destinations. These locations typically include complex or unusual roadway alignments or geometrics. Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs on conventional roads do not always have arrows for every lane. Unlike the Combined Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) sign (see [[#903.4.34|EPG 903.4.34]]), Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs can be used to provide lane assignments where the designated lane is not a mandatory movement lane.
-'''Standard.'''  If used, the local transit logo and/or carpool symbol shall be located in the top part of the sign above the message PARK & RIDE.
+'''Guidance. '''Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide signs are not typically used by MoDOT. When used, Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs should comply with the provisions in this Article.
-'''Guidance.'''  If the function of the parking facility should provide parking for persons using public transportation, the local transit logo symbol should be used on the guide sign.  If the function of the parking facility should serve carpool riders, the carpool symbol should be used on the guide sign.  If the parking facility serves both functions, both the logo and carpool symbol should be used.  If used, the public transit logo should be of the same design as the local transit authority, however, the local transit authority name should not be a part of this sign.
+'''Option. '''At complex intersection approaches involving multiple lanes and destinations, an Overhead Arrow-per-Lane destination guide sign may be used to provide destination information for some or all lanes. Destination information may include cardinal direction, route numbers, street names, and/or place names.
-The existing COMMUTER (D4-1b) plaque should be mounted below this sign.
+'''Standard. '''Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs for conventional roads shall only be used for multi-lane approaches to intersections that have an option lane.
-'''Standard.'''  These signs shall have a retroreflective white legend and border on a rectangular green background.  The carpool symbol shall be as shown for sign D4-2.  The color of the transit logo shall be selected by the local transit authority.
+Overhead Arrow-per-Lane guide signs used on conventional roads shall include as a minimum one arrow above each mandatory turn lane and a bifurcated arrow for the option lane from which both the through and turning movements are allowed.
-'''Option.'''  To increase the target value and contrast of the transit logo, and to allow the local transit logo to retain its distinctive color and shape, the logo may be included within a white border or placed on a white background.
+'''Guidance. '''Displaying an arrow over each through movement lane that does not allow turning should be considered for providing additional positive guidance.
-==='''903.7.44 REST AREA Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.42)===
+'''Standard. '''Overhead Arrow-per-Lane signs for conventional roads shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria:
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+::A. The shaft of each arrow shall be located over the approximate center of the lane to which it applies.
-|-
-|[[image:D5-15.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-15'''</center>|110px]]
-||[[image:D5-1b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-1b'''</center>|110px]]
-||[[image:D5-2a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-2a'''</center>|110px]]
-|-
-|[[image:D5-2b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-2b'''</center>|110px]]
-||[[image:D5-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-1'''</center>|110px]]
-||[[image:D5-6.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-6'''</center>|110px]]
-|-
-|[[image:D5-6a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-6a'''</center>|110px]]||[[image:E5-2b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''EO5-2a'''</center>|110px]]
-|}
+::B. Arrows for continuing through lanes shall be vertically upward-pointing.
-'''Standard.'''  Rest Area signs shall be used only where parking and restroom facilities are available.  Signs for this purpose shall have retroreflective white letters, symbols, and border on a blue background.
+::C. The arrow for a lane that must turn shall be curved in the direction of the turn and shall be accompanied by a black-on-yellow ONLY (E11-1b) sign panel (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #fig903.5.28.1|Figure 903.5.28.1]]) adjacent to the lower end of the arrow shaft.
-Messages such as REST AREA X MILE (D5-1) and REST AREA NEXT RIGHT (D5-1b) shall be used for advance notification of rest areas.  In addition, the REST AREA GORE EXIT (D5-2b) sign shall be used at all rest areas.
+::D. The arrow for an optional exit lane that also carries the through route shall have a single shaft that bifurcates into a vertically upward-pointing arrow and a curving arrow corresponding to the configuration of the through and turn lanes.
-The Advance Rest Area Exit (D5-2a) sign shall be used on interstates at exits to rest areas.
+::E. A vertical white line shall be used to separate the route shields and destinations for the two diverging movements from each other.
-The Rest Area Gore Exit sign is for use in the gores on interstates at all exits to rest areas.
+::F. The number of lanes displayed on a sign shall correspond to the number of lanes being signed for at the location of that sign. An advance sign shall not depict lanes that are added downstream of a sign location.
-The NEXT REST AREA XX MILES (D5-6) sign shall be used to indicate the mileage to the next rest area on the same route within the State.  The sign shall be installed beneath the sign for a rest area.
+'''Guidance. '''Overhead Arrow-per-Lane guide signs used on conventional roads should be designed in accordance with the following additional criteria:
-The LAST REST AREA IN MISSOURI (D5-6a) sign shall be used to advise that a rest area is the last one in Missouri on that route.  The sign shall be installed beneath the REST AREA XX MILES (D5-1) sign for a rest area.
+::A. No more than one destination should be displayed for each movement, and no more than three destinations should be displayed per sign.
-When closing of a rest area is required, a sign shall be provided which will provide advance notice that the next rest area is closed.
+::B. The arrowhead(s) for the diverging movement should be positioned lower on the sign than the arrowhead(s) for the movement that continues straight ahead.
-'''Guidance.'''  If used, Rest Area signs should be installed in advance of roadside parks or rest areas to permit the driver to reduce speed and leave the highway reasonably safely.
+::C. Route shields, cardinal directions, and destinations should be positioned on the sign such that they are clearly related to the arrowhead(s) for the movement to which they apply.
-The NEXT REST AREA XX MILES sign or the LAST REST AREA IN MISSOURI sign are not to be installed on a three digit interstate route.
+::E. The vertical white line that is used to separate the route shields and destinations for the two diverging movements from each other should not descend below the top of the arrowheads for the through lanes, and should be positioned approximately halfway between the diverging arrowheads for the optional movement lane.
-'''Option.'''  The REST AREA HOURS (D5-15) sign may be used to inform motorists of rest area operating hours.
+Destination information should be kept to a minimum necessary to provide positive guidance without overloading the road user.
-An EXIT CLOSED (EO5-2a) sign may be used as a supplemental sign for the NEXT REST AREA XX MILES and the LAST REST AREA IN MISSOURI signs.
+'''Standard. '''The minimum height of arrows on an Overhead Arrow-per-Lane sign used on a conventional road shall be as shown in [[#tab903.4.33|Table 903.4.33]].
-The EXIT CLOSED sign may be bolted to the face of the NEXT REST AREA XX MILES and LAST REST AREA IN MISSOURI sign with the top of the sign located just below the second line of copy.
+'''Guidance. '''When letter heights and other sign legend elements are enlarged there should be an corresponding increase in the arrow size used.
-'''Support.'''  Coordination between the districts will be essential to this signing to ensure the adjacent district is aware of the fact that the next rest area is closed.
+'''Option.''' Curved-stem arrows may be substituted on Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Signs on multi-lane approaches to a circular intersection with an option lane (see [[#903.4.35|EPG 903.4.35]]).
-==='''903.7.45 Advance Information Signs for Roadside Features''' (MUTCD Section 2D.42a)===
+<center>
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.33}}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+{| class="wikitable"
+|+ '''Table 903.4.33''' Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Arrow Height Based on Principal Legend Letter Height
+|-
+! Principal Legend Letter Height !! Straight Arrow !! Turn Arrow
 |-
-|[[image:D5-5e.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5e'''</center>|95px]]
+| 10.67 || 25.5 || 20.188
-||[[image:D5-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5'''</center>|95px]]
-||[[image:D5-5d.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5d'''</center>|95px]]||[[image:D5-5b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5b'''</center>|95px]]
-|}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:D5-5h.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5h'''</center>|95px]]
+| colspan="3" style="background-color: #ffffff" | Note: Letter and arrow heights are shown in inches.
-||[[image:D5-5i.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5i'''</center>|95px]]
-||[[image:D5-5j.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5j'''</center>|95px]]
-||[[image:D5-5k.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D5-5k'''</center>|95px]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  The appropriate advance information signs shall be erected in advance of state maintained roadside parks, historic marker, scenic view or roadside table.  Any combination of these facilities shall be signed only for the facility appearing first in that order.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.34}}903.4.34  Combination Lane-Use/Destination Overhead Guide Sign (D15-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.38)==
+[[File:D15-1.png|thumb|center|280px|alt=|<center>'''D15-1'''</center>]]
-The ROADSIDE TABLE ½ MILE (D5-5e) sign shall be erected one half mile in advance of a state maintained roadside table.
-The ROADSIDE TABLE (D5-5) sign shall be erected facing traffic with the arrow pointing in the direction of the roadside table only when the table is no clearly visible from the road and shall not be used at a roadside park.
-The ROADSIDE PARK X MILE (D5-5d) sign shall be used to provide advance notice of a roadside park adjacent to the highway.
-The Named Roadside Park (D5-5h) sign shall be erected at all state maintained roadside parks with an official name.
-The Roadside Park (D5-5b) sign shall be used to direct motorists to a roadside park where the park is adjacent to the highway and the entrance is not on the highway, but on an outer roadway or access road adjacent to the highway.
-The HISTORIC MARKER ½ MILE (D5-5i) sign shall be used in a similar manner to the ROADSIDE PARK ½ MILE sign except this is used for advance warning of a state maintained historic marker.
-'''Guidance.'''  The ROADSIDE TABLE ½ MILE sign should not be erected inside an incorporated area.
-The ROADSIDE TABLE sign should be erected for each direction of travel and is not to be erected inside an incorporated area.
-The ROADSIDE PARK 5 MILES (D5-5d) sign should not be erected inside an incorporated area.
-The Named Roadside Park sign should be erected inside the limits of the park.
-'''Option.'''  If a table is provided at a historic marker or scenic view, the Table sign may be mounted below the Historic Marker or Scenic View sign.
-The ROADSIDE PARK 5 MILES (D5-5d) sign may be erected 5 miles in advance of a state-maintained roadside park.
+'''Option. '''At intersection approaches involving multiple turn lanes and destinations, a Combination Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) overhead guide sign that combines a lane-use regulatory sign with destination information such as a cardinal direction, a route number, a street name, and/or a place name may be used.
-In the case where an incorporated area is within the 5-mile limit, the sign may be located at a lesser distance showing the correct mileage.
+'''Support. '''At such locations, the combined information on the D15-1 signs can be even more effective than separate lane-use and guide signs for conveying to unfamiliar drivers which lane or lanes to use for a particular destination.
-The TABLE (D5-5k) plaque may be used only in combination with a HISTORIC MARKER ½ MILE or SCENIC VIEW ½ MILE 9 (D6-1a) sign when a table is located at these sites.
+'''Standard. '''The Combination Lane-Use/Destination (D15-1) overhead guide sign shall be used only where the designated lane is a mandatory movement lane. The D15-1 sign shall not be used for lanes with optional movements.
-==='''903.7.46 Scenic Area Signs (D6-2 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.43)===
+The D15-1 sign shall have a green background with a white border. The lane-use sign (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]]) shall be placed near the bottom of the sign and the destination information shall be placed near the top of the sign. The D15-1 sign shall be located over the approximate center of the lane to which it applies.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.35}}903.4.35  Destination Signs at Circular Intersections (MUTCD Section 2D.39)==
-|-
+<center>
-|[[image:D6-1a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D6-1a'''</center>|125px]]
+{|
-||[[image:D6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D6-1'''</center>|125px]]
+| [[File:D1-1d.png|thumb|center|140px|alt=|<center>'''D1-1d'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-1e.png|thumb|center|170px|alt=|<center>'''D1-1e'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-2d.png|thumb|center|170px|alt=|<center>'''D1-2d'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D1-3d.png|thumb|center|170px|alt=|<center>'''D1-3d'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  The SCENIC VIEW ½ MILE (D6-1a) sign shall be erected at a state maintained location in similar fashion to the ROADSIDE PARK ½ MILE sign.
+'''Standard.''' Destination signs that are used at circular intersections shall comply with the provisions of [[#903.4.32|EPG 903.4.32]], except as provided in this Article.
-'''Option.'''  The Scenic View (D6-1) sign may be installed at state maintained locations in similar fashion to the Roadside Park sign.
-'''Guidance.'''  The design of the signs should be consistent with that specified for rest areas in [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.44 REST AREA Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)|EPG 903.7.44]] and should be white letters, symbols and border on a blue background.  An advance sign and an additional sign at the turnoff point should be used for this kind of attraction.
-==='''903.7.47 Airport Sign (I-5a series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.43a)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:I-5aL.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-5aL'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:I-5a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-5a'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:I-5aR.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-5aR'''</center>|125px]]
-|}
-'''Support.'''  The I-5a airport signs are intended for small public airfields or airports.  Generally, 1st order signing will be provided for airports or flying fields that do not offer commercial flights and up to 3rd order for small airports that provide some commercial service.
-'''Option.'''  The Airport (I-5a) signs may be mounted back-to-back on the same post(s) or erected separately.
-'''Standard.'''  The Airport sign shall not be used for privately owned airports or flying fields.
-'''Guidance.'''  Interchange signing with structural signs should be considered only for public airports with regularly scheduled commercial passenger service.
-==='''903.7.48 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.44)===
+'''Option.''' Exit Destination (D1-1d and D1-1e) signs with diagonal upward-pointing arrows or Directional assemblies (see [[#903.4.28|EPG 903.4.28]]) may be used to designate a particular exit from a circular intersection.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+Destination (D1-2d and D1-3d) signs with curved-stem arrows may be used on approaches to circular intersections to represent the left-turn movements.
-|-
-|[[image:D8-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D8-1'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:D8-2a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D8-2a'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:D8-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D8-3'''</center>|125px]]
-|-
-|[[image:F3-1.gif|thumb|<center>'''F3-1'''</center>|150px]]
-||[[image:R13-3.gif|thumb|<center>'''R13-3'''</center>|150px]]
-|}
-'''Support.'''  The general concept for Weigh Station signing is similar to Rest Area signing (see EPG 903.7.41) because in both cases traffic using either area remains within the right of way.
+Curved-stem arrows on circular intersection destination signs may point in diagonal directions to depict the location of an exit relative to the approach roadway and entry into the intersection.
-'''Standard.'''  Traffic control signs in weigh stations shall be maintained by MoDOT.  The standard installation for Weigh Station signing shall include three basic signs:
+An Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Destination sign (see [[#903.4.33|EPG 903.4.33]]) with curved-stem arrows may be used on multi-lane approaches to circular intersections that have an option lane.
-A.	Advance sign (D8-1);
+'''Guidance.''' If curved-stem arrows are used on destination signs, then this arrow type should also be used consistently on any regulatory lane-use signs (see [[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]]), Directional assemblies (see [[#903.4.28|EPG 903.4.28]]), and pavement markings (see [[:Category:620 Pavement Marking (MUTCD Part 3) #620|EPG 620]]) for a particular destination or movement.
-B.	Exit Direction sign (D8-2a); and
+'''Support. '''[[#fig903.4.35.1|Figure 903.4.35.1]] shows examples of guide signing for circular intersections.
-C.	Gore sign (D8-3).
+'''Standard. '''Diagrammatic guide signs for circular intersections shall not be used.
-See [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/90304.pdf Standard Plan 903.04] for further information.
+'''Support. '''[[903.2 Regulatory Signs and Barricades (MUTCD Chapter 2B) #903.2|EPG 903.2]] contains information regarding regulatory signs at circular intersections, [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3|EPG 903.3]] contains information regarding warning signs at circular intersections, and [[620.4 Circular Intersection Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3D) #620.4|EPG 620.4]] contains information regarding pavement markings at circular intersections.
-The Official Weigh Station (F3-1) sign shall be used to identify all official weigh stations.  If the weigh station uses a prepass system a PREPASS SITE ALL TRUCKS RIGHT LANE sign shall be used.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.35.1}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.35.1 Examples of Guide Signs for Circular Intersections (Sheet 1 of 2).png|thumb|center|700px|alt="The figure shows a single lane roundabout with four approaches, each illustrating typical placement of guide and directional assemblies at rural circular intersections. On the north approach, a confirming assembly is placed on the right side of the roadway between 25 and 200 feet in advance of the roundabout entry, with an optional distance guide sign located farther upstream. The spacing between these signs follows the minimums indicated in the figure.
+On the east side of the roundabout, immediately after the northbound exit, either a directional assembly or an exit destination sign (D1-1e) may be installed. A similar placement pattern appears after the west exit and after the south exit, where each location shows either a directional assembly or an exit destination sign positioned just beyond the departure point. On the east exit specifically, a single exit destination sign (D1-1d) is shown without an alternative directional assembly.
+On the south approach, guide signing includes an advance route turn assembly placed before the roundabout entry, following a junction assembly farther downstream. Additional guide signage may appear on the approach side of the east leg as well, with spacing labeled to indicate minimum distances required for rural applications."
+|'''Figure 903.4.35.1''' Examples of Guide Signs for Circular Intersections ''(Sheet 1 of 2)'']]
-'''Support.'''  Example locations of these signs are shown in Figure 903.7.49.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.35.2}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.35.2 Examples of Guide Signs for Circular Intersections (Sheet 2 of 2).png|thumb|center|700px|alt="The figure shows a multilane roundabout with four approaches. On the north approach, a single exit destination sign (D1-1e) is positioned just beyond the exit for traffic leaving the roundabout toward the north. On the west approach, an exit destination sign (D1-1e) is placed just beyond the exit for vehicles departing toward the west.
+On the east approach, two types of signs appear. Immediately after the exit, an exit destination sign (D1-1d) is installed. Farther upstream on the approach side of this leg, a pair of lane control signs is shown as options for non-state route approaches.
+On the south approach, an exit destination sign (D1-1e) is positioned beyond the southbound exit. In addition, a set of overhead destination signs is located on the approach side of the roadway before entering the roundabout. These overhead signs apply to the movement directions available at the roundabout and are mounted over the travel lanes." |'''Figure 903.4.35.2''' Examples of Guide Signs for Circular Intersections ''(Sheet 2 of 2)'']]
-'''Guidance.'''  The Exit Direction sign (D8-2a) or the Advance sign (D8-1) should display, either within the sign border or on a supplemental panel, the changeable message OPEN or CLOSED.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.36}}903.4.36  Destination Signs at Intersections with Indirect Turning Movements (MUTCD Section 2D.41)==
-The Official Weigh Station sign should be erected over the platform scales so that the lower edge of the sign will be 16 ft. above the platform.
+'''Guidance. '''A system of guide signs along with associated lane markings should be used to direct traffic through intersections with indirect turning movements.
-'''Option.'''  The Official Weigh Station sign may also be ground mounted.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.37}}903.4.37  Location of Destination Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)==
-==='''903.7.49 General Service Signs (D9 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45)===
+'''Guidance. '''When used in urban areas or on exit ramps, Destination signs should be located 200 feet or more in advance of the intersection, and following any Junction or Advance Route Turn assemblies that might be required. In rural areas, Destination signs should be located 400 feet or more in advance of the intersection. The minimum distance between a Destination sign and either an Advance Route Turn assembly or a Junction assembly should be 200 feet.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+'''Option. '''Because the Destination sign is of lesser importance than the Junction, Advance Route Turn, or Directional assemblies, the Destination sign may be eliminated where the distance in which to provide adequate sign spacing is limited.
-|-
-|[[image:D9-3.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-3'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-3a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-3a'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-6.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-6'''</center>|115px]]||[[image:D9-7.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-7'''</center>|115px]]
-|}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+'''Support. '''[[#fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]] show typical placements of Destination signs.
-|-
-|[[image:D9-7a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-7a'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-20 & D9-20a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-20 & D9-20a'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-7b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-7b'''</center>|115px]]
-|}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D9-8.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-8'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-9.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-9'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:D9-10.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-10'''</center>|115px]]||[[image:D9-12.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-12'''</center>|115px]]
-|}
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.38}}903.4.38  Distance Signs (D2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43)==
-|-
+<center>
-|[[image:D9-17.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-17'''</center>|115px]]
+{|
-||[[image:D12-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D12-2'''</center>|115px]]
+| [[File:D2-1.png|thumb|center|1500px|alt=|<center>'''D2-1'''</center>]]
-||[[image:D12-12b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D12-12b'''</center>|115px]]
+| [[File:D2-2.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''D2-2'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D2-3.png|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''D2-3'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Standard.'''  The use of general service signs shall only be provided in areas where the public would not expect to find required services or where there may be some doubt as to their availability.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Distance (D2-1 through D2-3) signs shall be a horizontal rectangle of a size appropriate for the required legend, displaying the names of no more than three cities, towns, or junctions, and the distance (to the nearest mile) to those places.
-Only the symbolic references to gas, food, lodging, camping, etc. (D9 series), shall be used.  If the qualifying services are no longer present then the service signs shall be removed.
-When new services become available or are changed, the department upon request shall change the signs to conform to the MoDOT general service sign policy.  When a service is no longer available the appropriate service sign shall be removed.
-All General Service signs and supplemental panels shall have white symbols, and borders on a blue background.
-'''Guidance.'''  General service signs may be used at interchanges.  Such service signs may be provided at all interchanges, regardless of whether it is divided or a two-lane, two-way roadway.  Gas, food and lodging signs are not to be used were services are readily apparent.  Service signs may be used at an interchange regardless of the presence of logo signing.
-General Service signs should be installed at a suitable distance in advance of the turn-off point or intersecting highway.
+The distance numerals shall be placed to the right of the destination names.
-When no qualifying services are available at any interchange the NO SERVICES AVAILABLE sign should be installed below the advance guide sign.
+'''Guidance. '''The distance displayed should be determined on a case-by-case basis by the MoDOT Highway Safety and Traffic Division when signs are being detailed for fabrication.
-'''Option.'''  Signs may be installed for whatever alternative fuels are available at appropriate locations.
+The top destination displayed on the Distance sign should be that of the next city or interchange which will be reached while traveling on the route. The second destination displayed on the Distance sign should be the next control city, or significant destination, encountered while traveling on the route. This control city should be displayed on all subsequent destination signs along the route until that city is reached and then replaced with the next control city along the route.  The bottom destination displayed on the Distance sign should be that of the significant anchor city or control city for that route. The anchor city should be displayed on all destination signs along the route as a consistent reference of distance traveled.
-If the distance to the next point at which services are available is 10 miles or more, a sign NEXT SERVICES XX MILES (D9-17) may be used as a separate panel installed below the General Service sign (see Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs).
+'''Option. '''On a route continuing into another State, destinations in the adjacent State may be displayed.
-'''Standard.'''  General Service signs, if used at intersections, shall be accompanied with a direction message.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.39}}903.4.39  Location of Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.44)==
-The Pharmacy (D9-20) sign shall only be used to indicate the availability of a pharmacy that is open, with a State-licensed pharmacist on duty, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, and that is located within 3 miles of an interchange on the Federal-aid system. The D9-20 sign shall have a 24 HR (D9-20a) plaque mounted below it.
+'''Guidance. '''Distance signs should be installed on all state routes leaving municipalities and just beyond intersections of other state routes in rural areas. If used, they should be placed just outside the municipal limits or at the edge of the built-up area if it extends beyond the limits. If a distance sign cannot be installed leaving the intersection, a destination sign with distances should be installed in advance of the intersection providing a destination for each departing leg of the intersection and the distance to the destination.
-'''Support.'''  Formats for displaying different combinations of these services are presented in [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.60 General Service Signs|General Service Signs, 903.8.60]].
-'''Option. ''' The International Symbol of Accessibility for the Handicapped (D9-6) sign may be used beneath General Service signs where paved ramps and rest room facilities accessible to, and usable by, the physically handicapped are provided.
+Where overlapping routes separate a short distance from the municipal limits, the Distance sign at the municipal limits should be omitted. The Distance sign should be installed approximately 300 feet beyond the separation of the two routes.
-The Recreational Vehicle Sanitary Station (D9-12) sign may be used as needed to indicate the availability of facilities designed for the use of dumping wastes from recreational vehicle holding tanks.
+Where, just outside of an incorporated municipality, two routes are concurrent and continue concurrently to the next incorporated municipality, the top name on the Distance sign should be that of the place where the routes separate; the bottom name should be that of the city to which the greater part of the through traffic is destined.
-A Car Pool Information/Ride Share (D12-2, D12-2b) sign may be installed in those communities where the Department of Natural Resources facilitates this program (see [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.66 Carpool and Ridesharing Signing (MUTCD Section 2E.57)|EPG 903.8.66 Carpool and Ride Sharing Signing]]).
+'''Support. '''[[#fig903.4.25.1|Figures 903.4.25.1]] through [[#fig903.4.25.3|903.4.25.3]] show typical placements of Distance signs.
-==='''903.7.50 HOSPITAL Signs (D9-27, D9-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45a)===
+=={{SpanID|903.4.40}}903.4.40  Street Name Signs (D3-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.45)==
+<center>
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+{|
-|-
+| [[File:D3-1.png|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''D3-1'''</center>]]
-|[[image:D9-27.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-27'''</center>|115px]]
+| [[File:D3-1b.jpg|thumb|center|140px|alt=|<center>'''D3-1b'''</center>]]
-||[[image:Hospital Assembly.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Hospital Exit Sign with Name Plates'''</center>|115px]]
 |}
+</center>
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D9-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D9-2'''</center>|115px]]
-||[[image:Hospital Trailblazers.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Hospital Trailblazer with Name Plaques'''</center>|115px]]
-|}
-'''Option.'''  The commission may provide signs on state right of way for the purpose of directing motorists to a qualified hospital for emergency care including Veterans hospitals.
-Hospital signing at a second interchange may be considered.  Supplemental plaques may be added to the Hospital sign and symbolic H.
-Hospitals that are not state owned may purchase a supplemental plaque to be placed below the HOSPITAL sign with the hospital’s name.
+'''Support.''' Street Name signs at intersections and along roadways provide road users with important navigation information. [[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H) #903.8.10|EPG 903.8.10]] contains information about signs used to identify the names of grade-separated streets, railways, bikeways, or other transportation facilities.
-'''Standard.'''  A qualified licensed hospital shall provide continuous emergency care available to the public 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, with a doctor on call at all times, not to exceed 3rd order signing.  Medical clinics not meeting these criteria shall not qualify for signing.
+MoDOT does not install street name signs at non-signalized intersections, if installed, this signing is installed and maintained by the local jurisdiction who owns the roadway intersecting the state route, or who has established a street name on an intersecting state route.
-On freeways and expressways, the hospital sign shall be kept separate from other service signs due to its unique nature and usage.  The HOSIPTAL NEXT RIGHT (D9-27) sign shall be used on the mainline in advance of an interchange and mounted independently.
+'''Guidance. '''Street Name (D3-1) signs should be installed at all signalized intersections in both urban and rural areas except as noted in the first Standard paragraph below.
-The symbolic H (D9-2) sign shall be used at the top of the ramp along with the appropriate M series arrow in white on a blue background.
+To minimize wrong-way movements onto freeway or expressway exit ramps, Street Name signs should not be used at the intersection of a freeway or expressway exit ramp with the crossroad to display the name of the freeway or expressway to traffic on the crossroad.
-Stand-alone hospital signs shall consist of a sign assembly containing the symbolic H and directional arrow.  The intersection for hospital signing shall be at the location where the principal access road to the hospital intersects the state highway system.
+'''Standard. '''Street Name signs shall not be installed for approaches to fire stations, commercial entrances, schools, or driveways without an official street name.
-Hospital signs shall not be installed until it is determined that the motorist is adequately directed to the hospital once they leave the state highway system.  If a hospital is farther than 1 mile from an interchange, a mileage plaque shall be provided with the symbolic H and M series arrow.  If two hospitals are located at the same intersection the hospitals shall have a mileage plaque with distances in ¼ mile increments.  Trailblazing on the state system shall consist of the symbolic H.  Hospital signing shall be provided at the interchange or exit ramps that provide the most direct route to the hospital.
-Supplemental plaques shall only be used when the following criteria is met:
-A.   A maximum of 3 supplemental signs shall be allowed per Hospital sign, Each plaque shall be 132 in. x 12 in. for the Hospital sign and 24 in. x 12 in. for symbolic H,
-B.  Signs shall be white legend on blue background,
-C.  All minimum ground clearance and breakaway requirements shall be followed, and
-D.  No commercial advertising or business logos shall be permitted.
-The Commission shall provide state owned hospitals, as verified by the Missouri Department of Health and Social Services website at www.dhss.state.mo.us/profiles/hospitals, a supplemental plaque placed below the HOSPITAL sign with hospital’s name.  MoDOT shall pay all costs for fabrication, installation, and maintenance of the signs.
-All costs for fabrication and installation of the plaques, for non-state owned hospitals, shall be paid for by the hospital.  MoDOT shall fabricate and install these signs.  Any maintenance costs, such as replacement, shall be paid for the hospital.  Traffic Division shall determine sign cost.  A [http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts/TR/TR15%20Signing%20Paid%20by%20Applicant.doc TR-15 contract] shall be executed.
-'''Guidance.'''  In those instances where the hospital property abuts the MoDOT right of way, the nearest adjacent intersection of two state highways should be eligible.  If the hospital is not located on the intersecting street where the state installed signs are located, assurance should be given that responsible local authorities will erect additional signs on the city street or county highway.
-==='''903.7.51 Emergency Service Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45b)===
-'''Option.'''  MoDOT may permit a rural emergency service to install on state right of way a numbering system, which will identify number properties.
-Fire hydrant identifying signs may be installed along the state highway system.
-'''Standard.'''  Signing marking the boundaries of fire, ambulance, and law enforcement boundaries shall not be provided nor installed on state roadways.
-The fire department shall be required to provide, install and maintain fire hydrant identifying signs.  These signs shall be 30 in. x 24 in., reflectorized, with a white legend on a blue background.  The legend shall include a number that specifically identifies that specific hydrant location for cross-reference.  The numbering system used shall be consistent throughout a county or region for ease of identification by mutual-aid departments.
-'''Guidance.'''  The background of fire hydrant identifying signs should have a fire hydrant emblem to indicate the purpose of the signs.  These signs should be installed at the edge of the right of way or at the best possible locations for visibility in fill sections.  These signs should be installed with the face of the sign parallel to the roadway.
-Districts should approve locations based on the following:
-:	A.  The fire hydrant or other water source must be accessible from the roadway.
-:	B.  The hydrant should be ¼ mile or less from the roadway centerline.
-'''Support.'''  The purpose of fire hydrant signing should help speed response time for accidents or spills on our roadway system, as well as the roadsides.
-Typical numbering schemes for fire hydrant identifying signs would identify the hydrants using the local or regional fire department numbering systems.  For example, hydrant number 7301 would be the first hydrant for a fire protection district with the designation “73” in the regional numbering system.
-==='''903.7.52 EMERGENCY DIAL *55 Sign (I-13b)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45c)===
-[[image:I-13b.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''I-13b'''</center>|105px]]
-'''Guidance.'''  The EMERGENCY DIAL *55 (I-13b) sign should be used to alert motorists of the existence of the established statewide cellular phone emergency numbers.
-The Emergency Help sign should be placed, one for each direction of travel, at approximate 50-mile intervals on the National Highway System.  In addition, two of these signs should be utilized in each commuter lot outside of urbanized areas.  They should be mounted back-to-back and should be erected adjacent to or as close as possible to the standard Commuter Parking Lot sign.  One sign is also to be erected for each direction of travel at each rest area location and should be placed to the right of the ramp, which exits the interstate and enters the rest area facility.
-When used at commuter lots outside of urbanized areas, the Emergency Help sign should face the highway in one direction and the parking lot in the other so that the maximum number of motorists on either side of the assembly can read the legend.
-==='''903.7.53 Safety Stop Sign (D5-16a)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45d)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:D5-16a.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''D5-16a'''</center>|125px]]
-|}
-'''Option.'''  Civic organizations may be allowed to dispense free coffee or other refreshments on right of way as a service to motorists during holiday periods.  Interstate rest areas, roadside parks and scenic turnouts may be utilized for such activities.
+When used, Street Name signs shall be mounted on a mast arm or between the carrier and tether wires for span wire signals, and shall be mounted a maximum of 12 inches from the center of the upright support (see [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/90240.pdf Standard Plan 902.40R]).
-A sign indicating the host organization may be displayed at the serving location.
+Street name signs shall not be installed between signal heads as the signal structures are not designed for the additional wind load at these locations.
-'''Standard.'''  Official temporary Safety Stop signs may be erected for such facilities provided the following guidelines are met:
+'''Option. '''For signals with insufficient space to install a street name sign between the upright support and the first signal indication, a D3-1 sign, 12 inches tall and not to exceed 4 feet in width, may be mounted on vertical signal support.
-. Applicant must obtain a permit and reserve a time slot in advance of the event.  A copy of this permit must be posted during serving hours.
+For span wire signals, the maximum distance from the center of the upright support to the street name sign as indicated in the preceding Standard paragraph may be increased if the upright support isn’t adjacent to the roadway (see [https://www.modot.org/sites/default/files/documents/90270_2.pdf Standard Plan 902.70Q]).
-. The activity shall be carried on solely within the safety rest area, roadside park, or scenic turnout in locations designated in the permit.  Parking or any other activity shall not be permitted on the travel surface, shoulders, ramps, or other surfaces used for the movement of vehicles.
+'''Standard.''' The lettering for names of streets and highways on Street Name signs shall be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.8|EPG 903.1.8]]).
-. The activity shall be conducted for the express purpose of improving the safety of highway travel and not primarily to the advantage of any other organization or activities.  No advertising shall be permitted.
+'''Guidance. '''Letter heights on street name signs should be as shown in [[#tab903.4.40|Table 903.4.40]]. [[#tab903.4.40|Table 903.4.40]] should be used by local jurisdictions when fabricating and installing street name sign at state route intersections. MoDOT uses the largest font possible on street name signs at signalized intersections, with the legend size/sign size being controlled by the capacity of the signal structure.
-. The applicant must be a nonprofit organization showing a record of concern for automotive, highway or driver safety.
+'''Support. '''The recommended minimum letter heights for Street Name signs are summarized in [[#tab903.4.40|Table 903.4.40]]. The speed limits specified and the recommended minimum letter heights provided in this Article apply to the roadway that each Street Name sign faces rather than to the street that has its name displayed on the Street Name sign. The letter heights specified in [[#tab903.4.40|Table 903.4.40]] are the combination of lower-case letters with the initial upper-case letter of a mixed-case legend.
-. The refreshments or any other service offered shall be free of charge to the motorists without the solicitation of contributions or donations or any other benefits to the organization.
+A minimum upper-case letter height of 10 inches with a lower-case nominal loop height of 8 inches is recommended for all overhead Street Name signs regardless of posted speed limit as Street Name signs generally require greater legibility distances for road users to properly react.
-. Solicitation or collection of contributions, donations, etc. is forbidden.
+The letter height of the street name descriptor (such as St, Ave, or Rd), the directional legend (such as NW), or any other supplemental legend (such as block or house numbers) on the D3-1 signs may be smaller than that of the street name itself.
-. Handing out or posting of printed literature is prohibited.  Cups or dispensing unit may not carry any advertising.  The only exception to this is pre-approved highway safety literature.
+'''Guidance. '''The letter height of the street name descriptor, the directional legend, or any other supplemental legend on the D3-1 signs should be at least two-thirds of the letter height of the street name itself, but not less than 3 inches for the initial upper-case letters and not less than 2.25 inches for the nominal loop height of the lower-case letters.
-. Participating groups must conduct cleanup of the immediate area, both during and following the activities.  All trash is to be placed into bags and placed in the Safety Rest Area trash dumpster or other trash containers located at the facility.
+Conventional abbreviations (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.4.8|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08]])) should be used except for the street name itself. Acceptable abbreviations for street name descriptors such as “Ave” for Avenue and “Blvd” for Boulevard should be as provided in [[#tab903.4.7.1|Table 903.4.7.1]] (see [[#903.4.7|EPG 903.4.7]]). The street name descriptors that are provided in [[#tab903.4.7.2|Table 903.4.7.2]] should not be abbreviated (see [[#903.4.7|EPG 903.4.7]]).
-. Participants are not to interfere with the work of the Safety Rest Area attendants or with the access to the restrooms or drinking fountains for safety breaks conducted at Rest Areas.
+'''Option. '''MoDOT does not display block numbers on street name signs. However, local jurisdictions who elect to install and maintain internally illuminated street name signs on MoDOT signals, under an agreement with MoDOT, may display block numbers as a supplemental legend on a Street Name sign to aid emergency responders and road users in locating addresses.
-. The serving organization may have two signs showing the service and organization.  For example, "Free Coffee, Compliments of ____________."  Maximum size of these signs shall be 18 in. x 24 in.
+'''Guidance. '''If block numbers are displayed on a Street Name sign where only a single Street Name sign is provided for the crossroad, the block or house numbers for the left and right blocks should be positioned at the left and right sides of the sign, respectively.
-. Violation of any of the rules may result in cancellation of future reservations for the offending organization.
+If block numbers are displayed on a Street Name sign where two Street Name signs are provided for the crossroad, such as on diagonally opposite corners of an intersection, each Street Name sign should display only the block or house numbers associated with that block of the crossroad.
-There have been a number of other safety stops operating adjacent to highway right of way.  Signing for such stops shall be placed on State right of way.
+'''Option.''' MoDOT does not display pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.3.2|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) on street name signs. However, local jurisdictions who elect to install and maintain internally illuminated street name signs on MoDOT signals, under an agreement with MoDOT, may display a pictograph representing the municipality, in accordance with the provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]].
-The SAFETY BREAK FREE COFFEE (D5-16a) sign shall be used for safety stops at all rest areas on freeways.  One sign for each direction of travel shall be mounted beneath the existing advance directional sign for the rest area.  This sign shall only be visible to the motorists during the time the facility is in operation and then removed.
+'''Standard.''' Pictographs shall not be displayed on Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs (see [[#903.4.41|EPG 903.4.41]]).
-'''Guidance.'''  Special care should be taken before approval is given in roadside parks and scenic turnouts to insure that adequate parking facilities are available.
+If a pictograph is used on a D3-1 sign, the height and width of the pictograph shall not exceed the upper-case letter height of the principal legend of the sign.
-'''Support.'''  A "flip-down" sign is also available.
+The bicycle symbol shall not be used on a Street Name sign.
-==='''903.7.54 BUSINESS DISTRICT and INDUSTRIAL PARK Signs (I-15 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.45e)===
+'''Guidance. '''The pictograph should be positioned to the left of the street name.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:I15-1.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''I15-1'''</center>|115px]]||[[image:I15-2.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''I15-2'''</center>|115px]]
-|}
-'''Option.'''  The BUSINESS DISTRICT (I15-1) sign may be erected on a highway within the city limits at the principal intersection leading to the central business district.
+Pictographs should not be used on a D3-1 sign that contains directional arrows.
-'''Standard.'''  If a route passes through the central business district, this sign shall not be used.
+'''Standard.''' The Street Name sign shall be retroreflective or illuminated in accordance with the provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]].
-'''Option.'''  The INDUSTRIAL PARK (I15-2) sign may be erected on a highway within the city limits at the principal intersection leading to the central industrial park when truck traffic tends to get lost or miss turns.
+'''Option. '''MoDOT only utilizes green as the background color for street name signs. However, MoDOT will consider a city request to use an alternative background color (see the second standard paragraph below) other than the standard guide sign color of green for MoDOT Street Name (D3-1) signs if the city agrees to fund the total cost of the sign replacement project.
-'''Guidance.'''  If used, the INDUSTRIAL PARK sign should be installed at first order signing for the most direct path and should be provided at no charge.
+'''Standard.''' Alternative background colors shall not be used for Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs (see [[#903.4.41|EPG 903.4.41]]).
-'''Standard.'''  If a route passes through the central industrial park, this sign shall not be used.
+The only acceptable alternative background colors for Street Name (D3-1) signs shall be blue, brown, or white. Regardless of whether green, blue, or brown is used as the background color for Street Name (D3-1) signs, the legend (and border, if used) shall be white. For Street Name signs that use a white background, the legend (and border, if used) shall be black.
-==='''903.7.55 Reference Locations Signs (D10-1 through D10-3) and Intermediate Reference Location Signs (D10-1a through D10-3a)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.46)===
+If a city requests to fund changing the color of a MoDOT street name sign, the following conditions shall be met:
+::A. MoDOT must first agree to the request and reserves the right to refuse based on engineering judgement.
+::B. The city shall be responsible for all costs associated with the sign replacement project.
+::C. The street name signs shall be designed by MoDOT and meet all other MoDOT street name design aspects.
+::D. Block numbers, pictographs or any other added legend beyond what MoDOT would normally display on the street name shall not be displayed on these street name signs as MoDOT will assume maintenance of the new signs once they are installed.
+::E. Only those street name signs within the city’s jurisdictional boundaries will be permitted to be altered.
+::F. All street name signs along the state corridor within the city’s jurisdiction shall all be upgraded to the alternate color at the same time, no partial upgrades will be permitted.
-'''Support.'''  Not used on conventional routes in Missouri.  Refer to [[903.8 Freeway and Expressway Guide Signs#903.8.64 Emergency Reference Markers (D10-5) (MUTCD Section 2E.54)|freeway/expressway emergency reference markers]].
+'''Option. '''Cities and counties may install MUTCD compliant Street Name signs on MoDOT right of way at non-signalized intersections, either on an independent post adjacent to and to the right of the STOP sign or installed on the MoDOT post above the STOP sign.
-==='''903.7.56 TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPEED Signs (I1-1)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.47)===
+'''Standard. '''If a city or county elects to install as street name sign above the MoDOT STOP sign, they shall first contact the local district office to make the request and to have their proposed attachment method approved, no contract or agreement is required. These installations shall meet the following criteria:
+::A. The installation of street name signs on MoDOT STOP signs must be approved by the appropriate MoDOT district.
+::B. Street name signs shall have a vertical clearance between 1 inch and 4 inches measured from the bottom of the Street Name sign to the top of the STOP sign.
+::C. The Street Name sign shall be mounted independently of the STOP sign, attaching only to the sign post and in no way connected to the STOP sign.
+::D. The installation shall not interfere with the maintenance of the STOP sign.
+::E. Only one Street Name sign shall be permitted for a side street, no street name sign is permitted for the state route, such installations shall be installed on a separate sign post.
+::F. Street name signs shall only be mounted above and not below the STOP sign.
+::G. The maintenance of the Street Name sign shall be the sole responsibility of the city or county, MoDOT will only maintain the sign post and the STOP sign.
+::H. The maximum width of a Street Name sign placed over a MoDOT STOP sign shall not exceed the width of the STOP sign, MoDOT will not upgrade existing STOP sign posts to allow for larger Street Name sign.  Wider street name signs shall be installed on a separate sign post.
+::I. Attachments to MoDOT STOP sign posts shall be accomplished by use of a bracket, U-channel posts stub, or other methods pre-approved by MoDOT.
+::J. The Street Name sign representing the side street shall be mounted with its face parallel to the street it is naming.
+::K. If the Stop sign has a ONE WAY signs mounted above it, such as on expressways, a city or county shall install their Street Name sign on a separate sign post.
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+The installation and maintenance of all street name sign installed on MoDOT right of way by a city or county, either as an independent installation or a street name sign installed over a MoDOT STOP sign shall be the responsibility of the city or county.
-==='''903.7.57	General Information Signs (I Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48)===
+Street name signs are the only form of route designation a city or county may install on MoDOT right of way, no other form of route designation is permitted.
-'''Support.'''  Of interest to the traveler, though not directly necessary for guidance, are numerous kinds of information that can properly be conveyed by general information signs.  They include such items as Missouri State line (I-2), City limit (I4-1, I4-2), unincorporated communities (I5-1), County line (I6-1), stream names (I-3), landmarks, and similar items of geographical interest, and safety and transportation-related messages.  Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs contains recreational and cultural interest area symbol signs that are sometimes used in combination with general information signs.
+Cities and counties are not permitted to install street name signs depicting anything other than the official street name of the roadway used by the US Postal service.  Street name signs for alternate street names, such as, honorary, historic or memorial street names shall not be installed on MoDOT right of way.
-'''Guidance.'''  General information signs should not be installed within a series of guide signs or at other equally critical locations, unless there are specific reasons for orienting the road user or identifying control points for activities that are clearly in the public interest.  On all such signs, the designs should be simple and dignified, devoid of any advertising and in general conformance with other guide signing.
+MoDOT reserves the right to remove and return any street names signs which are not installed correctly or interfere with the visibility of the STOP sign.
-'''Option.'''  Political jurisdiction logos may be placed on the political boundary general information signs.  The logo may have different colors and shapes but should be simple, dignified and devoid of any advertising.
+'''Option. '''At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names may be displayed on the same Street Name (D3-1) sign along with Type D directional arrows, except where one arrow would point in a direction opposing the flow of traffic on a one-way street or where a turn in the direction of the arrow is not allowed.
-'''Standard.'''  Except for political boundary and scenic by-way logos and signs, general information signs shall have white legends and borders on green rectangular-shaped backgrounds.
+'''Support.''' Information regarding the use of street names on supplemental plaques for use with intersection-related warning signs is contained in [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]].
-==='''903.7.58 City/County Limit Signs (I4, I5, I6 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48a)===
+Information regarding the identification of overcrossing and undercrossing roadways at grade separations is contained in [[903.8 General Information Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2H) #903.8.10|EPG 903.8.10]].
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+<center>
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.40}}
+{| class="wikitable"
+|+ '''Table 903.4.40''' Minimum Letter Heights on Street Name Signs
 |-
-|[[image:I4-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-1'''</center>|100px]]
+! rowspan="2" | Type of Mounting !! rowspan="2" | Type of Street or Highway !! rowspan="2" | Speed Limit !! colspan="2" | Recommended Minimum Letter Height *
-||[[image:I4-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-2'''</center>|100px]]
-||[[image:I4-2a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-2a'''</center>|100px]]
 |-
-||[[image:I5-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I5-1'''</center>|100px]]
+! Initial Upper-Case !! Lower-Case
-||[[image:I6-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I6-1'''</center>|100px]]
-|}
-'''Standard.'''  The City Limit (I4 series) signs shall be erected at the city limit of each incorporated area, at the point where the city limit crosses the right of way.
-The population of the I4 series signs shall be according to the latest U.S. Census published by the United States Department of Commerce or in accordance with a special census by the governor.
-The population shall not be shown on a Community Board (I5-1) sign.
-The County Line (I6 series) signs shall be erected on all routes at county lines.
-'''Guidance.'''  The County Line sign should not be erected at the state line.
-'''Support.'''  See [[903.13 Typical Signing Applications|EPG 903.13 Typical Signing Applications]] of City Limit signs.
-'''Option.'''  The Community Board (I5-1) sign may be erected at the entrance to an unincorporated community.
-A Speed Limit sign may be mounted above the community board if a reduced speed has been indicated by an engineering study.
-==='''903.7.59 Special Supplemental Signing''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48b)===
-'''Support.'''  Special supplemental signing policies contained in the following two articles refer to signs that are either modifications of existing MoDOT signs or special guide signs that have been approved for use.  In many cases these signs are provided by MoDOT at no cost, in several cases there is a cost sharing with the requestor for the installation of these special supplementary signs and some are the full cost of the requestor.
-'''Guidance.'''  Care should be taken when considering adding supplemental signs to make sure they do not interfere with or detract from regulatory, warning or guide signs.  Sufficient spacing, at least 800 ft. on freeways or expressways, should be allowed for drivers to be able to read and comprehend the sign messages.
-==='''903.7.60 Custom City/County Limit Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48c)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:I4-1a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-1a'''</center>|125px]]
+| Overhead || All types || All speed limits || 10 inches || 8 inches
-||[[image:I4-2b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-2b'''</center>|120px]]
-||[[image:I4-2c.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-2c'''</center>|135px]]
-|}
-'''Support.'''  Many cities and counties want to enhance their identity and presence to the traveling public.  A way to do this is by placing customized city or county limit signs in lieu of the MoDOT standard sign.  Standards have been developed, according to the MUTCD, as to what the signs will look like and what is allowed to be added to customize the signs.  Custom signs are not required at all city or county limits on the state system.
-Incorporated communities or counties are permitted to request that custom city limit signs be installed on the state system.
-'''Standard.''' The style of custom city limit signs that were installed prior to August 19, 1999 shall be allowed to remain thru January 1, 2007.  When signs erected prior to the above date require replacement for any reason (knock down, fading or a project), signs conforming to this current policy shall replace them.  Signs still in place on December 31, 2006 shall be replaced with signs conforming to this current policy or the standard city limit signs.
-MoDOT shall fabricate customized signs, for consistency, according to the standards described below.  Graphics or messages requested by the city or county shall have the approval of the department prior to fabrication.  The city or county shall be responsible for all costs associated with the fabrication and installation of these signs.
-The signs shall be white legend on a green background.  The signs shall be made of reflectorized material according to MoDOT standards.  Lettering on the signs shall be of the approved size and style as contained in the MUTCD for the type of facility where the signs will go.
-The left side of the signs shall be the standard message used on MoDOT supplied city or county limit signs, that is the wording “City Limit”, the name of the city and the population or “Entering” and name of county.  The right side of the sign, in a square area, dependent on the height of the sign, shall be where the city will be allowed to put their custom legend.  The use of a city logo or emblem shall be allowed.  Logos of individual organizations shall not be allowed.
-When a city or county elects to use a customized limit sign, MoDOT shall replace the standard sign with the custom sign.  If there is a need for a speed limit sign, the speed limit sign shall be installed the same as if a standard city limit sign were used.  MoDOT personnel shall perform installation of the customized city or county limit sign with all costs paid by the city or county.  The city or county shall also pay maintenance costs, such as replacement, washing, etc.  Lighting of these signs shall not be allowed.
-'''Guidance.'''  The [http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts/TR/TR15%20Signing%20Paid%20by%20Applicant.doc TR-15 contract] should be executed between the city or county and MoDOT before sign is installed.
-The legend of the sign should be simple, dignified and void of any commercial advertising.  Examples of acceptable “slogans” would be “Home of the Pintos”, “Truman’s Home” or “Home of the Maifest”.
-Landscaping around any of these signs should be coordinated and reviewed by the department’s roadside management personnel.
-==='''903.7.61 City/County Accomplishment Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48d)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:I4-1b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-1b'''</center>|200px]]
+| Overhead - Two Line || All Types || All Speed Limits || 6 inches || 4.5 inches
-||[[image:I4-2d.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I4-2d'''</center>|200px]]
-|}
-'''Support.'''  Many cities and counties want to announce the academic and/or athletic accomplishments of their local schools.
-'''Option.'''  A city may elect to recognize the academic and athletic accomplishments of their schools by placing a maximum of 3 supplemental signs under the custom or standard city limit sign and a county may place a maximum of 2 supplemental signs under the custom or standard county line sign.  In order to accommodate legends with a sizeable amount of text, several plaques may be used for the message.
-'''Standard.'''  Supplemental signs, according to the following guidelines, shall be allowed only under city/county limit or custom city/county signs.  The city or county shall select the accomplishments to be displayed with MoDOT’s concurrence.
-Each sign shall be variable by 12 in. with a maximum width of 60 in. for flat sheet and 120 in. for structural.
-If a new accomplishment plaque is requested and the maximum amount already exists, one plaque shall be removed to accommodate a new one.
-Signs shall be white legend on green background.  All minimum ground clearance and breakaway requirements shall be followed.  No commercial advertising or business logos shall be permitted.
-All cost for fabrication and installation of the panels shall be paid for by the city.  Department forces shall fabricate and install these signs.  Any maintenance costs, such as replacement, washing, etc. shall be paid by the city.
-'''Guidance.'''  When several plaques are used to accommodate legends with a sizeable amount of text the sum of square footage of 3 supplemental plaques is not to be exceeded for cities and 2 supplemental plaques for counties.
-==='''903.7.62 Welcome To Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48e)===
-'''Option.'''  Cities may place Welcome To signs on MoDOT right of way to welcome visitors to their community when their city limits encompass the intersection.  Welcome To signs may be made retroreflective.
-'''Standard.'''  Welcome To signs shall fit on one or two MoDOT break a way sign posts (wood, PSST, pipe, structural), shall not be illuminated electrically, and shall not contain advertisement of any kind.
-'''Guidance.'''  Welcome To signs should be installed in a location that does not interfere with normal highway signs and posses the least possible threat to the motorist should they leave the roadway.
-The district should consider an agreement or at least a permit that would be tied to the installation of Welcome To signs.  Issues such as locating utilities and maintenance of the Welcome To sign should be addressed.
-'''Support.'''  The content and design of the sign face is up to the community.
-==='''903.7.63 STATE LINE Signs (I-2, I-2a)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48f)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:I-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-2'''</center>|125px]]||
+| Signal Column or Pedestal Base || All Types || All Speed Limits || 6 inches || 4.5 inches
-[[image:I-2a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-2a'''</center>|195px]]
-|}
-'''Standard.'''  The MISSOURI STATE LINE (I-2) sign shall be erected at the state line on all lettered routes.
-The large Welcome to Missouri (I-2a) sign shall be erected at or near the state line on numbered routes where the traffic volume is 1,000 AADT or greater.  The smaller sign shall be erected at or near the state line on numbered routes where the traffic volume is less than 1,000 AADT.
-'''Guidance.'''  At locations where it may be impractical to erect the Welcome to Missouri sign at, or near the state line, the MISSOURI STATE LINE sign should be used.  At such locations the Welcome to Missouri sign shall be erected in addition to the MISSOURI STATE LINE sign, preferable within ¼ mile of the state line.
-'''Option.'''  The MISSOURI STATE LINE sign may be erected on other routes where it is impractical to use the Welcome to Missouri sign.
-==='''903.7.64 Stream Name Signs (I-3)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48g)===
-[[image:I-3.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''I-3'''</center>|120px]]
-'''Guidance.'''  Stream Name (I-3) signs should be erected at all bridge type structures, excluding box culverts, on the interstate and all numbered routes where the official name can be determined.  If the name of the stream cannot be determined, the Stream Name sign should be omitted.
-'''Standard.'''  In those cases where signing for a body of water, which is a part of, or connected to, a lake, names such as branch, river, creek, etc. shall be incorporated in the sign as required.  A typical example of this type of signing would be “LAKE OF THE OZARKS-OSAGE RIVER”.
-==='''903.7.65 Transportation Signs (I-5, I-7, E14-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48h)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:I-5.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-5'''</center>|100px]]
+| colspan="5" style="background-color: #ffffff;" | * Letter heights are shown for the street name. Descriptors or other supplementary legend may be displayed in smaller lettering of at least 3 inches.<br><br>Notes:<br><ol style="margin-left: 1.2em;padding-left: 0;"><li>MoDOT's overhead street name sign legend  controlled by signal structure limitations.</li><li>MoDOT only installs street name signs at signalized intersections.</li><ol>
-||[[image:I-7.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''I-7'''</center>]]||[[image:E14-2.gif|left|200px|thumb|<center>'''E14-2'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Option.'''  Guide signs for commercial service airports may be provided from the nearest Interstate, or other freeway intersection directly to the airport, normally not to exceed 15 miles.  The Airport (I-5) symbol sign along with a supplemental plaque may be used to indicate the specific name of the airport.  An Airport symbol sign, with or without a supplemental name plaque or the word AIRPORT, and an arrow may be used as a trailblazer.
-'''Standard.'''  Adequate trailblazer signs shall be in place prior to installing the airport guide signs.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.41}}903.4.41  Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.46)==
+[[File:D3-2.png|thumb|center|400px|alt=|<center>'''D3-2'''</center>]]
-'''Support.'''  Location and placement of all airport guide signs depends upon the availability of longitudinal spacing on highways.
+'''Support. '''Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs identify a downstream intersection. Although this is often the next intersection, it could also be several intersections away in cases where the next signalized intersection is referenced.
-'''Standard.'''  When a sign is used to display a safety or transportation-related message, the display format shall not be of a type that would be considered similar to advertising displays.  Messages and symbols that resemble any official traffic control device shall not be used on safety or transportation-related message signs.
+'''Standard. '''Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs, if used, shall supplement rather than be used instead of the Street Name (D3-1) signs at the intersection.
-The Amtrak Station (I-7) sign shall not be installed if a city will not provide supplemental signing for these locations.
+'''Option. '''Advance Street Name (D3-2) signs may be installed in advance of unsignalized intersections within a corridor of signalized intersections which has Advance Street Name signs to provide road users with advance information to identify the name(s) of the next intersecting street to prepare for crossing traffic and to facilitate timely deceleration and/or lane changing in preparation for a turn.
-The Amtrak Station and the appropriate M6 series arrow shall be used for ramp signs.
+Special consideration may be given to isolated unsignalized intersections where it can be established that safety problems exist, and installation of this type of signing would be beneficial.
-'''Guidance.'''  The Amtrak Station sign should be compatible with the color and size of existing signing design.
+'''Guidance. '''On arterial highways in rural areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections and in advance of all intersections with mandatory turn lanes.
-'''Support.'''  The Amtrak Station sign is a supplemental guide sign of variable size.
+In urban areas, Advance Street Name signs should be used in advance of all signalized intersections on divided highways, major arterial streets, or other routes as determined by the district, except where signalized intersections are so closely spaced that advance placement of the signs is impracticable.
-==='''903.7.66 Roadside Improvement Signs (I9-1, I9-2, I9-3)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48i)===
+If there is concern that the action message for Advance Street Name signs for unsignalized intersections could be misleading due to other entrances in the area or the sight distance to the intersection is limited, then the action message should be the distance shown to the nearest 100 ft.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+Advance Street Name sign placement should be one-half or one-quarter mile in advance of the signal or intersection. In the event of closely spaced signals, this sign should be located immediately beyond the adjacent signalized or unsignalized intersection.
-|-
-|[[image:I9-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I9-1'''</center>|100px]]
-||[[image:I9-2.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''I9-2'''</center>]]||[[image:I9-3.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''I9-3'''</center>]]
-|}
+The heights of the letters on Advance Street Name signs should comply with the provisions of [[#903.4.5|EPG 903.4.5]].
-'''Support.'''  For the ADOPT-A-HIGHWAY (I9-1, I9-1a, I9-1b, I9-1c), GROWING TOGETHER (I9-2) and WILDFLOWER AREA (I9-3) signs please refer to the MoDOT Maintenance manual for program rules.
-==='''903.7.67 HISTORIC DOWNTOWN Signs'''===
+'''Standard. '''If used, Advance Street Name signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background. Alternative background colors shall not be used on Advance Street Name signs.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:E11-1b.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D7-15'''</center>|110px]]
-||[[image:D7-10a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''D7-14'''</center>|180px]]||[[image:D7-14a.jpg|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''D7-14a'''</center>]]
-|}
-'''Standard.'''  Historic Downtown Signs have been discontinued.  MoDOT shall no longer provide signing for the historic business district of a community.
-Existing Historic Downtown Signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.
+If used for signalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top line(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and (or) NEXT SIGNAL.
-'''Option.'''  Signing for Historic Downtown Districts may be accomplished through the TODS ([[903.10 Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs|EPG 903.10]]) or Logo ([[903.9 Specific Service Signs|EPG 903.9]]) programs.
+If used for unsignalized intersections, Advance Street Name signs shall provide the name(s) of the intersecting street(s) on the top lines(s) of the legend and messages such as the abbreviation for junction (JCT) and a route shield if the cross street is a state highway and an action message. The recommended action message for these signs is NEXT INTERSECTION or NEXT ROUNDABOUT. When the Advance Street Name sign is provided for at the junction of a state highway, the Advance Street Name sign shall replace the existing junction assembly.
-==='''903.7.68	Ferry Crossing Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48k)===
+The installation of an Advance Street Name sign for an unsignalized intersection shall be a supplement to any Street Name signing provided by others.
-'''Option.'''  Directional information signs may be provided for ferry crossings.
+Pictographs shall not be displayed on Advance Street Name signs.
-'''Guidance.'''  To qualify for signing, a ferry crossing should meet the following guidelines:
+'''Option. '''Directional arrow(s) may be placed to the right or left of the street name or message such as NEXT SIGNAL, as appropriate, rather than on the bottom line of the legend. Curved-stem arrows may be used on Advance Street Name signs on approaches to circular intersections.
-A.  The owner of the ferry should operate the boat weather permitting during the following periods:
+For intersecting crossroads where the same road has a different street name for each direction of travel, the different street names may be displayed on the same Advance Street Name sign along with directional arrows.
-:1.  Hours of operation are generally sunrise to sunset, five days a week.
+In advance of two closely-spaced intersections where it is impracticable to install separate Advance Street Name signs, the Advance Street Name sign may include the street names for both intersections along with appropriate supplemental legends for both street names, such as NEXT INTERSECTION, 2ND INTERSECTION, or NEXT LEFT and NEXT RIGHT, or directional arrows.
-:2.  Operating season is March 15 through December 15.
+'''Guidance. '''If two street names are used on the Advance Street Name sign, the street names should be displayed in the following order:
-:3.  The operator should be responsible to notify the Missouri State Highway Patrol or the local district office when conditions will not allow a day or more of normal operation.
+::A. For a single intersection where the same road has a different street name for each direction of travel, the name of the street to the left should be displayed above the name of the street to the right; or
-B.  The ferryboat operation should be U.S. Coast Guard inspected and certified.
+::B. For two closely-spaced intersections, the name of the first street encountered should be displayed above the name of the second street encountered, and the arrow associated with the second street encountered should be an advance arrow, such as the arrow shown on the W16-6P arrow plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.61|EPG 903.3.61]]).
-The department should provide a maximum of third order generic signing (i.e.. “Toll Ferry to Il").  The signs should be considered as a supplemental sign if installed on freeways.
-Signs should be white reflectorized border and legend on a green reflectorized background for all roadway systems.   It should be the responsibility of the local jurisdiction(s) to provide all supplemental signing over city or county roadways leading to the ferry crossings.
+'''Option.''' An Advance Street Name (W16-8P or W16-8aP) plaque (see [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.64|EPG 903.3.64]]) with black legend on a yellow background, installed to supplement an Intersection (W2 series) or Advance Traffic Control (W3 series) warning sign may be used instead of an Advance Street Name guide sign.
-When a ferry is seasonally operated, a Commission furnished sign shall be installed to indicate when the ferry in not in operation for the season
+=={{SpanID|903.4.42}}903.4.42  Parking Area Guide Sign (D4-1, D4-1P, and D4-1a) (MUTCD Section 2D.47)==
+<center>
-==='''903.7.69	Missouri Regional Port Authorities''' (MUTCD Section 2D.48L)===
+{|
+| [[File:D4-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D4-1'''</center>]]
-'''Support.'''  Signing for port authorities is done with coordination with [http://wwwi/intranet/mo/ Multimodal].  For more information contact Multimodal.
+| [[File:D4-1P.gif|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''D4-1P'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D4-1a.gif|thumb|center|120px|alt=|<center>'''D4-1a'''</center>]]
-==='''903.7.70 Signing of Named Highways (M11-1, M11-2)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.49)===
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-|-
-|[[image:M11-1.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M11-1'''</center>|100px]]
-||[[image:M11-2.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M11-2'''</center>|100px]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Support.'''  At times the department is approached about giving names, other than route designations, to bridges or sections of highways.  The following policy provides the framework for handling requests for the naming of state facilities.
+'''Option. '''The Parking Area (D4-1) guide sign may be used to show the direction to a nearby public parking area or parking facility.
-Section 229.222, RSMo, allows cities, counties or villages to name roads within their jurisdictions for any law enforcement officer who was killed in the line of duty.
+The sign may also be used in all MoDOT commuter parking lots.
-'''Standard.'''  A directive for naming shall come through the action of the General Assembly.
+'''Standard. '''The parking area shall be owned or operated by a public agency in order to be signed.
-In the event a bridge or highway has a recognized name, another bridge or highway shall need to be selected.
+The COMMUTER (D4-1P) plaque shall be mounted above the Parking Area sign at commuter parking lots. If used, the sign shall be a horizontal rectangle. The legend and border shall be green on a retroreflectorized white background.
-Signing shall consist of one shoulder mounted sign at each end of the bridge or section of highway.  The naming signs shall be the standard MoDOT M11-1 or M11-2 consisting of white legend on a green background.  The signs shall use MoDOT standard retroreflective sheeting.  Legend on the signs shall use a 6 in. letter height with a maximum of 3 lines of text.  When a named section of highway crosses two or more county lines, consideration shall be given to allowing additional signing at the county lines or major intersections.
+COMMUTER PARKING (D4-1a) signs shall be utilized in each commuter parking area mounted back-to-back. One sign shall face the Interstate and the other will face the parking lot such that the maximum number of motorists on either side of the assembly can read the legend.
-MoDOT shall erect and maintain signs provided under this policy.
+In addition, Commuter Parking Lot Restriction signs shall be erected at or near each entrance to the commuter parking lot.
-Where such memorial signs are installed on the mainline, (1) memorial names shall not appear on directional guide signs, (2) memorial signs shall not interfere with the placement of any other necessary highway signing, and (3) memorial signs shall not compromise the safety or efficiency of traffic flow.  The memorial signing shall be limited to one sign at an appropriate location in each route direction.
+'''Guidance. '''If used, the Parking Area (D4-1) guide sign should be installed as 1st order signing to the parking facility and where it can advise drivers of a place to park. The sign should not be used more than four blocks from the parking area.
-Highway names shall not replace official numeral designations.  Memorial names shall not appear on supplemental signs or on any other information sign either on or along the highway or its intersecting routes.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.43}}903.4.43  PARK - RIDE Sign (D4-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.48)==
+[[File:D4-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D4-2'''</center>]]
-The use of route signs shall be restricted to signs officially used for guidance of traffic according to this Manual and the “Purpose and Policy” statement of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials that applies to Interstate and U.S. numbered routes (see EPG 903.19.11.2 for AASHTO’s address).
+'''Option. '''A PARK - RIDE (D4-2) sign may be used to direct road users to park-and-ride facilities.
-The city, county, or village shall be allowed to erect and maintain on MoDOT right of way standard naming signs as described previously in this section.  The city, county or village shall be responsible for the full cost of manufacture, erection, and maintenance of these signs.  Location of these sign shall be at the approval of MoDOT.
+The PARK - RIDE signs may be used in lieu of the Parking sign when a public transit stop is located within the commuter parking lot.
-'''Guidance.'''  Only one name should be used to identify any highway, whether numbered or unnumbered.
+'''Standard. '''The signs shall display the word message PARK - RIDE and direction information (arrow or word message).
-==='''903.7.71	Veterans Signing''' (MUTCD Section 2D.49a)===
+'''Option. '''PARK - RIDE signs may display the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol.
-'''Standard.'''  MoDOT shall provide signing for Veterans cemeteries in Missouri.  The cemeteries shall be owned and operated by either the Department of Veterans Affairs, for national cemeteries or the Missouri Veterans Commission, for state cemeteries.  First order signing, on the state system, shall be provided for all cemeteries that meet the above upon request.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol shall be located in the top part of the sign above the message PARK - RIDE. In no case shall the vertical dimension of the local transit pictograph and/or carpool symbol exceed 18 inches.
-The Missouri Veterans Commission shall be responsible for MoDOT’s cost to fabricate and install Veteran Home signs.  First order signing, on the state system, shall be provided for all veterans’ homes that meet the above upon request.
+'''Guidance. '''If the function of the parking facility is to provide parking for persons using public transportation, the local transit pictograph should be used on the guide sign. If the function of the parking facility is to serve carpool riders, the carpool symbol should be used on the guide sign. If the parking facility serves both functions, both the pictograph and carpool symbol should be used. If used, the public transit pictograph should be of the same design as the local transit authority, however, the local transit authority name should not be a part of this sign.
-'''Option.'''  Second order signing may be considered if there is an intersection of a state route or an interchange within 6 miles of the cemetery.
-Signing may be allowed for veterans’ homes that are owned and operated by the Missouri Veterans commission.
+The COMMUTER (D4-1P) plaque should be mounted below this sign.
-Second order signing may be considered if there is an intersection of a state route or an interchange within 6 miles of the veterans’ home.
+'''Standard. '''These signs shall have a white legend and border on a rectangular green background. The carpool symbol shall be as shown for the D4-2 sign. The color of the local transit pictograph shall be selected by the local transit authority.
-==='''903.7.72 College Signing Policy'''===
+'''Option. '''To increase the target value and contrast of the local transit pictograph, and to allow the local transit pictograph to retain its distinctive color and shape, the pictograph may be included within a white border or placed on a white background.
-MoDOT uses two methods for signing colleges and universities on freeways and expressways.  College generator signs are used to sign the main campuses of traditional 4-year colleges and theological schools and seminaries.  College emblem signs are used to sign traditional 2-year colleges including community colleges, professional/technical schools, extension sites and satellite campuses.  College emblem signs may also be used for qualifying 4-year and theological colleges if the institution wishes.  No college, however, shall be granted both college generator signs and college emblem signs.  Both college generator and college emblem signs shall only be used for signing that would originate at interchanges on freeways and expressways (up to [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.11 Sign Classification (MUTCD Section 2A.05)|3rd order]]).  For signing that would originate at at-grade intersections, refer to [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing (at-grade intersections)|EPG 903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing]].
+=={{SpanID|903.4.44}}903.4.44  Signing on Conventional Roads on Approaches to Interchanges (MUTCD Section 2D.49)==
-To qualify for college generator or college emblem signing, the appropriate criteria outlined below must be met.
+'''Support. '''Because there are a number of different ramp configurations that are commonly used at interchanges with conventional roads, drivers on the conventional road cannot reliably predict whether they will be required to turn left or right in order to enter the correct ramp to access the freeway or expressway in the desired direction of travel. Consistently applied signing for conventional road approaches to freeway or expressway interchanges is highly desirable.
-====903.7.72.1 College Generator Signing (grade-separated interchanges only)====
+'''Standard. '''On multi-lane conventional roads approaching an interchange, guide signs shall be provided to identify which direction of turn is to be made and/or which specific lane to use for ramp access to each direction of the freeway or expressway.
-[[image:E12-1a.gif|center|165px]]
+'''Guidance. '''The signing of conventional roads with one lane of traffic approaching an interchange should consist of a sequence containing the following signs (see [[#fig903.4.44.1|Figure 903.4.44.1]]):
-College generator signs are allowed at interchanges on freeways and expressways for qualifying colleges.  These signs shall not be used for at-grade intersections.  For signing at-grade intersections, refer to [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing (at-grade intersections)|EPG 903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing]].
+::A. Junction Assembly
-The following requirements shall be met for a college to receive college generator signs:
+::B. Destination sign
-* The college shall be identified by the [http://www.dhe.mo.gov/degreesearch.shtml Missouri Department of Higher Education] as one of the following types of schools:
+::C. Directional Assembly or Entrance Direction sign for the first ramp
-::* Public 4-year
+::D. Advance Route Turn Assembly or Advance Entrance Direction sign with an advance turn arrow
-::* Independent 4-year
-::* Theological
-* The college shall offer, at a minimum, a 4-year bachelor’s degree or master’s degree accredited by an organization recognized by the U.S. Department of Education or by the [http://www.chea.org/pdf/CHEA_USDE_AllAccred.pdf Council for Higher Education].
+::E. Directional Assembly or Entrance Direction sign for the second ramp
-* The site being signed shall be the primary campus of the college.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the Entrance Direction sign shall consist of a white legend and border on a green background. It shall contain the freeway or expressway route shield(s), cardinal direction, and directional arrow(s).
-* The site being signed shall have housing on campus.
+'''Option. '''The Entrance Direction sign may contain a destination(s) and/or an action message such as NEXT RIGHT.
-* The site being signed shall offer traditional, face-to-face classroom settings between students and faculty as a primary source of education.  Web-based or telecommunication centers do not meet this requirement.
+At interchanges where right-of-way is restricted, the following alternate sequence of signs may be used (see [[#fig903.4.44.2|Figure 903.4.44.2]]):
-* The primary purpose of the site shall be for educational classes and not for administrative operations.
+::A. Junction Assembly
-Colleges meeting the above criteria qualify for college generator signing up to 3rd order.  The college shall be within 20 miles of the interchange being signed, and shall be limited to one sign per direction per route.  Signs are not required to be at the same interchange.  In addition, there shall be no signs installed directing traffic from freeway to freeway or from expressway to freeway (Ex:  I-270 to I-44).  A freeway shall be defined as a multi-lane highway with full access control and only grade separated intersections.  An expressway shall be defined as a multi-lane highway with some limited access such as at-grade intersections, but without driveways and private entrances.  Any exceptions shall be approved by the State Traffic Engineer.
+::B. Directional Assembly for the first ramp
-The college shall pay a fee for the signs covering the costs of materials, fabrication, installation, and maintenance for 10 years.  Maintenance over the 10-year period includes any necessary repairs or replacement.  After 10 years, the signs will either be removed or renewed for another fee.  All fees are to be determined by Traffic.  Logos used on the signs should be the typical logo used by the school to represent their academic programs and shall be approved by [http://wwwi/intranet/tr/ Traffic].  Logos shall be designed using standard highway signing colors with a maximum of three colors being used.  All logos may be modified by Traffic for production purposes.  Logos shall only be used on mainline signs.
+::C. Directional Assembly for the second ramp
-If more than one college qualifies and requests generator signs at the same interchange, these colleges shall be combined onto the same sign, with a maximum of three colleges on one sign.
+'''Guidance. '''On multi-lane conventional roads approaching an interchange, the sign sequence should contain the following signs (see [[#fig903.4.44.3|Figures 903.4.44.3]] through [[#fig903.4.44.5|903.4.44.5]]):
-Trailblazers for college generator signing shall consist of standard college destination signs.  The signs shall not contain logos and will include the name of the college with the appropriate arrow.
+::A. Junction Assembly
-====903.7.72.2 College Emblem Signing (grade-separated interchanges only)====
+::B. Advance Entrance Direction sign(s) for both directions (if applicable) of travel on the freeway or expressway
-[[image:903.7.72.2.jpg|center|165px]]
+::C. Entrance Direction sign for first ramp
-College emblem signs are allowed at interchanges on freeways and expressways for qualifying colleges.  These signs shall not be used for at-grade intersections.  For signing at-grade intersections, refer to [[903.7 Conventional Road Guide Signs#903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing (at-grade intersections)|EPG 903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing]].
+::D. Advance Turn Assembly
-The following requirements shall be met for a college to receive college emblem signs:
+::E. Entrance Direction sign for the second ramp
-* The college shall be recognized by the [http://www.dhe.mo.gov/degreesearch.shtml Missouri Department of Higher Education].
+'''Support. '''Advance Entrance Direction signs are used to direct road users to the appropriate lane(s).
-* The college shall offer, at a minimum, a 2-year associate’s degree accredited by an organization recognized by the U.S. Department of Education or by the [http://www.chea.org/pdf/CHEA_USDE_AllAccred.pdf Council for Higher Education].
-* The site being signed shall offer traditional, face-to-face classroom settings between students and faculty as a primary source of education.  Web-based or telecommunication centers do not meet this requirement.
-* The primary purpose of the site shall be for educational classes and not for administrative operations.
-Colleges meeting the above criteria qualify for college emblem signing up to 3rd order.  The college shall be within 20 miles of the interchange being signed, and shall be limited to one sign per direction per route.  Signs are not required to be at the same interchange.  In addition, there shall be no signs installed directing traffic from freeway to freeway or from expressway to freeway (Ex:  I-270 to I-44).  A freeway shall be defined as a multi-lane highway with full access control and only grade separated intersections.  An expressway shall be defined as a multi-lane highway with limited access such as at-grade intersections, but without driveways and private entrances.  Any exceptions shall be approved by the State Traffic Engineer.
+'''Standard. '''The Advance Entrance Direction sign shall consist of a white legend and border on a green background. It shall contain the freeway or expressway route shield(s) and cardinal direction(s).
-The college shall pay a fee for the signs covering the costs of materials, fabrication, installation, and maintenance for 10 years.  Maintenance over the 10-year period includes any necessary repairs or replacement.  After 10 years, the signs will either be removed or renewed for another fee.  All fees are to be determined by Traffic.
+'''Option. '''The Advance Entrance Direction sign may have destinations, directional arrows, and/or an action message such as KEEP LEFT, NEXT LEFT, or SECOND RIGHT. Signs in this sequence may be mounted overhead to improve visibility as shown in [[#fig903.4.44.3|Figures 903.4.44.3]] through [[#fig903.4.44.5|903.4.44.5]].
-Emblems used on the signs shall be restricted to a 36 in. x 48 in. area and may consist of the typical logo used to represent the college’s academic programs and any legend necessary for adequate identification.  Emblems shall be designed using standard highway signing colors with a maximum of three colors being used.  All emblems shall be approved by Traffic and may be modified for production purposes.
+'''Support. '''A post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction diagrammatic sign (see [[#fig903.4.44.6|Figure 903.4.44.6]]), within the sequence of approach guide signing described in the first and second guidance paragraphs of this Article, might be helpful in depicting the location of a freeway or expressway entrance ramp that is in close proximity to an intervening intersection on the same side of the approach roadway and where signing for only the ramp might cause confusion to road users.
-No emblem sign shall contain more than 6 colleges and no interchange shall contain more than one emblem sign.
+'''Standard. '''If used, the post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction diagrammatic sign shall display only the two successive turns from the same side of the roadway, one of which shall be the entrance ramp. The post-mounted Advance Entrance Direction sign shall depict only the successive turns and shall not depict lane use with lane lines, multiple arrow shafts for the approach roadway, action messages, or other representations.
-In the event that an interchange requires a college generator sign and a college emblem sign, yet has insufficient spacing to accommodate both, colleges using the generator signs should be incorporated into the emblem signing if possible.  Four-year colleges and theological schools and seminaries may choose to use the emblem signs over generators.
+'''Support. '''Example guide signing for a transposed-alignment crossroad at a diverging diamond interchange is shown in [[#fig903.4.44.7|Figure 903.4.44.7]]. Example guide signing for a single-point urban intersection at a diamond interchange is shown in [[#fig903.4.44.8|Figure 903.4.44.8]].
-Trailblazers for college emblem signing shall consist of a 30 in. x 24 in. replica of the emblem used on the mainline sign.  These signs shall be accompanied by the appropriate arrow.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.1}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.1 Example of Interchange Crossroad Guide Signing for a One-Lane Approach.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of a vertical roadway, with the travel direction from the bottom to the top of the figure, are shown. The roadway is shown crossing a multi-lane horizontal highway.The interchange between the two is shown as a diamond-shaped ramp configuration. A series of five red and blue, and green interchange crossroad guide signs and sign assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical roadway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the roadway.
+|'''Figure 903.4.44.1''' Example of Interchange Crossroad Guide Signing for a One-Lane Approach]]
-====903.7.72.3 College Destination Signing (at-grade intersections)====
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.2}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.2 Example of Alternate Interchange Crossroad Guide Signing in Areas with Restricted Right-of-Way.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of a vertical roadway and a multi-lane horizontal highway are shown. The interchange between the two is shown as a diamond-shaped ramp configuration. A series of three interstate route marker assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical roadway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the roadway.
+|'''Figure 903.4.44.2''' Example of Alternate Interchange Crossroad Guide Signing in Areas with Restricted Right-of-Way]]
-[[image:903.7.72.3.jpg|center|165px]]
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.3}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.3 Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Guide Signing for a Diamond Interchange.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of two multi-lane highways, a highway running vertically and horizontally, are shown. The interchange between the two highways is shown as a diamond-shaped ramp configuration.  A series of four red and blue, and green interchange crossroad guide signs and sign assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical roadway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the roadway.|'''Figure 903.4.44.3''' Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Guide Signing for a Diamond Interchange]]
-College destination signs may be used for colleges qualifying for generator or emblem signs, but whose signs would originate at an at-grade intersection as opposed to an interchange.  These signs are intended for colleges who are too far away from an interchange, but otherwise meet all necessary requirements to receive college signs.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.4}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.4 Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Guide Signing for a Partial Cloverleaf Interchange.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of two multi-lane highways, a highway running vertically and horizontally, are shown. The interchange between the two highways is shown as a partial cloverleaf to the left of the vertical highway. A series of two green crossroad guide signs and sign assemblies and two interstate route marker assemblys are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical highway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the highway or over the roadway.|'''Figure 903.4.44.4''' Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Guide Signing for a Partial Cloverleaf Interchange]]
-College destination signs may be used up to [[903.1 Extent of Signing#903.1.11 Sign Classification (MUTCD Section 2A.05)|3rd order]] and the college shall be within 20 miles of the intersection being signed.  College destination signs or their trailblazers shall not contain any logos.  Destination signs shall contain the name of the college with the appropriate arrow directing traffic to the location.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.5}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.5 Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Signing for a Cloverleaf Interchange.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Two highways, a highway running vertically and horizontally, are shown. The interchange between the two highways is shown as a cloverleaf. A series of five green crossroad signs and sign assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical highway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the highway or over the roadway.|'''Figure 903.4.44.5''' Examples of Multi-Lane Crossroad Signing for a Cloverleaf Interchange]]
-The college shall pay a fee for the signs covering the costs of materials, fabrication, installation, and maintenance for 10 years.  Maintenance over the 10-year period includes any necessary repairs or replacement.  After 10 years, the signs will either be removed or renewed for another fee.  All fees are to be determined by [http://wwwi/intranet/tr/ Traffic].
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.6}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.6 Example of Crossroad Guide Signing for an Entrance Ramp with a Nearby Frontage Road.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of a vertical roadway, with the travel direction from the bottom to the top of the example, are shown. The roadway is shown crossing a multi-lane horizontal highway. The interchange between the two highways is shown as the bottom half of a diamond-shaped ramp configuration. A horizontal “frontage road” is shown to the right of the vertical roadway in advance of the interchange ramps. A series of two crossroad guide signs and sign assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical roadway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown to the right of the roadway. The first sign is shown as a blue directional assembly and the second as a green guide sign are shown in advance of the frontage road.|'''Figure 903.4.44.6''' Example of Crossroad Guide Signing for an Entrance Ramp with a Nearby Frontage Road]]
-College destination signs will also be used as trailblazers for the college generator signs.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.7}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.7 Example of Transposed Alignment Crossroad Guide Signing at a Diverging Diamond Interchange.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Segments of two multi-lane highways, a highway running vertically and horizontally, are shown. The interchange between the two highways is shown as a diamond ramp configuration. A series of five blue and white interstate route marker and/“OR” green crossroad guide signs and sign assemblies are shown for one direction of travel along the vertical diamond highway from the bottom to the top of the figure. They are shown along either side of the diamond highway traveling northbound crossing over the horizontal highway and beyond.|'''Figure 903.4.44.7''' Example of Transposed Alignment Crossroad Guide Signing at a Diverging Diamond Interchange]]
-====903.7.72.4 Transitioning to the New Policy====
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.44.8}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.44.8 Example of Crossroad Intersection Guide Signs for a Single-Point Urban Interchange.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=A six-lane vertical roadway is shown above a six-lane horizontal roadway. The interchange between the two highways is shown with multiple crossroad intersections, which are displayed as multi-lane on-ramps and exit ramps to and from both highways. At the bottom of the example, overhead destination/directional guide signs are shown extending over the travel lanes for the traffic traveling northbound on the vertical roadway and crossing over the southbound lanes to the westbound on-ramp lanes of the horizontal roadway. |'''Figure 903.4.44.8''' Example of Crossroad Intersection Guide Signs for a Single-Point Urban Interchange]]
-Effective, 01/01/08, all college signing requests shall be governed by this policy.  Existing signing under contracts executed prior to this policy shall be honored in full unless the college wishes to transition to the new policy prior to the expiration of their contract.  At expiration of those existing contracts, the colleges shall be governed by this policy for any future signing.  All existing signing not under contract shall be transitioned to this policy at the end of its useful life cycle.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.45}}903.4.45  WEIGH STATION Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.51)==
+<center>
-Existing college signing at a particular interchange or intersection may also be transitioned to the new policy if circumstances require changes to any college signing at that given interchange/intersection.  Such changes may include but are not limited to:  an additional college being signed, changes (direction, logos, names, etc.) to existing college signs, the removal of existing college signs, geometric changes to the interchange or intersection or needed replacement of existing college signing due to knockdowns, vandalism, etc.  If such transition is made for a college with existing signs, the new signing shall be provided at a pro-rated fee determined by [http://wwwi/intranet/tr/ Traffic].
+{|
+| [[File:D8-1.gif|thumb|center|125px|alt=|<center>'''D8-1'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D8-2.png|thumb|center|200px|alt=|<center>'''D8-2'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D8-3.gif|thumb|center|150px|alt=|<center>'''D8-3'''</center>]]
+|}
+</center>
-==='''903.7.73 Correctional Center Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.49c)===
+'''Support. '''Independent facilities or areas have been added along many highways where certain commercial vehicles are directed to stop to be weighed and/or inspected. These areas are sometimes permanent, such as in a roadside area, or temporary mobile facilities deployed along the roadway.
-'''Standard.'''  This policy allows for the signing of correctional centers (prisons), which are operated by the state of Missouri. City, county, private or other correctional centers, jails or prisons shall not qualify under this policy.
+The general concept for signing permanent Weigh Stations is similar to signing Rest Areas (see [[903.9 General Service Signs (MUTCD Chapter 2I) #903.9.3|EPG 903.9.3]]) because in both cases traffic using either area remains within the right-of-way.
-MoDOT shall allow only one set of signs for a prison under this policy, excluding ramp terminus signs.
+'''Standard. '''The standard sequence of signs for a Weigh Station on a conventional highway shall include three basic signs:
-MoDOT shall allow, on our system, one set of signs directing motorists to state run Department of Corrections correctional centers.  Signs shall be allowed only if the community where the correctional center is located concurs with signing the facility. MoDOT shall fabricate the signs to our standards and the prison billed for the cost.
+::A. Advance Weigh Station Distance (D8-1) sign,
-First order signing shall be erected for the Correctional facility.  Additional signing, if required, off our system to reach the facility shall be the responsibility of the local community or the Department of Corrections.  One set of structural signs, one for each direction, shall be allowed if a freeway or expressway is involved.
+::B. Weigh Station Advance Direction (D8-2) sign, and
-'''Guidance.'''  Prisons within a community can be a sensitive issue.  That is why the policy requires the community agree to sign for the facility.  This should be in written form from local political jurisdiction.
+::C. Weigh Station Entrance Direction (D8-3) sign.
-The signs should be placed at the most direct route from the state system to the prison.
+If the weigh station uses a preclearance system, a WEIGH STATION PRECLEARANCE – ALL TRUCKS RIGHT LANE sign shall be used.
-'''Option.'''  Appropriate turn signing at the ramp terminals may also be required.
+'''Guidance. '''A Gore sign with the same basic legend as the Weigh Station Entrance Direction (D8-3) sign should also be used to emphasize the entrance to the weigh station.
-==='''903.7.74 Trail/Historic Route Signs (M10 series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.50)===
+The Weigh Station Advance Direction (D8-2) Sign or the Advance Weigh Station Distance (D8-1) sign should display, either on the sign or on a supplemental plaque or sign panel, the changeable legend OPEN or CLOSED.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+=={{SpanID|903.4.46}}903.4.46 Truck and Climbing Lane Signs (D17-1 and D17-2)==
-|-
+<center>
-|[[image:M10-8a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M10-8a'''</center>|100px]]
+{|
-||[[image:M10-2.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''M10-2'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D17-1.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D17-1'''</center>]]
-||[[image:M10-6.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M10-6'''</center>|100px]]
+| [[File:D17-2.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D17-2'''</center>]]
-||[[image:M4-1a.gif|left|100px|thumb|<center>'''M4-1a'''</center>]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Support.'''  At times individuals or groups who want historic recognition for a road or section of a road approach MoDOT.  This policy defines what is needed and by whom before consideration can be given to signing an historic route.
+'''Support. '''A truck lane, commonly referred to as a climbing lane, is an additional lane added to the right of the travel lane.  This added lane gives slow moving trucks and other slow-moving vehicles a dedicated lane to use to climb a steep grade at slower speeds if they are unable to climb the hill at the posted speed limit.  At the end of the truck lane, the vehicles in the right lane that is ending must merge back into the normal travel lane. This helps reduce congestion by allowing normal traffic the ability to proceed up the grade unimpeded, in the normal travel lane, at the posted speed limit.
-'''Standard.'''  The Commission will consider marking of an historic road when the following provisions have been met:
+Truck lanes are typically installed at specific segments of roadway where vehicles commonly have difficulty maintaining the speed limit along an uphill grade and are not are typically not constructed as a series of continuous truck lanes along a corridor. Truck lanes utilize a unique set of regulatory and warnings signs as well as pavement markings to denote the availability of this added lane.
-	A.  The road has been recognized by an organized federal or state group as a road having significant historical importance to the transportation system.
+'''Guidance. '''If a series of truck lanes is provided along a highway, a Next Truck Lane (D17-1) sign should be installed after each truck lane segment.
-	B.  There shall be an organized group that sponsors and determines the exact route of the historical road.
+'''Option. '''Most truck lanes are obvious to drivers and do not require advance notification.  If a need to provide advance notification of the upcoming truck lane has been determined based on engineering judgement, one Truck Lane Mile (D17-2) sign may be installed in advance of the truck lane.  The Truck Lane Mile (D17-2) sign, if used, is typically placed no more than ½ mile in advance of the beginning of the truck lane.
-	C.  There shall be a minimum length of 50 miles required for a historic road.  Short disconnected segments are discouraged.
+'''Support.''' See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]] for Lane Ends Signs and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] for Lane-Reduction Transition pavement markings and see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]] for the typical application for all traffic control devices as they are applied to a truck lane.
-	D.  Any part of the Commission-maintained system shall be limited to a maximum of three concurrent historic route and/or trail designations.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.46}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.46 Example of Signing for a Truck Lane.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=A segment of a vertical four-lane roadway is shown. Near the bottom of the example, a truck lane is added to the right of the right northbound lane. In advance of the truck lane and to the right of the northbound lanes, a R4-3 sign is shown facing south. Further north, to the right of the truck lane, an optional sign assembly composed of a W9-1 sign mounted above a W16-2P plaque in advance of a W4-2R sign. At the top of the example, after the truck lane ends, a D17-1 is shown to the right of the northbound lanes.
+|'''Figure 903.4.46''' Example of Signing for a Truck Lane]]
-	E.  There shall be an agreement between the sponsoring group and the Commission to define the responsibilities of each.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.47}}903.4.47 Passing Lane / Alternating Passing Lane Signs (D17-3, D17-4, D17-4a)==
+<center>
+{|
+| [[File:D17-3.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''D17-3'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D17-4.png|thumb|center|90px|alt=|<center>'''D17-4'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D17-4a.png|thumb|center|180px|alt=|<center>'''D17-4a'''</center>]]
+|}
+</center>
-The agreement shall contain the following provisions:
+'''Support. '''A passing lane is lane added to the left of the normal travel lane.  This lane gives drivers the ability to pass slower moving traffic without the need to use the opposing lane of traffic for passing maneuvers.  At the end of the passing lane, vehicles in the left lane that is ending must merge back into the normal traffic lane.
-	A.  The Commission shall coordinate the fabrication of the approved historic route signs and install and maintain these signs on the approved segments of the historic route within the Commission's current highway system.
+In most cases, passing lanes are constructed as a series of passing lane segments in both directions of travel, alternating in availability from one direction of travel to the other along the corridor segment.  This application is referred to as alternating passing lanes.  This system of passing lanes can provide some of the benefits of a four-lane divided roadway within the right-of-way footprint of a conventional two-lane roadway. Passing lanes utilize a unique set of regulatory, warning and guide signs, as well as pavement markings, to denote the availability of the passing lane.
-	B.  The sponsoring group shall install and maintain the approved historic route signs on those portions of the approved historic route, which are not a part of the Commission's current highway system.  These installations will be at no cost to the Commission.
+'''Guidance. '''On corridors where alternating passing lanes have been constructed, the ALTERNATING PASSING LANE NEXT XX MILES (17-4a) sign should be installed in advance of the first passing lane at each end of the alternating passing lane along the corridor.  This sign notifies the driver that there will be a series of passing lane opportunities over the given distance displayed on the sign.
-	C.  The sponsoring group shall reimburse the Commission for the cost of fabricating the approved historic route signs regardless of where the signs are placed.  The sponsoring group shall also reimburse the Commission for the cost of installing and maintaining those signs, which are placed on the Commission's current highway system.
+'''Option. '''Advanced notification of single passing lane opportunities is not typically required.  If a need to provide advance notification of an upcoming passing lane has been determined to be needed based on engineering judgement, one PASSING LANE (D17-4) sign may be installed in advance of the passing lane.  PASSING LANE (D17-4) sign, if used, is typically placed no more than ½ mile in advance of the beginning of the passing lane.
-	D.  The approved historic signs shall be mounted as an independent confirmation marker at locations agreed upon by the Commission and the sponsoring group.
+'''Standard. '''Each passing lane within an alternating passing lane corridor shall include a NEXT PASSING LANE X MILES (D17-3) sign at the end of passing lane.
-If the historic road crosses a state line, there must be agreement with the adjoining state or states on the signing and the routing of the historic route.  If agreements with the other states cannot be reached the historic signing shall end at the last intersection in Missouri.
+'''Support.''' See [[903.3 Warning Signs and Object Markers (MUTCD Chapter 2C) #903.3.39|EPG 903.3.39]] for Lane Ends Signs and [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B) #620.2.14|EPG 620.2.14]] for Lane-Reduction Transition pavement markings and see [[616.16 Typical Applications (MUTCD Chapter 6P) #616.16|EPG 616.16]] for the typical application for all traffic control devices as they are applied to a passing lane.
-'''Support.'''  Trail signs are informational signs, plaques, or shields designed to provide travelers with guidance in following a trail of particular cultural, historical or educational significance.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.47}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.47 Example of Signing for an Intermittent Passing Lane.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=A segment of a vertical three-lane roadway is shown consisting of two southbound lanes and one northbound lane. At the bottom of the example and to the right of the northbound lane, an optional D17-4 sign is shown facing south. Continuing north, a single passing lane is shown to the left of the northbound lane. To the right of the northbound lane and before the passing lane ends, an R4-3 sign, an “optional” sign assembly composed of a W9-1L sign mounted over a W16-2P plaque, and a W4-2L sign are shown consecutively facing south. At the top of the example, beyond the end of the passing lane, an optional D17-3 sign is shown to the right of the northbound lane.|'''Figure 903.4.47''' Example of Signing for an Intermittent Passing Lane]]
-There are several approved trails or overlays that follow state maintained routes.  Approved trail overlays are:
+=={{SpanID|903.4.48}}903.4.48  Community Wayfinding Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.55)==
-	A.  Lewis and Clark Trail (M10-2); http://www.nps.gov/lecl/VisitorInfo/Tours/MO.htm
+'''Support. '''Community wayfinding guide signs are part of a coordinated and continuous system of signs that direct tourists and other road users to key civic, cultural, visitor, and recreational attractions and other similar secondary destinations within a city or a local urbanized or downtown area.
-[[image:903.7.74.jpg|right|250px]]
-	B.  Great River Road (M10-6); http://www.byways.org/browse/byways/2247/travel.html
-	C.  Historic 66 (M10-8, M10-8a); http://www.missouri66.org/
+Community Wayfinding is a city installed and maintained signing program allowed on MoDOT right of way per this policy. Wayfinding signs are installed as MoDOT permit projects and require a TR47 agreement. MoDOT's only role is to ensure the city program signs meet the requirements of the wayfinding policies and do not interfere with safe operation of the state highway system.
-	D.  Santa Fe Trail (M10-4); http://www.nps.gov/safe/fnl-sft/maps/map1/map1.htm
+Community wayfinding guide signs are a type of destination guide sign for conventional roads with a common color and/or identification marker for destinations within an overall wayfinding guide sign plan for an area.
-	E.  Oregon Trail (M10-3); http://www.nps.gov/oreg/oreg/site1.htm
+[[#fig903.4.48|Figure 903.4.48]] illustrates various examples of the design of community wayfinding guide signs.
-F.	Trail of Tears (M10-5);
+'''Standard.''' The use of community wayfinding guide signs shall be limited to conventional roads. Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed on freeway or expressway mainlines or ramps. Direction to community wayfinding destinations from a freeway or expressway shall be limited to the use of a Supplemental guide sign (see [[903.5 Guide Signs - Freeways and Expressways (MUTCD Chapter 2E) #903.5.49|EPG 903.5.49]]) on the mainline and a Destination sign (see [[#903.4.32|EPG 903.4.32]]) on the ramp to direct road users to the area or areas within which community wayfinding guide signs are used. A community wayfinding program shall have a minimum of three well defined districts before freeway/expressway signing will be permitted. A well-defined district shall represent a region or area with multiple sites or destinations within it. The individual wayfinding destinations shall not be displayed on the Supplemental guide and Destination signs except where the destinations are in accordance with this policy.
-http://www.nps.gov/applications/parks/trte/ppMaps/ACF17B.
+Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be used to provide direction to primary destinations or highway routes or streets. Destination or other guide signs shall be used for this purpose as described elsewhere in EPG 903.4 and shall have priority over any community wayfinding sign in placement, prominence, and conspicuity.
-	G.  Avenue of the Saints (M10-9); http://www.modot.org/northeast/61_27AveofSts.htm
+Because regulatory, warning, and other guide signs have a higher priority, community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed where adequate spacing cannot be provided between the community wayfinding guide sign and other higher-priority signs. Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be installed in a position where they would obscure the road users' view of other traffic control devices.
-H.  Mississippi River Trail (MRT) bike trail (M10-7); http://www.trailnet.org/oldsite/trails.html	http://tower-rock-winery.com/biking.htm
+Community wayfinding guide signs shall not be mounted overhead.
-	I.  Designated scenic byways; http://www.byways.org/browse/states/MO/
+'''Support. '''Community wayfinding guide signs include boundary markers, welcome to messages or the simple display of a city name on a structure or sign (see [[903.17 Overhead Sign Mounting #903.17|EPG 903.17]]).
-	J.  Pony Express; http://www.nps.gov/poex/
+'''Guidance. '''If used, a community wayfinding guide sign system should be established on a local municipal or equivalent jurisdictional level or for an urbanized area of adjoining municipalities or equivalent that form an identifiable geographic entity that is conducive to a cohesive and continuous system of signs. Community wayfinding guide signs should not be used on a regional or statewide basis where infrequent or sparse placement does not contribute to a continuous or coordinated system of signing that is readily identifiable as such to the road user. In such cases, Destination or other guide signs detailed in EPG 903.4 should be used to direct road users to an identifiable area in which the type of eligible destination described in first Support paragraph of this Article is located.
-	K. California Trail; http://www.nps.gov/cali/cali/auto_mo.htm
+When a system of community wayfinding guide signs is being considered, the system of existing guide signs should be evaluated for applicability and general compliance with the provisions of the EPG to ensure road user directional guidance is adequately being addressed.
-'''Standard.'''  The State Traffic Engineer shall approve signing for any additional trails.
+'''Support. '''The specific provisions of this Article regarding the design of community wayfinding sign legends apply to vehicular community wayfinding signs and do not apply to those signs that are intended only to provide information or direction to pedestrians or other users of a sidewalk or roadside area.
-The general principles for signing trail or overlays are:
+'''Guidance. '''Because pedestrian wayfinding signs typically use smaller legends that are inadequately sized for viewing by vehicular traffic and because they can provide direction to pedestrians that might conflict with that appropriate for vehicular traffic, wayfinding signs designed for and intended to provide direction to pedestrians or other users of a sidewalk or other roadside area should be located to minimize their conspicuity to vehicular traffic. Such signs should be located as far as practicable from the street, such as at the far edge of the sidewalk. Where locating such signs farther from the roadway is impracticable, the pedestrian wayfinding signs should have their conspicuity to vehicular traffic minimized by employing one or a combination of the following methods:
-	A.  Where the Trail or overlay continues over a marked route at a junction with another numbered or lettered route and no turn is involved, the Trail Route Marker shall be mounted at the lower-most portion of the confirmation assembly on the far side of the intersection.  This will require a total of two markers per intersection with numbered or lettered routes.
+::A. Locating signs away from intersections where high-priority traffic control devices are present.
-	B.  Where the Trail or overlay makes a turn at a junction, there shall be a separate advance turn assembly consisting of the Trail Route Marker and Advance Turn Arrow black on white series sign beneath it.  The Trail Route Marker shall be added to the confirmation assembly beyond the junction.  The advance turn assembly shall be located between the junction assembly and destination sign.
+::B. Facing the pedestrian message toward the sidewalk and away from the street.
-	C.  If two or more trails or overlays run concurrently on a route, the trail or overlay confirmation assemblies shall be erected on a separate post after the route confirmation.
+::C. Cantilevering the sign over the sidewalk if the pedestrian wayfinding sign is mounted at a height consistent with vehicular traffic signs, removing the pedestrian wayfinding signs from the line of sight in a sequence of vehicular signs.
-Cardinal Direction plaques shall not be used with trails or overlay route markers.
+To further minimize their conspicuity to vehicular traffic during nighttime conditions, pedestrian wayfinding signs should not be retroreflective.
-The AUTO TOUR (M4-1a) auxiliary sign shall be used in combination with the Santa Fe (M10-4), Trail of Tears (M10-5), and Oregon Trail (M10-3) markers.
+'''Support. '''Color coding is sometimes used on community wayfinding guide signs to help road users distinguish between multiple potentially confusing traffic generator destinations located in different neighborhoods or subareas within a community or area.
-'''Guidance.'''  Primary guidance should be in the form of printed literature and strip maps rather than trail signing.
+'''Option. '''At the boundaries of the geographical area within which community wayfinding guide signing is used, an informational guide sign may be posted to inform road users about the presence of wayfinding signing and to identify the meanings of the various color codes or pictographs that are being used.
-Typically exclusive to the Lewis and Clark Trail (M10-2) marker, signing should be placed on the Advance Guide Sign where the Lewis and Clark trail crosses an expressway or freeway.
+'''Standard. '''These informational guide signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background and shall have a design similar to that illustrated in [[#fig903.4.2|Figure 903.4.2]] and shall be consistent with the basic design principles for guide signs. These informational guide signs shall not be installed on freeway or expressway mainlines or ramps.
-'''Option.'''  The Lewis and Clark Trail marker may be placed either on the Advance Guide sign if there is adequate green space at the top of the sign or mounted to hang below the Advance Guide Sign.
+The color coding or a pictograph of the identification markers of the community wayfinding guide signing system shall be included on the informational guide sign posted at the boundary of the community wayfinding guide signing area. The color coding or pictographs shall apply to a specific, identifiable neighborhood or geographical subarea within the overall area covered by the community wayfinding guide signing. Color coding or pictographs shall not be used to distinguish between different types of destinations that are within the same designated neighborhood or subarea. The color coding shall be accomplished by the use of different colored square or rectangular panels on the face of the informational guide sign, each positioned to the left of the neighborhood or named geographic area to which the color-coding panel applies. The height of the colored square or rectangular panels shall not exceed 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.
-[[image:Figure 903.7.74.gif|thumb|center|600px|'''Figure 903.7.74 Standard Application of Trail Signing''']]
+'''Option. '''The different colored square or rectangular panels may include either a black or a white (whichever provides the better contrast with the color of the panel) letter, numeral, or other appropriate designation to identify the destination.
-==='''903.7.75 Lewis and Clark Historic Site Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.50a)===
+Except for the informational guide sign posted at the boundary of the wayfinding guide sign area, community wayfinding guide signs may use background colors other than green in order to provide a color identification for the wayfinding destinations by geographical area within the overall wayfinding guide signing system. Color-coded community wayfinding guide signs may be used with or without the boundary informational guide sign displaying corresponding color-coding panels described in the sixth Support paragraph (beginning with “Color coding is sometimes…”) through the sixth Standard paragraph (beginning with “The color coding or a pictograph…”) of this Article. Except as provided in the following Standard paragraph, in addition to the colors that are approved in the EPG for use on official traffic control signs (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.6|EPG 903.1.6]]), other background colors may also be used for the color coding of community wayfinding guide signs.
-{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
+'''Standard. '''The standard colors of red, orange, yellow, purple, or the fluorescent versions thereof, fluorescent yellow-green, and fluorescent pink shall not be used as background colors for community wayfinding guide signs, in order to minimize possible confusion with critical, higher-priority regulatory and warning sign color meanings readily understood by road users.
-|-
-|[[image:M10-2a.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''M10-2a'''</center>|125px]]
-||[[image:Lewis and Clark Assembly.gif|left|250px|thumb|<center>'''Lewis and Clark Assembly'''</center>]]
-|}
-'''Standard.'''  MoDOT shall provide signing for certified Lewis and Clark historic sites.  Signing for sites shall direct motorists from the Lewis and Clark trail to the certified historic site.  Signing for a certified site shall be limited to the nearest junction on the trail to the site.  Second and third order signing on the trail shall not be allowed.  Along the Mississippi River, where there is not an official Lewis and Clark trail, signing shall be provided from the “pseudo-trail” as designated by MoDOT.
+The minimum contrast value of legend color to background color for community wayfinding guide signs shall be at least 0.70 (or 70%).
-Signing shall consist of the Lewis and Clark Historical Marker (M10-2a) sign and an appropriate Advance Turn Arrow placed in advance of the junction where motorists leave the trail.  If additional trailblazers on the state system are required, the Lewis and Clark Historical Marker sign with the appropriate Advance Turn Arrow shall be used.
+All messages, borders, legends, and backgrounds of community wayfinding guide signs and any identification markers shall be retroreflective (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.21|EPG 903.1.21]] and [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.22|903.1.22]]).
-Additional trailblazing off the state system may be required to reach the certified historic site.  This signing shall consist of the smaller version of the Lewis and Clark Historical Marker (M10-2a) sign, which is installed and maintained by others.  MoDOT shall manufacture the Lewis and Clark Historical Marker signs with the cost of manufacturing reimbursed according to the following sections.  Signing on the state system shall not be allowed unless the appropriate trailblazer signs off the state system are also installed, if required.
+Community wayfinding guide signs, exclusive of any identification marker used, shall be rectangular in shape.
-If a Public Area Directional sign does not exist for the facility, signing shall be provided according to the normal Lewis and Clark historic site policy.
+'''Guidance.''' Simplicity and uniformity in design, position, and application as described in [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A)#903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]] are important and should be incorporated into the community wayfinding guide sign design and location plans for the area.
-Trailblazers shall be reimbursed by the appropriate state agency.
+Community wayfinding guide signs should be limited to three destinations per sign (see [[#903.4.6|EPG 903.4.6]]).
-Requests for Lewis and Clark historic signing for a non-state owned location shall only be considered if the location has been certified by the National Park Service.
+Abbreviations (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.4.8|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.08)]]) should be kept to a minimum, and should include only those that are commonly recognized and understood.
-Signing for certified sites shall be in accordance with the normal Lewis and Clark historic site policy.  The owner of the site shall be responsible for the cost and installation of the trailblazer signs and securing approval from the appropriate local agencies for locating and maintaining the trailblazer signs.
+Horizontal lines of a color that contrasts with the sign background color should be used to separate groups of destinations by direction from each other.
-'''Guidance.'''  The Missouri Department of Natural Resources and the Missouri Department of Conservation have erected special interpretive signs at some of their sites.  The advance signs for these sites should be incorporated into any signing that currently exists for the facility by adding it above the existing Public Area Directional sign (see assembly above).
+'''Support.''' The basic requirement for all highway signs, including community wayfinding signs, is that they be legible to those for whom they are intended and that they be understandable in time to permit a proper response. [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]] contains additional information on the design of signs, including desirable attributes of effective designs.
-The Lewis and Clark Historical Marker sign should be mounted to either the left or right side of the Public Area Directional sign based on the turn required to reach the site.
+'''Guidance. '''Word messages should be as brief as practical and the lettering should be large enough to provide the necessary legibility distance.
-'''Support.'''  Information for certification can be found at:
+'''Standard.''' The minimum specific ratio of letter height to legibility distance shall comply with the provisions of [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.8|EPG 903.1.8]]. The size of lettering used for destination and directional legends on community wayfinding signs shall comply with the provisions of minimum letter heights as provided in [[#903.4.5|EPG 903.4.5]].
-::Lewis & Clark National Historic Trail
+Interline and edge spacing shall comply with the provisions of [[#903.4.5|EPG 903.4.5]].
-::1709 Jackson Street
-::Omaha, NE 68102-2571
+Except as provided in the Option paragraph below, the lettering style used for destination and directional legends on community wayfinding guide signs shall comply with the provisions of [[#903.4.4|EPG 903.4.4]].
-or at http://www.nps.gov/lecl/Administration&Grants/Cert.htm.
+The lettering for destinations on community wayfinding guide signs shall be a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters (see [[#903.4.4|EPG 903.4.4]]). All other word messages on community wayfinding guide signs shall be in all upper-case letters.
-Information regarding the trail in Missouri can be found at:
+'''Guidance. '''Except as provided in the Option and Standard paragraphs below, letters, numerals, and other characters should be composed of the Standard Alphabets as detailed in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]).
-::The Missouri Lewis and Clark Bicentennial Commission
+'''Option. '''A lettering style other than the Standard Alphabets provided in the “Standard Highway Signs” publication (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.1.5|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1A.05)]]) may be used on community wayfinding guide signs if an engineering study determines that the legibility and recognition values for the chosen lettering style meet or exceed the values for the Standard Alphabets for the same legend height and stroke width.
-::100 Jefferson Street, Suite 200
+'''Standard. '''If a lettering style other than the Standard Alphabets is used, the alternative lettering style shall be conventional in form. The letters, numerals, and other characters shall not be italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or of other unusual forms.
-::Jefferson City, MO 65101
+In accordance with [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]], except for signs that are designed and located with the intent to be viewed only by pedestrians, bicyclists stopped out of the flow of traffic, or occupants of parked vehicles, Internet and e-mail addresses, including domain names and uniform resource locators (URL), and scanning graphics for the purpose of obtaining information (see [[903.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 2A) #903.1.4|EPG 903.1.4]]), shall not be displayed on any community wayfinding guide sign or sign assembly.
-::573-522-9019
+The arrow location and priority order of destinations shall follow the provisions described in EPG [[#903.4.8|903.4.8]] and [[#903.4.32|903.4.32]]. Arrows shall be of the designs provided in [[#903.4.48|EPG 903.4.8]].
-or at http://www.lewisandclarkmo.com.
+'''Option. '''Pictographs (see definition in [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.3.2|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1C.02)]]) may be used on community wayfinding guide signs.
-Signing for certified sites will normally be from the approved Lewis and Clark trail. There are, however, several sites along the Missouri River in the north part of St. Louis County that are not conveniently located near the Lewis and Clark trail.  Signing for a certified historic site located from the I-64 bridge over the Missouri River to its confluence with the Mississippi River will be allowed signing at an interchange along I-270 or I-64.  Any signing provided along these routes will be in accordance with the normal Lewis and Clark historic site policy.
+'''Standard. '''If a pictograph is used, its height shall not exceed 2 times the height of the upper-case letters of the principal legend on the sign.
-==='''903.7.76	Historical Site Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.50b)===
+Except for pictographs, symbols that are not approved in the EPG for use on guide signs shall not be used on community wayfinding guide signs.
-'''Standard.'''  Nationally known historical sites, buildings, or places which have “national prominence” and are “nationally known” may be signed at the Commission’s expense provided they meet the following criteria.
+Business logos, commercial graphics, or other forms of advertising (see [[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.4.7|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.07)]]) shall not be used on community wayfinding guide signs or sign assemblies.
-'''Standard.'''  To qualify for signing the historical site, building, or place shall be listed in the National Register of Historical Places, open to the general public during normal hours, public owned or non-profit foundation owned and operated.  Signing shall not be permitted where a commercial or recreational concessionaire serve as the primary activity or attraction.  Minor concessionaire serving refreshments to the visitors shall not be considered the primary activity or attraction.  MoDOT shall provide a maximum of second order signing.  No signing shall be provided for any individual site, building or event located within a larger signed area.
+'''Option. '''Other graphics that specifically identify the wayfinding system, including identification markers, may be used on the overall sign assembly and sign supports.
-For purposes of interpretation of this policy “national prominence” and nationally known” persons, places, or events shall include but not be limited to the following: Presidents, Writers, Battlefields, Generals, Educators and Landmarks of National Historical Significance.
+'''Support. '''An identification marker consists of a shape, color, and/or pictograph that is used as a visual identifier for the community wayfinding guide signing system for an area. [[#fig903.4.48|Figure 903.4.48]] shows examples of identification marker designs that can be used with community wayfinding guide signs.
-'''Support.'''  This signing would be for such locations as:
+'''Option. '''An identification marker may be used in a community wayfinding guide sign assembly, or may be incorporated into the overall design of a community wayfinding guide sign, as a means of visually identifying the sign as part of an overall system of community wayfinding signs and destinations.
-::Daniel Boone’s Home
+'''Standard. '''The sizes and shapes of identification markers shall be smaller than the community wayfinding guide signs themselves. Identification markers shall not be designed to have an appearance that could be mistaken by road users as being a traffic control device.
-::General Pershing’s Boyhood Home
+'''Guidance. '''The area of the identification marker should not exceed ⅕ of the area of the community wayfinding guide sign with which it is mounted in the same sign assembly.
-::George Washington Carver Nat’l Monument
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.48}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.48 Examples of Community Wayfinding Guide Signs.png|thumb|center|700px|alt=Three signs are shown. The first sign is shown as a horizontal rectangular blue sign with a white border. The words "Great Falls Historic District" are shown in white on two lines. A semicircular sign showing the word "HAMILTON" in white on a brown background above a symbol for a waterfall is shown centered on the top of the guide sign.The second sign is shown as a horizontal rectangular blue sign with a white border. An upward-pointing vertical white arrow is shown to the left of the words "Overlook Park Visitor Center" in white on two lines above a horizontal white line that extends across the width of the sign. Below this line, a left-pointing horizontal white arrow is shown to the left of the words "Rogers Locomotive" in white on one line and above a horizontal white line that extends across the width of the sign. Below this line, the words "City Hall" are shown to the left of a right-pointing horizontal white arrow. A semicircular sign showing the word "HAMILTON" in white on a brown background above a symbol for a waterfall is shown centered on the top of the guide sign.The third sign is shown as a horizontal rectangular purple sign with a white border. The words "South Hill" are shown in white letters on a black background on one line, below which, the words "Community Center" are shown in white letters on a purple background on two lines to the left of a right-pointing horizontal white arrow, and below that is shown a horizontal black band across the bottom of the sign panel.
+|'''Figure 903.4.48''' Examples of Community Wayfinding Guide Signs]]
-::Harry S Truman’s Birthplace
+=={{SpanID|903.4.49}}903.4.49  National Scenic Byways Sign and Plaque (M10-1 and M10-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2D.57)==
-::Mark Twain's Birthplace
+'''Support. '''Certain roads have been designated by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation as National Scenic Byways or All-American Roads based on their archeological, cultural, historic, natural, recreational, or scenic qualities.
-::Route 66 State Park
+[[#tab903.4.49|Table 903.4.49]] lists the approved National Scenic Byways that follow state-maintained routes.
-::Scott Joplin House
+<center>
+{{SpanID|tab903.4.49}}
+{| class="wikitable"
+|+'''Table 903.4.49 Approved National Scenic Byways in Missouri
+|-
+! National Scenic Byways in Missouri
+|-
+| [https://fhwaapps.fhwa.dot.gov/bywaysp/StateMaps/Show/byway/2588 Crowley's Ridge Parkway]
+|-
+| [https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/infrastructure/back0406.cfm Little Dixie Highway of the Great River Road]
+|}
+</center>
-::Trail of Tears State Park
+'''Option.''' MoDOT may install the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign or (M10-1aP) plaque (see [[#fig903.4.49|Figure 903.4.49]]) at entrance points to a route that has been recognized by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation as a National Scenic Byway or an All-American Road. The M10-1 sign may be installed as independent Directional (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.28|EPG 903.4.28]]) or Confirming (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.29|EPG 903.4.29]]) assemblies at periodic intervals along the designated route and near intersections where the designated route turns or follows a different numbered highway. The M10-1aP plaque may be installed below a route sign in a Confirming assembly. At locations where roadside features have been developed to enhance the traveler’s experience such as rest areas, historic sites, interpretive facilities, or scenic overlooks, the National Scenic Byways sign or plaque may be placed on the associated sign assembly to inform travelers that the site contributes to the byway travel experience.
-::Wilson’s Creek National Battlefield Park
+'''Guidance. '''Where the byway is identified only by the National Scenic Byways sign, the Directional assembly should consist of the M10-1 sign and an M5 series or M6 series auxiliary plaque when indication of a turn is necessary to remain on the byway route.
-::Winston Churchill Memorial
+Where the name of the byway is to be displayed on identification signs or plaques along the byway route, the name should be displayed in a Directional or Confirming assembly.
-==='''903.7.77	[[:Category:140 Encroachments and Items Permitted on MoDOT’s Right of Way#140.2.1 Blue Star Markers|Blue Star Markers]]''' (MUTCD Section 2D.50c)===
+The size of the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign and (M10-1aP) plaque should be consistent with that specified for route signs (see [[903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D) #903.4.10|EPG 903.4.10]]) for the roadway classification.
-'''Option.'''  Blue Star Markers may be placed on the following routes:  Route 36, Route 50, Route 67, I-44 and I-70.  The signs are normally located in a rest area or roadside park.  These signs are provided and maintained by others.
+Where the name of the byway is to be displayed along the byway route as provided in the fifth paragraph of this Article, the byway Directional or Confirming assemblies should be located separately from any route Sign assemblies or Destination guide signs.
-'''Standard.'''  Approval for signing shall be obtained from the National Council of State Garden Clubs prior to the erection of any new signs.
+'''Standard. '''When a National Scenic Byways sign is installed on a National Scenic Byway or an All-American Road, the design shown for the M10-1 sign or M10-1aP plaque in [[#fig903.4.49|Figure 903.4.49]] shall be used. Use of this design shall be limited to routes that have been designated as a National Scenic Byway or All-American Road by the U.S. Secretary of Transportation.
-==='''903.7.78	State Historical Society Markers''' (MUTCD Section 2D.50d)===
+If used, the M10-1 sign or M10-1aP plaque shall be placed such that the highway route signs have primary visibility for the road user.
-'''Support.'''  On November 1952, the Commission entered into an agreement with the Missouri Historical Society for the erection of markers along the highways of Missouri at points of great historic interest.  These signs are provided by others, normally in a rest area, roadside park or at a specific location of historical interest.
+The M10-1 sign or the M10-1aP plaque shall not be installed as sign panels on a guide sign or as part of a guide sign assembly.
-==='''903.7.79 Crossover Signs (D13 Series)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.51)===
+The National Scenic Byway signs shall be paid for by the group or association responsible for byway.
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+Any additional signing, other than that provided by MoDOT, shall be located off of state maintained right of way.
-==='''903.7.80 NATIONAL SCENIC BYWAYS Signs (D6-4, D6-4a)''' (MUTCD Section 2D.52)===
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.49}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.49 National Scenic Byways Sign and Plaque, and Examples of Use.png|thumb|center|700px|alt="M10-1 is shown as a square white sign with a blue border. At the top of the sign, a logo of a waving blue flag is shown in the shape of an undulating two-lane highway with a dashed white centerline, with one white star on the centerline. Below the flag are the words ""AMERICA'S BYWAYS"" in red on two lines.
-'''Support.'''  Not used in Missouri.
+M10-1aP is shown as a horizontal rectangular white sign with a blue border. To the left, a logo of a waving blue flag is shown in the shape of an undulating two-lane highway with a dashed white centerline, with one white star on the centerline. To the right of and below the flag are the words ""AMERICA'S BYWAYS"" in small red letters on one line along the bottom of the plaque.
+Independent directional assembly shows an M10-1 sign mounted above an M6-2P plaque. Independent confirming assembly is shown as the same as the first example but with no sign or plaque mounted below. Confirming assembly shows an M3-1P plaque mounted above an M1-5 sign mounted above an M10-1aP plaque."
-==='''903.7.81 Local Reference/Community Awareness Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.53)===
+|'''Figure 903.4.49''' National Scenic Byways Sign and Plaque, and Examples of Use]]
+=={{SpanID|903.4.50}}903.4.50  State-Designated Scenic Byway, Historic Trail, and Auto Tour Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.58)==
+<center>
+{|
+| [[File:D6-4b.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D6-4b'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D6-4c.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D6-4c'''</center>]]
+| [[File:D6-4d.png|thumb|center|100px|alt=|<center>'''D6-4d'''</center>]]
+|}
+</center>
+<center>
 {| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
 |-
-|[[image:storm ready.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Storm Ready'''</center>|80px]]||
+|[[image:M17-1.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-1'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-2.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-2'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-3.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-3'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-4.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-4'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-5.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-5'''</center>]]
-||[[image:I-12.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''I-12'''</center>|80px]]
+|}
-||[[image:Tree City.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Tree City'''</center>|80px]]
+{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
-||[[image:Neighborhood Watch.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Neighborhood Watch'''</center>|80px]]
+|[[image:M17-8.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-8'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-8a.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-8a'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-10.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-10'''</center>]]||[[image:M17-11.jpg|center|thumb|80px|'''<center>M17-11'''</center>]]
-||[[image:Local Reference.gif|left|thumb|<center>'''Local Reference'''</center>|80px]]
 |}
+</center>
-'''Option.'''  Signing may be allowed on collector type roads that would not be considered appropriate for freeway/expressway roads.  Local reference signs not described in this manual may be considered for conventional type roads. Examples are signing for libraries, recycling centers, local parks, etc.
+'''Support.''' Signing for State-designated scenic byways, historic trails, and auto tour routes, is similar in concept to that for National Scenic Byways as provided in [[#903.4.49|EPG 903.4.49]].
-District Engineers may approve local reference signs on conventional type roads if the guidelines are met.
+[[#tab903.4.50|Table 903.4.50]] lists the approved Missouri Scenic Byways that follow state-maintained routes.
-Cities and counties are permitted to provide directional signing to the city hall or courthouse.  The sign location should provide the most direct route to the city hall or courthouse.
+<center>
+{| class="wikitable" style="min-width: 370px;"
-'''Guidance.'''  Local reference signs and posts should be provided, installed, and maintained by the local political entity, and the district should approve all locations.  Sign design for local reference signs should follow the principles of [http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/pdfs/2003r1/pdf-index.htm the ''MUTCD''] and this manual for size, color and reflectorization.
+|+ '''Table 903.4.50''' Approved Missouri Scenic Byways
+|-
+! Missouri Scenic Byway
+|-
+| [http://kcparks.org/park/cliff-drive/ Cliff Drive]
+|-
+| [https://fhwaapps.fhwa.dot.gov/bywaysp/StateMaps/Show/byway/2588 Crowley's Ridge Parkway]
+|-
+| [https://missouri66.org/ Historic Route 66 Byway]
+|-
+| [https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/infrastructure/back0406.cfm Little Dixie Highway of the Great River Road]
+|-
+| [https://www.visitmo.com/things-to-do/old-trails-road-scenic-byway Old Trails Road]
+|-
+| [https://scenicbyways.info/byway/73303.html Ozark Mountain High Road]
+|-
+| [https://scenicbyways.info/byway/64978.html Ozark Mountain Parkway]
+|-
+| [https://scenicbyways.info/byway/73302.html Sho-Me Santa Fe Trail]
+|-
+| [https://scenicbyways.info/byway/73301.html Spirit of Kansas City]
+|-
+| [https://scenicbyways.info/byway/73304.html Stars and Stripes Historical/Cultural Byway]
+|}
+</center>
-Local reference signs are not to be allowed on interstates without approval from the State Traffic Engineer.
+Named highways are officially designated and shown on official maps and serve the purpose of providing route guidance, primarily on unnumbered highways, and property addresses. A highway designated as a trail, auto tour route, or byway is not considered to be a highway name for the purposes of highway signing or road user navigation and orientation.
-Supplemental or trailblazing signing for the city hall or courthouse over city or county streets should be the responsibility of the local jurisdiction.  Only first order signs on conventional routes should be allowed.  The city or county should provide the signing installation and maintenance at approved locations as determined by district personnel.  The sign should meet our specifications and have reflective green background, white legend and border.
+[[:Category:911 General (MUTCD Part 1) #911.4.9|EPG 911 (MUTCD Section 1D.09)]] provides information on the authority for placement of traffic control devices within the highway right-of-way.
-Traffic Division should be advised of any local reference signing approved by the districts, so that this information can be shared with other districts.  This will provide a basis for other districts when considering similar requests.
+'''Guidance. '''Route Sign assemblies and Destination guide signs should have priority in visibility and location over signing related to historic trails, auto tour routes, and byways.
-Local reference and community awareness signs should have a maximum height and width of 24 in.
+'''Standard. '''When a Missouri Scenic Byways sign is installed on state-maintained routes, the design shown for the D6-4b or D6-4c sign shall be used. Use of this design shall be limited to routes that have been designated as a Missouri Scenic Byway by the Commission.
-'''Support.'''  Many communities participate in programs sponsored by different agencies or groups.  Some of these programs provide signs that the cities want to post to acknowledge their participation.  Signing for the following programs are approved for installation on right of way.
+The Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) signs shall be installed at the beginning of the byway and shall include the byway name at the bottom of the sign.
-The National Weather Service sponsors the storm ready program.  Communities that qualify for the program are provided signs by the program.  MoDOT will allow Storm Ready signing to be placed adjacent to city limit signs.
+Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation signs shall be installed above route turn assemblies and at intersections where the designated route turns or follows a different numbered highway.
-The disaster resistant community program is sponsored by FEMA and locally coordinated by the SEMA.  Communities that qualify for the program are provided standard signs by the program.  MoDOT will allow DISASTER RESISTANT COMMUNITY signing to be placed adjacent to city limit signs.
+If used, the D6-4b or D6-4c sign shall be placed such that the roadway signs have primary visibility for the road user.
-Communities will be eligible for the Missouri Community Betterment signs when they become an active member in the Missouri Community Betterment Program and will lose their eligibility if they become inactive for more than one year.
+Any additional signing, other than that provided by MoDOT, shall be located off state maintained right of way.
-MoDOT will allow TREE CITY U.S.A. signs to be placed adjacent to city limit signs.
+'''Option. '''The end of the byway may be marked with the Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation sign with the END (M4-6) auxiliary sign mounted below.
-The National Arbor Day Foundation sponsors the Tree City U.S.A. program for a year at a time.  Upon meeting the requirements for the program a sign or signs are provided to the city.
+At locations where roadside features have been developed to enhance the traveler’s experience, the Missouri Scenic Byways Point of Interest (D6-4d) plaque may be placed below the Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) sign to inform travelers that the site contributes to the byway travel experience.
-MoDOT will allow neighborhood watch signs to be placed at the right of way line.
+'''Support. '''In some instances, a Missouri Scenic Byway will receive National Scenic Byway status in which case the byway is eligible for additional signing to denote this designation and is eligible for first order signing.
-Mothers against drunk driving, MADD, sponsors a community recognition program.  MADD provides signs to the communities that qualify for signing.  We will allow MADD signing to be placed adjacent to city limit signs.
+'''Standard. '''If a Missouri Scenic Byway receives National Scenic Byway status, the National Scenic Byways (M10-1) sign shall be mounted below the Missouri Scenic Byway (D6-4b) sign or the Missouri Scenic Byways (D6-4c) Confirmation sign.
-MoDOT will allow DARE signing to be placed adjacent to city limit signs and
+'''Support. '''If a Missouri Scenic Byway receives National Scenic Byway status it is eligible for first order signing.
-'''Standard.'''  Community awareness signs shall not detract from MoDOT signs and maintenance of the roadway.  The signs shall look professional, not contain advertising of any kind, shall be limited to 2 posts with 2 signs per post and be located near the city limits sign.
+'''Standard. '''First order signing for at grade intersections shall consist of a Public Use Area (D7-10) sign containing the byway name, the National Scenic Byway logo and a directional arrow and a distance, if applicable, to the beginning of the byway if less than one mile.
-The Storm Ready signs shall be erected on a separate post, to be maintained by the city.  Signs and signposts shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the participating community.
+'''Option. '''For grade-separated interchanges, supplement guide signs and ramp signing may be installed to direct traffic to the byway.
-DISASTER RESISTANT COMMUNITY signs shall be erected on a separate post, to be maintained by the city.  Signs and signposts shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the participating community.
+'''Standard. '''The mainline signs shall be white on brown and contain the America’s Byway logo, the name of the byway and NEXT RIGHT. The ramp sign will be of the same design as the first order at grade signing.
-The Missouri Community Betterment (I-12) signs shall be placed in the upper left hand corner of the city limit signs of eligible communities.  The signs shall be 12 x 12 in.  Communities shall be charged a fee for the cost, erection, and maintenance of each sign.
+The location of these signs shall be identical to that found on a normal Missouri Scenic Byway. The costs associated with the National Scenic Byways designation shall be the responsibility of the group or association responsible for byway.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.50.1}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.50.1 Examples of the Use of Missouri Scenic Byways Sign.jpg|thumb|center|500px|alt="The figure shows several examples of Missouri Byway signing. On the left, a byway sign is mounted above a standard route assembly. The top panel displays the Missouri Byway logo with a stylized roadway, rolling green hills, and white flowers. Below it is a NORTH cardinal direction plaque, followed by a state route marker for Route 58, and a horizontal arrow plaque indicating a turn.
+Next to it is a similar assembly without the turn arrow. The byway logo panel appears above the NORTH direction plaque and a Route 58 marker, forming a simple vertical byway route assembly.
+To the right, two larger byway guide signs are shown. Both signs feature the Missouri Byway logo at the top and a white panel beneath it labeled “BYWAY NAME.” One version includes an additional blue supplemental sign below it reading “POINT OF INTEREST” with a right-pointing arrow. The final example shows only the byway logo panel above the “BYWAY NAME” panel, without a supplemental plaque. All guide sign examples are mounted on posts."|'''Figure 903.4.50.1''' Examples of the Use of Missouri Scenic Byways Sign]]
-Communities shall petition the Department of Economic Development for the signs.  The Department of Economic Development shall request MoDOT to erect the signs, collect fees from the communities for the erection of these signs with checks made payable to the Director of Revenue-Credit State Road Fund, and be responsible for maintenance and replacement of worn, faded, or damaged signs.
+'''Support. '''An auto tour route is a path along a historic route or a historic trail with the auto tour route traversing existing roadways. The roadway the auto tour route traverses may be the actual historic road or represent the exact location of a historic trail, however, it is more common the auto tour route traverses existing roadways which represent the closest approximation of where the historic route or trail originally existed.
-The Department of Economic Development through the office of the Missouri Community Betterment Program shall be responsible for certifying the eligibility of a community for the Missouri Community Betterment Signs, request the Missouri.
+MoDOT does not typically initiate auto tour routes, this action is typically initiated by historical organizations like the National Park Service or private organizations like the Historic Route 66 Association of Missouri who have an interest in preserving the history of a historic route or trail. These organizations are the technical experts on the history of the historic route or trail.
-To obtain a TREE CITY U.S.A. sign city must supply documentation by submitting a copy of their approved application to the district office for the present year.  This must be done each year in order for the signs to remain next to the city limit signs.
+Auto tour signing is expensive to install and maintain and these costs are generally borne by the sponsoring organization requesting the signing. One of the primary issues with auto tour routes is they traditionally rely on signs to guide motorists along the path. If just one sign is stolen or damaged and taken out of service, the path is broken, and motorists can lose their way. In today’s technology and GPS guidance, there may be better more cost-effective ways of guiding motorists along an auto tour route. A sponsoring organization may want to consider instead of signing, such as a navigational map app for smart phone or GPS system. These types of apps are cheaper, can be easily updated, and are not as susceptible to failures like physical signs.
-TREE CITY U.S.A. and Neighborhood Watch signs shall be erected on a separate post, to be maintained by the city or others.  Signs and signposts should be furnished, installed, and maintained by the participating community.
+'''Standard. '''The Commission will consider marking an auto tour trail if the historic route or historic trail meets these minimum qualifications:
-'''Option.'''  Where there is a need for several of these awareness signs to be installed at a particular location they may be combined into an assembly with a maximum of two awareness signs per post and two posts per location.
-If there is not room to place the DISASTER RESISTANT COMMUNITY, Missouri Community Betterment, TREE CITY U.S.A., MADD, or DARE sign next to the city limit sign they may be located 200 ft. downstream from the city limit sign.  Counties participating in the storm ready program may have signs installed adjacent to county line signs with requirements similar to city installations.
+:A. The road has been designated historic in one of the following ways:
+:# The route is listed on the National Park Service’s National Register of Historic Places.
+:# The route is a National Park Service National Historic Trail
+:# The route has been designated as historic through state legislation or congressional action.
+:B. An organization shall exist who sponsors the historic route and who shall be responsible for determining the exact path of the historical road.
+:C. The historic route shall be a minimum of 50 miles long and contiguous in length.
-Any year beyond the first year a decal may be attached to the Tree City U.S.A. sign.
+Once a historic route or trail has been determined to qualify for auto tour signing, there are additional conditions and terms which must be met before signs can be installed on Commission right of way:
-DARE signs may also be located at the right of way line on routes that pass along school properties.  Counties participating in the DARE program may have signs installed adjacent to county line signs with requirements similar to city installations.
+:A. There shall be an agreement between the sponsoring organization and the Commission to define the responsibilities of each party. The agreement will have a 10-year term with options to renew the agreement. A new agreement will be executed as part of the renewal period. Any changes to the agreement during the 10-year period will void the agreement.
+:B. The sponsoring organization shall be responsible for paying a fee for the auto tour trail signing placed on Commission right of way. The fee shall be determined by the Commission and will cover the cost for initial sign installations as well as the estimated maintenance costs for the life of the 10-year agreement. If at the end of the 10-year term the sponsoring organization wishes to renew the agreement, the organization will be responsible for paying a renewal fee to cover the estimated maintenance costs for the subsequent 10 years. If a renewal is not executed with the Commission following the end date of the previous agreement the auto tour trail signing will no longer be maintained and will be removed from Commission right of way.
+:C. Historic route signs located on MoDOT right of way shall be installed and maintained by MoDOT per the agreement. These signs will always remain the property of the Commission and at the end of their life span will be disposed of as scrap material.
+:D. The Commission shall approve the path of the historic route prior to execution of the agreement.
+:E. The design of the sign used to mark the historic route shall be approved by the Commission as well as the Federal Highway Administration. The size of the sign shall not be larger than 24” x 30".
+:F. The Commission shall coordinate the fabrication of the approved historic route signs for both state route and non-state route portions of the historic route or path to assure uniformity in signing.
+:G. The installation of signs on Commission right of way shall be in accordance with MoDOT standards and specifications and approved by MoDOT prior to the execution of an agreement. The sign installations on routes outside of the Commission’s current right of way shall match the sign design and sign placement established for the state right of way, with the post selection meeting the approval of the local jurisdiction who owns the right of way the signs are being installed on.
+:H. If the path of the historic route travels on roadways outside of the Commission’s current highway system, the sponsoring organization shall acquire written commitments from local jurisdictions to allow the historic route’s path to traverse the local jurisdiction’s routes prior to the execution of the agreement with the Commission. These written commitments must also address how the signs will be initially installed along the local jurisdiction’s route as well as the commitments for the long-term maintenance of the signs. If these commitments cannot be obtained the historic route signing cannot be installed.
+:I. The auto tour path for the historic route shall be installed in a single phase within a year or less.
+:J. Any part of the Commission-maintained system shall be limited to a maximum of three concurrent historic route and/or trail designations.
+:K. The approved auto tour path shall be marked using trailblazer assemblies and confirmation assemblies installed on their own independent sign supports. The trailblazing assemblies shall comprise of one approved auto tour sign and the appropriate directional arrow. The confirmation assembly shall be comprised of only the approved auto tour sign. The confirmation assemblies shall be placed in advance of an intersection where the auto tour route makes a directional change, the confirmation assembly shall be installed downstream of the intersection where the auto tour route made the directional change. No other signs shall be installed along the route unless approved by the Commission. The Commission will work with the sponsoring organization to establish the sign installation plan identifying sign installation locations.
+:L. Cardinal Direction plaques shall not be used with auto tour route signing.
+:M. The AUTO TOUR (M17-1) auxiliary sign was an educational plaque, it is no longer used. All existing signs shall be removed from assemblies at the end of their life cycle.
-'''Guidance.'''  Bus stops should not be permitted on freeways and should be established only with the approval of the District Engineer.
+The TR15 agreement for the auto tour route signing for sponsoring organizations who are not state or federal agencies shall contain the following provisions:
-The location and spacing of the stops shall be consistent with both the needs of the bus passenger and a desirability of minimizing traffic flow disruption and operational hazards. Where bus stops are located at intersections, every effort should be made to place them on the far side unless operational considerations clearly indicate otherwise.  Every effort should be made to locate the bus stops off the traveled portion of the roadway.
+:A. The sponsoring organization for the historic route shall provide a detailed map and description for the path of the historic route to be included in the agreement between the sponsoring organization and the Commission.
+:B. The sponsoring organization shall have the funding for the installation and 10 years of maintenance in place before the agreement will be executed.
+:C. If the historic road crosses a state line, there must be agreement with the adjoining state or states on the signing and the routing of the historic route. If agreements with the other states cannot be reached the historic signing shall end at the last intersection in Missouri.
+:D. If approved, Auto Tour Route signs shall not be installed on freeways or expressways, except as necessary to provide continuity between disconnected segments of conventional roadways that are designated as auto tour routes, for which the freeway or expressway provides the only connection between the segments. If installed on freeways or expressways, Auto Tour Route signs shall be installed as independent trailblazer assemblies and shall not be installed with other Route signs or confirmation assemblies or on guide signs. If installed on freeways or expressways, Auto Tour Route trailblazer assemblies shall be installed at less frequent intervals than route confirmation assemblies.
-The shoulder width should be sufficient to allow clearance between the parked bus and the pavement and also permit storage of passengers and loading of the bus.
+'''Support. '''Historic trail signing with state or federal sponsorship are typically installed under a memorandum of understanding (MOU), that is drafted specifically for each trail.
-Signing for bus stops should be performed by municipality forces with standard red on white "No Parking - Bus Stop" signs following enactment of an enabling ordinance either on a blanket or specific location basis.
+The Mississippi River Trail (MRT), while listed here, is a US Bike route which was established through the AASHTO Route Marking process. The MRT Trail is a designated bicycle and pedestrian trail that traverses the shores of the Mississippi River in the United States. The trail extends from the headwaters at Lake Itasca in Minnesota to near the mouth of the river in Venice, Louisiana. Much of the trail’s 3,000 miles (4,800 km) follows roadways used by motor vehicles, although some of the route is on multi-use trails.
-No other bus system signing, such as trail blazing for bus routes, should be permitted on the state system.
+There are several approved historic routes and trails that follow state-maintained routes which include:
-'''Option.'''  Where a special need exists, the shoulder may be improved for safety and maintenance reasons.
+:A. [http://www.nps.gov/lecl/index.htm Lewis and Clark Trail] (M17-2)
+:B. [http://www.missouri66.org/ Historic 66] (M17-8, M17-8a)
+:C. [http://www.nps.gov/safe/index.htm Santa Fe Trail] (M17-4)
+:D. [http://www.nps.gov/oreg/index.htm Oregon Trail] (M17-3)
+:E. [http://www.nps.gov/trte/index.htm Trail of Tears] (M17-5)
+:F. [http://www.nps.gov/poex/ Pony Express] (M17-10)
+:G. [http://www.nps.gov/cali/index.htm California Trail] (M17-11)
+:H. Mississippi River Trail (MRT) bike trail / US Bike Route 45 (M17-7)
-Local bus officials may be permitted to install supplementary plates bearing schedules for the particular stop and other information relating to the bus operation.  Distinctive bus system logos may be permitted on the supplementary signs provided they are of a configuration, which will not prove distracting to motorists.  These supplementary signs should be installed beneath the municipality signs.
+'''Option. '''Exclusive to the Lewis and Clark Trail (M17-2) marker, signing may be placed on the Guide Signs to provide guidance along the approved path on freeways and expressways. If there is insufficient space on the guide sign to display the Lewis and Clark Trail, the trail sign may be hung below the guide sign in accordance with MoDOT Standards and Specifications.
-Signing for other mass transit systems, including park and ride lots associated with the system, will be allowed under guidelines similar to bus stops.
+{{SpanID|fig903.4.50.2}}
+[[File:Figure 903.4.50.2 Standard Application of Trail Signing.png|thumb|center|500px|alt=The figure shows a vertical two-lane, two-way road intersecting two horizontal two-lane, two-way roads. The lower horizontal road is labeled Route A. On the Route A approach from the left, an assembly with a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque mounted above a left-turn arrow sign is shown at the intersection with the vertical road. On the opposite Route A approach from the right, a square guide sign with the letter A is mounted above a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque at the intersection.
+On the vertical road at the upper horizontal road (Route B), an assembly on one approach consists of a WEST plaque mounted above a Route 7 shield, which is mounted above a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque. Just past this Route B intersection, farther along the same vertical roadway, a second assembly appears with the same sequence of plaques: WEST mounted above a Route 7 shield mounted above a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque.
+On the opposite side of the vertical road, for traffic approaching from Route A in the opposite direction, two assemblies are shown in sequence: first, an EAST plaque mounted above a Route 7 shield and a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque, followed farther along by a second assembly consisting of a Lewis and Clark Trail plaque mounted above a right-turn arrow sign.|'''Figure 903.4.50.2''' Standard Application of Trail Signing]]
-If the mass transit system has a logo they may incorporate it in to their sign.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.51}}903.4.51  Corridor Designations==
+<center>
+{|
+| [[File:M17-9.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|140px|'''M17-9''']]
+| [[File:M17-12.jpg|thumb|center|alt=|140px|'''M17-12''']]
+|}
+</center>
-==='''903.7.82 School Awareness Signs''' (MUTCD Section 2D.54)===
+'''Support. '''Corridor designations are typically multi-state route names established and/or implemented by neighboring state DOTs. In Missouri, the adoption of corridor designations was accomplished through Commission action.
-[[image:Drug Free.gif|center|thumb|<center>'''Drug Free'''</center>|100px]]
+There are two approved corridor designations currently in the state:
-'''Support.'''  Signs stating THIS IS A DARE DRUG FREE SCHOOL ZONE will be allowed at the right of way line on routes that pass along school property.
+'''[https://www.modot.org/us-route-61avenue-saints Avenue of the Saints] '''(M17-9) - The Avenue of the Saints was the concept of businessman Ernest Hayes of Mount Pleasant, Iowa who in the 1980s envisioned a four-lane highway between St. Paul and St. Louis. It was named by Gary Smith, who at the time was Executive Director of the Southeast Iowa Regional Planning Commission. Smith and Hayes convened a group of area business and political leaders, who organized an effort to convince the Iowa Department of Transportation to study the idea, which they did in 1988.
-A channel type post is recommended for the installation of the school awareness signs.
+In 1990 the FHWA chose its route for the Avenue of the Saints: the signed highway would follow the existing Interstate 35 from St. Paul to a point south of Clear Lake, Iowa; U.S. Route 18 to Charles City, Iowa; U.S. Route 218 to Cedar Falls, Iowa; U.S. Route 20 and Iowa Highway 58 around Cedar Falls and Waterloo, Iowa; Interstate 380 from Waterloo through Cedar Rapids to Interstate 80 near Coralville, Iowa and Iowa City, Iowa; U.S. Route 218 to Donnellson, Iowa; Iowa Highway 394 and Route B to Wayland, Missouri; and Interstate 64 and U.S. Route 61 from Wayland to St. Louis. The Intermodal Surface Transportation Efficiency Act of 1991 made the Avenue of the Saints an official "high-priority corridor," and signs were put along the route by the end of the year.
-'''Standard.'''  DARE signs shall be erected on a separate post, to be maintained by the city.
+On July 25, 2008, the final nine miles (14 km) of highway between the Lewis—Clark county line and Wayland, Missouri, was open to four-lane traffic. A ceremony was held at the intersection of US 61 and Route 27 to commemorate the completion of the four-lane highway in Missouri. The Avenue of the Saints is now complete from St. Paul to suburban St. Louis.
-In conjunction with Missouri Statues (RSMo 195.214) that addresses distribution of controlled substances near schools, one DRUG FREE SCHOOL ZONE sign shall be allowed per direction at the right of way line on routes where the right of way abuts school properties.  Schools wishing to erect these signs shall contact the district office prior to installation.
+Chicago - Kansas City Expressway (CKC) – The Chicago–Kansas City Expressway is a highway that runs between Chicago, Illinois, and Claycomo, Missouri. The road is known as Route 110 in Missouri and Illinois Route 110 (IL 110) in Illinois. The Illinois Route 110 was created through legislation on May 27, 2010, as the designated route for the Illinois portion of the Chicago–Kansas City Expressway.
-Signs and signposts for the THIS IS A DARE FREE SCHOOL ZONE and DRUG FREE SCHOOL ZONE shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the participating community.  Each sign should be installed 1,000 ft. from the end of school property.
+Missouri Route 110 and the Chicago-Kansas City Expressway designations were established through the actions of the Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission on January 4, 2012.
-'''Guidance.'''  The school should be informed of the importance of contacting utility companies since the sign will likely be in the utility corridor.
+=={{SpanID|903.4.52}}903.4.52  MoDOT Maintenance Signs (M19-2)==
+[[File:M12-2.gif|thumb|center|130px|alt=|<center>'''M19-2'''<center/>]]
+'''Standard. '''The MAINTENANCE ENDS (M19-2) sign shall be erected at the end of MoDOT maintenance on all marked highways except at a state line.
+The MAINTENANCE BEGINS (M19-1) sign has been discontinued for normal use. MoDOT shall no longer provide MAINTENANCE BEGINS signs. Existing MAINTENANCE BEGINS signs shall be left in place until they reach the end of their service life.
+'''Option. '''When state maintenance begins and ends at multiple locations along a route’s length as it enters and exits various municipalities, a MAINTENANCE BEGINS (M19-1) sign may be used to mark the boundaries of MoDOT maintenance responsibilities.
-[[Category:903 Highway Signing|903.07]]
+'''Guidance. '''The MAINTENANCE ENDS signs are not to be placed to mark the maintenance responsibilities for crossroads, such as within interchange limits unless there is a specific problem.

903.4 Guide Signs—Conventional Roads (MUTCD Chapter 2D): Difference between revisions

Latest revision as of 10:37, 13 January 2026

903.4.1 Scope of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards and Application (MUTCD Section 2D.01)

903.4.2 Color, and Retroreflection, and Illumination (MUTCD Section 2D.02)

903.4.3 Size of Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.03)

903.4.4 Lettering Style (MUTCD Section 2D.04)

903.4.5 Size of Lettering (MUTCD Section 2D.05)

903.4.6 Amount of Legend (MUTCD Section 2D.06)

903.4.7 Abbreviations (MUTCD Section 2D.07)

903.4.8 Arrows (MUTCD Section 2D.08)

903.4.9 Numbered Highway Systems (MUTCD Section 2D.09)

903.4.10 Route Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.10)

903.4.11 Design of Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.11)

903.4.12 Design of Route Sign Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.12)

903.4.13 Junction Auxiliary Plaque (M2-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.13)

903.4.14 Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Plaques (M3-1P through M3-4P) (MUTCD Section 2D.15)

903.4.15 Alternative Route Auxiliary Plaques - General (MUTCD Section 2D.16)

903.4.16 ALTERNATE Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1P) (MUTCD Section 2D.17)

903.4.17 SPUR Auxiliary Plaque (M4-1bP)

903.4.18 BUSINESS Auxiliary Plaque (M4-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.19)

903.4.19 TO Auxiliary Plaque (M4-5P) (MUTCD Section 2D.21)

903.4.20 END Auxiliary Plaque (M4-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.22)

903.4.21 Temporary Detour Signs and Auxiliary Plaques (MUTCD Section 2D.25)

903.4.22 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M5-1P, M5-2P, and M5-3P) (MUTCD Section 2D.26)

903.4.23 Lane Designation Auxiliary Plaques (M5-4P, M5-5P, and M5-6P) (MUTCD Section 2D.27)

903.4.24 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Plaques (M6 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.28)

903.4.25 Route Sign Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.29)

903.4.26 Junction Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.30)

903.4.27 Advance Route Turn Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.31)

903.4.28 Directional Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.32)

903.4.29 Confirming or Reassurance Assemblies (MUTCD Section 2D.33)

903.4.30 Trailblazer Assembly (MUTCD Section 2D.34)

903.4.31 Destination and Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.35)

903.4.32 Destination Signs (D1 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.36)

903.4.33 Overhead Arrow-per-Lane Destination Guide Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.37)

903.4.34 Combination Lane-Use/Destination Overhead Guide Sign (D15-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.38)

903.4.35 Destination Signs at Circular Intersections (MUTCD Section 2D.39)

903.4.36 Destination Signs at Intersections with Indirect Turning Movements (MUTCD Section 2D.41)

903.4.37 Location of Destination Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.42)

903.4.38 Distance Signs (D2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.43)

903.4.39 Location of Distance Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.44)

903.4.40 Street Name Signs (D3-1) (MUTCD Section 2D.45)

903.4.41 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.46)

903.4.42 Parking Area Guide Sign (D4-1, D4-1P, and D4-1a) (MUTCD Section 2D.47)

903.4.43 PARK - RIDE Sign (D4-2) (MUTCD Section 2D.48)

903.4.44 Signing on Conventional Roads on Approaches to Interchanges (MUTCD Section 2D.49)

903.4.45 WEIGH STATION Signing (D8 Series) (MUTCD Section 2D.51)

903.4.46 Truck and Climbing Lane Signs (D17-1 and D17-2)

903.4.47 Passing Lane / Alternating Passing Lane Signs (D17-3, D17-4, D17-4a)

903.4.48 Community Wayfinding Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.55)

903.4.49 National Scenic Byways Sign and Plaque (M10-1 and M10-1aP) (MUTCD Section 2D.57)

903.4.50 State-Designated Scenic Byway, Historic Trail, and Auto Tour Route Signs (MUTCD Section 2D.58)

903.4.51 Corridor Designations

903.4.52 MoDOT Maintenance Signs (M19-2)

Navigation menu

Search